SoundDiver User Manual Sound Diver_v3.0_manual Diver V3.0

soundDiver_v3.0_manual soundDiver_v3.0_manual

User Manual: soundDiver_v3.0_manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 464 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

E
Universal MIDI Librarian Management
and Editor Systems
User Manual Version 3.0
English
3
User Manual
Version 3.0
PACKAGE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BEFORE YOU OPEN THIS SEALED PACKAGE CARE-
FULLY READ THE FOLLOWING. OPENING THIS
PACKAGE INDICATES THAT YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINED INSIDE,
WHICH IMPOSES LEGAL OBLIGATIONS ON YOU
WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE
AND DOCUMENTATION. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT, DO NOT OPEN THIS PACKAGE.
INSTEAD, PROMPTLY RETURN THIS UNOPENED
PACKAGE AND ANY OTHER ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS, BINDERS OR DOCU-MENTA-
TION) THAT YOU MAY HAVE CONCERNING THIS
PACKAGE TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED
THEM FOR A FULL REFUND. IF YOU WOULD LIKE A
COPY OF THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE PRIOR TO
OPENING THE PACKAGE, PLEASE CALL +1 530-477-
1051.
4
Emagic
SoundDiver
Emagic Incorporated End User License
Agreement
NOTICE TO END USER: CAREFULLY READ THE
FOLLOWING LEGAL AGREEMENT. USE OF THE
SOFTWARE PROVIDED WITH THIS AGREEMENT
(THE “SOFTWARE”) CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEP-
TANCE OF THESE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY
RETURN THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANY-
ING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS
AND CONTAINERS) TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU
OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND.
1. License Grant.
EMAGIC Incorporated (“EMAGIC”) grants
to you (either as an individual or entity) a personal, non-trans-
ferable, and non-exclusive license to use the copy of the object
code version of the SOFTWARE recorded on the media
provided in this package. The term of this agreement and the
above license will be for the duration of EMAGIC’s copyright
in the SOFTWARE; provided, that such term shall automati-
cally expire if you breach any provision herein. Upon termina-
tion of this license, you shall return the original and all copies of
the SOFTWARE and documentation to EMAGIC or the place
where you obtained the PACKAGE, or certify to EMAGIC that
you have destroyed the original and all copies of the SOFT-
WARE and documentation in your possession and within your
control. You agree you will not copy the SOFTWARE except as
necessary to use it on a single computer system. You agree that
you may not copy the written materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. You may assign your rights under this Agree-
ment to a third party who agrees in writing to be bound by this
Agreement prior to the assignment and provided that you trans-
fer all copies of the SOFTWARE and related documentation to
the third party or destroy any copies not transferred. Except as
set forth above, you may not assign your rights under this
Agreement.
5
User Manual
Version 3.0
2. Copyright.
You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual
property in the SOFTWARE is transferred to you. You further
acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the SOFT-
WARE will remain the exclusive property of EMAGIC or its
suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the SOFT-
WARE except as expressly set forth above. You agree that any
copies of the SOFTWARE will contain the same proprietary
notices which appear on and in the SOFTWARE.
3. Reverse Engineering.
You agree that you will not attempt, and
if you are a corporation, you will use your best efforts to prevent
your employees and contractors from attempting, to reverse
compile, modify, translate, or disassemble the SOFTWARE in
whole or in part.
4. Limited Warranty.
EMAGIC warrants that the media
contained in this package is free from any physical defects for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase (“Limited
Warranty”). EMAGIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS ERROR FREE. EXCEPT FOR THE
FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY, EMAGIC MAKES
NO OTHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTIES AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR THE EXCLU-
SION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. AS TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY WHICH MAY NOT BE
DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, THE DURA-
TION OF SUCH WARRANTY IS 90 DAYS FROM THE
DATE OF DELIVERY. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE
6
Emagic
SoundDiver
OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION
TO JURISDICTION.
5. Customer Remedies.
EMAGIC’s entire liability and your sole
and exclusive remedy shall be, at EMAGIC’s option, to (a)
replace defective media or (b) authorize a refund, so long as the
SOFTWARE, documentation and media are returned to
EMAGIC with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is
void if a defect has resulted from accident, abuse, or misappli-
cation. Any replacement media will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period.
6. Severability.
In the event of invalidity of any provision of this
Agreement, the parties agree that such invalidity shall not
affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Agreement.
7. No Liability for Consequential Damages.
IN NO EVENT
SHALL EMAGIC BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDI-
RECT DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF THE EMAGIC SOFTWARE, EVEN IF EMAGIC
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL EMAGIC’S LIABILITY
FOR ANY CLAIM, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT
OR ANY OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY, EXCEED
THE LICENSE FEE PAID BY YOU.
8. Export.
You agree that you will not export or re-export the
SOFTWARE without the appropriate United States or foreign
government licenses and the express written permission of
EMAGIC.
9. U.S. Government Restricted Rights.
If this SOFTWARE is
acquired under the terms of: (i) a DoD contract: Pursuant to 48
CFR 227.7202 and its successors, use, duplication, or disclosure
by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in this
Agreement; or (ii) a Civilian agency contract: Pursuant to 48
CFR 12.212 and its successors, use reproduction, or disclosure
is subject to the restrictions set forth in this Agreement.
Unpublished—rights reserved under the copyright laws of the
7
User Manual
Version 3.0
United States. Contractor/Manufacturer: EMAGIC INCOR-
PORATED, 13348 Grass Valley Ave., Building C, Suite 100,
Grass Valley, California 95945.
10. Governing Law.
This Agreement will be governed by the
laws of the State of California as they are applied to agreements
between California residents entered into and to be performed
entirely within California. The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically
disclaimed.
11. Entire Agreement.
This is the entire agreement between you
and EMAGIC which supersedes any prior agreement, whether
written or oral, relating to the subject matter of this Agreement.
EMAGIC Product Warranty
1.
Product Warranty.
Product hardware and media are warranted
to be free from defects in material and workmanship during the
warranty period (as defined below). Product hardware is
warranted to conform substantially to EMAGIC’s then current
(as of the date of EMAGIC’s product shipment) published user
documentation during the warranty period. The warranty
period is twelve (12) months for product hardware and thirty
(30) days for media. Product support beyond these periods may
be available at additional cost—consult EMAGIC for details.
2.
Warranty Claims.
EMAGIC shall incur no liability under this
warranty if the end user fails to provide EMAGIC with notice
of the alleged defect during the applicable warranty period and
within thirty (30) days of its discovery. After receiving such
notice, EMAGIC’s technical assistance center (“tac”) will
notify the purchaser of its designation of one of the following
problem resolution methods:
Return to Factory:
The allegedly defective goods must be
returned to EMAGIC within thirty (30) days of TAC’s notice
8
Emagic
SoundDiver
and in accordance with EMAGIC’s Return to Factory repair
procedures.
Other:
TAC will use commercially reasonable efforts to repair,
correct or workaround the problem by means of telephone
support, including patches, corrective software releases or other
means reasonably determined by EMAGIC.
EMAGIC shall incur no liability under this warranty if
EMAGIC’s tests disclose that the alleged defect is due to
causes not within EMAGIC’s reasonable control, including
alteration or abuse of the goods. Under the Return to Factory
alternative, if a Product is determined not to be defective or to
have a defect due to causes not within EMAGIC’s reasonable
control, EMAGIC’s then current processing charge will apply.
3.
EMAGIC’S Liability.
EMAGIC’S liability, and end user’s sole
and exclusive remedy, shall be limited to the express remedies
set forth in this EMAGIC product warranty. This warranty
isvoid if the product serial numbers have been removed from
the product or if the product has been damaged by misuse,
modification or unauthorized repair. EMAGIC hardware does
not contain any user-serviceable parts.
4.
Disclaimer of Warranties.
EMAGIC MAKES NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
REGARDING PRODUCTS. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
AS TO THE QUALITY, CONDITION, MECHANTABIL-
ITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
NONINFRINGEMENT ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED.
5.
Limitation of Liability.
EMAGIC SHALL NOT BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT DAMAGES IN EXCESS
OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY THE END USER
OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDEN-
TAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS OR DAMAGES TO
BUSINESS OR BUSINESS RELATIONS OR, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, DAMAGES FOR
9
User Manual
Version 3.0
PERSONAL INJURY, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED IN
ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ANY EXCLU-
SIVE REMEDIES.
6.
Warranty Repair (Return To Factory).
If TAC designates
Return to Factory as the appropriate problem resolution
method, the following provisions apply.
(a) During the first three (3) months of ownership, EMAGIC
will ship a replacement for defective Product hardware covered
under warranty within twenty-four (24) hours. During the
fourth (4th) through twelfth (12th) months of ownership,
EMAGIC will repair or replace defective Product hardware
covered under warranty within ten (10) business days of receipt
of the Product. The warranty period for the replaced product
shall be ninety (90) days or the remainder of the warranty
period of the original unit, whichever is greater. EMAGIC will
ship surface freight. Expedited freight is at end user’s expense.
(b) The end user must return the defective Product to
EMAGIC within fourteen (14) days after the request for
replacement. If the defective Product is not returned within
this time period, EMAGIC will bill the end user for the Product
at list price.
7.
Out-Of-Warranty Repair (Hardware).
EMAGIC will either
repair or, at its option, replace defective product hardware not
covered under warranty within ten (10) working days of its
receipt. Repair charges are available from the repair facility
upon request. The warranty on a serviced product is thirty (30)
days from date of shipment of the serviced unit. Out-of-
warranty repair charges are based upon the prices in effect at
the time of return.
10
Emagic
SoundDiver
Credits
The contributors to this program and its operating manual are:
Concept,
programming,
project leader
Michael Haydn
Program
libraries
Jan Cordes, Felix Bertram, Markus Fritze,
Clemens Homburg, Gerhard Lengeling;
Troy Gaul, Infinity Systems, Ramon M. Felciano
Module
programming
Jens Altfelder, Ingo Debus, Michael Haydn,
Udo Hilwerling, Jochen Koeckler, Shehryar Lasi,
Robert Rampley, Malte Rogacki, Christian Roth,
Oliver Scheel, Marc Teichmann, Robert Vetter,
Petra Wolf
Adaptation
programming
AJ Command, Dan Alvarez, Mark Ayres,
Dietmar Belloff, Markus Bornheim, MaBu,
Knut Bültemann, Ingo Debus, G. Feierabend,
Michael Haydn, John o’Herron, Kurt Hofmann,
Ueli Karlen, Dirk Karsten, Klaus Keßner, Panos Kolias,
Detlev Krömer, Sascha Kujawa, Ingo Kunzi,
Mickey Lauer, Gerhard Mannal, Guido F. Marciano,
Erich Meier, Michael Müller, Siggi Müller, Paul Najar,
Heinz Naleppa, Matthias Pfüller, Jesus de la Rosa,
Joachim Rosenfeld, Malte Rogacki, Christian Roth,
Marc Schlaile, Wolfgang Schmid, Thomas Siebert,
Ulrich Sinn, Robert Skerjanc, Sonic Art Studio,
Marc Teichmann, Roland Vetter, Claude Voit,
René Walther, Ralf E.Watzlawik
Project
management
Jan-Hinnerk Helms, Thomas Sauer
Manual
Michael Haydn, Thomas Kerschbaum, Jan-
Friedrich Conrad, Peter Gorges
Manual layout
and editing
Uwe Senkler, Michael Haydn, Thorsten Adam,
Ole Lagemann
11
User Manual
Version 3.0
This documentation is printed on chlorine-free bleached
paper.
English transla-
tion
MusicSat London, Michael Haydn, Bob Hunt, Jeff
Bohnhoff
Beta test
management
Panos Kolias, Sascha Kujawa, Manfred Maraun
Beta-testing and
troubleshooting
Luca Anzilotti, Mark Ayres, Raymund Beyer,
Thomas Bleicher, MaBu, Daniel Buettner,
Michael Cretu, Eric Demeijer, Hans Engel,
Jos van Gemert, Mat Jarvis, Thomas Kern,
Thomas Kerschbaum, Scott Kirkham, Pit Löw,
Patrick Putzolu, Malte Rogacki, Holger Scheve,
Jochen Schmidt, Kristian Schultze, Thomas Siebert,
Martin Tomiak, Martin Volerich, Michel Weber und
viele andere
Support grate-
fully acknowl-
edged
Access, CM Automation, CML, Dynacord, E-
mu Systems, Ensoniq, Friend-Chip, Kawai, Kenton,
Klemm, Korg, Line 6, Lintronics,
MIDITEMP
,
music shop, Radikal Technologies, Roland,
Soundware Audio Team, Touched By Sound,
Yamaha, Young Chang, Waldorf
Special thanks to
Luca Anzilotti, Bülent Aris, Jennifer Batten,
Tomas Bodin, Bob Boykin, Michael Cretu,
George Duke, Dino Hermann, Dave Holland,
Rhett Lawrence, Kai Matthiesen, Stefan Raab,
Kristian Schultze, Klaus Schulze, Ian Underwood,
Wah Wah Watson, George Whitty, Hans Zimmer
12
Emagic
SoundDiver
13
User Manual
Version 3.0
Preface
Congratulations!
With SoundDiver, you have chosen one of the most powerful
editor/librarian systems available today. SoundDiver makes the
daily work of many top producers, musicians and keyboard
technicians easier and faster.
We are confident that you will appreciate the sheer number of
supported devices, the ease of operation, universal libraries and
flexible editors that have won SoundDiver acclaim from users
around the globe.
Version 3.0 introduces a stunning new user interface, simplified
operation and the unparalleled flexibility afforded by Control-
ler Assignments, which will further accelerate your use of
SoundDiver.
If you are new to SoundDiver, you will quickly discover the
previously hidden depths of your sound modules.
We are confident that once you have spent a little time with
SoundDiver, you will never want to go back to the arcane
menus and parameters found on the tiny LCD screens of most
MIDI devices.
SoundDiver would not have been possible without the assis-
tance of numerous external developers, adaptation authors and
beta testers.
In addition, many “regular” SoundDiver users have sent us
extensive feedback which motivated us to add new functions
and contributed to many of the improvements found in Version
3.0.
To all of these people, we’d like to say…
Many thanks!
Wishing you all the best with SoundDiver!
Michael Haydn & the Emagic team, September 2000
14
Emagic
SoundDiver
New Features in Version 3.0
For users who have upgraded from version 2.0 or 2.1 to Sound-
Diver 3.0, here are the most important new features. For
further reference, please look up a suitable key word in the
index.
Overall
•
New design similar to Logic Audio 4.x; photorealistic device
icons
•
Some terms have been replaced by easier ones:
Memory Manager
→
Device window; Surf!
→
Audition;
Dive!
→
Edit; AutoSurf
→
AutoAudition
•
Menu menu structure similar to Logic Audio 4.x
•
Key commands window; including some new features
•
ToolTips
•
Controller Assignments
•
Numerous new modules and adaptations
MIDI handling
•
Processing of incoming MIDI has priority to screen redraws
•
Full MIDI In handling: MIDI inputs can (but don’t have to)
be separated
•
MIDI loopback test
Setup window
•
Device icon is displayed in the parameter column
•
Improved icon positioning
•
Switching between icon and list view independent from font
size
Preferences
•
New page “Display”
•
Default preferences file has a different name; helps for
migration
15
User Manual
Version 3.0
Install window
•
Icon of the selected device is displayed in the left column
•
Width of the left column can be modified
Device window
•
Hiding of banks of a data type in the Device window
•
Names of deleted entries are still displayed
Editor window
•
When opening a second editor window, “Link window” is
disabled in all editor windows
•
Modules can open separate editor windows in a different
view. Example: VM-7100 EQs.
•
Text input now works with all parameter types. The value
which matches best the entered string is chosen.
•
: multi-column flip menus
•
: short click on a flip menu leaves it open, second click
closes it
Universal Module
•
icons may be imported
•
AutoPlay can be suppressed
•
Switch “Has keyboard”
16
Emagic
SoundDiver
Table of Contents
17
User Manual
Version 3.0
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 The Challenge… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
…the Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Universal, but Specially Tailored to Every Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
The Control Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mixed Libraries Manage Thousands of Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatic Recognition of Connected Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Convenient Editors in SoundDiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Ease of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.2 SoundDiver Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Macintosh vs. Windows versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SoundDiver OEM Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.3 About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 What the Package Includes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System Requirements for Windows Computers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System Requirements for Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.3 Connecting a MIDI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4 Connecting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
A Few Rules Governing the MIDI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Emagic’s Unitor Family and Other Patchbays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
MIDI Patchbays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
J.L.Cooper Synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
J.L.Cooper MSB-16/20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
J.L.Cooper MSB Plus and MSB Plus Rev2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Digital Music MX-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Ensoniq KMX-8 and KMX-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MIDITEMP PMM-44/PMM-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Roland A-880. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Waldorf Midibay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Other Patchbays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
18
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Macintosh Peculiarities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changed MIDI Ports with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.5 Installation of SoundDiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copy-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Installing a New Program on a Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Updating an Existing Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Authorizing the Hard Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Renewing the Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Removing an Authorization (Deauthorizing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Starting SoundDiver without Authorization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Optimization Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Formatting the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Completely Removing SoundDiver from the Hard disk . . . . . . . 64
2.6 Starting the Program for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Language Used in SoundDiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.7 Installing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
The Install Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Selecting the Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Scanning Using the Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Models which Cannot Be Scanned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Scan All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Manually Adding Devices to the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating the List of Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Check the MIDI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.8 Shortcut/Alias of the Program File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.9 The Diver Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.10 Windows File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.11 Installing Modules and Adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Removing Unwanted Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Removing Unwanted Adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.12 SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MIDI-Tasking on Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MIDI Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Any Other MIDI-tasking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
MIDI-Tasking on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Multi-client MIDI drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table of Contents
19
User Manual
Version 3.0
How to Block MIDI Ports (Windows:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SoundDiver as a Background Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.13 Compatibility of the Windows, Macintosh, and Atari Versions . 83
Converting Files between the three Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Converting Files from and to the Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.14 Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Modifier Keys on Macintosh vs. Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Save Your Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Menus and Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Special Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Key Commands Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Assigning a Function to a Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Learn Separate Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Assigning a Function to a MIDI Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deleting Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Switching MIDI Remote on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Checking the Function of a Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Making the Display Clearer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Finding Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Scroll to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Printing a Key Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Storing Key Command Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Importing Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Initializing Key or MIDI Event Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Entering Numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Chapter 3 Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
3.1 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2 Station 1: Setup and Install Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Installing Devices Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Window Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Local Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Scrolling the Contents of the Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.3 Station 2: The Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Contents of the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Requesting the Memory Contents of the Devices . . . . . . . . . . 104
Saving the Memory Contents of the Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
20
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Selecting Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Auditioning the Selected Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Moving and Copying Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.4 Station 3: The Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
User-definable Configuration of the Library Window . . . . . . . 108
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Moving Columns and Altering Their Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Mixed Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Dividing a Library into Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Find Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.5 Station 4: The Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Let’s Start… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
… in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Welcome to Pleasure-programming… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
A Handful of Editing Functions… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.6 Station 5: The On-line Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.7 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
The Mini-sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.8 Short Introduction to SysEx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
What is System Exclusive Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Device IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dump Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 4 SoundDiver’s User Interface
4.1 The Look of SoundDiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3-D Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SoundDiver 2.0 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2 General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Microsoft IntelliMouse™ (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Contextual Menus (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
The Computer Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Moving the Cursor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Defining the Font Used (Windows Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table of Contents
21
User Manual
Version 3.0
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.3 Managing the Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
The Standard Gadgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scroll Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
The x/y Scroll Gadget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Automatic Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Altering a Window’s Column Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Moving Windows in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Closing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Enlarging the Window to Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Floating Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setting and Recalling Screensets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Copying a Screenset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Multi-monitor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.4 Selecting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Selecting Individual Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Selecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Rubber Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inverting the Selection in an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.5 The Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.6 The File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Open… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Close Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save as… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Revert to Saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Save Preferences as… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Page Setup… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Print… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Import… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Export MIDI File…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Capture as MIDI-File… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.7 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
22
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Undo… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Redo…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
The Text Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Library/Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Strategies Used in Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Select all. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Toggle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Find…/Find again. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.8 The Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AutoAudition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AutoPlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
MIDI Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Hold Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Send MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
All Notes Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Reset Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Maximum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.9 The Windows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Storing Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Switching Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table of Contents
23
User Manual
Version 3.0
Protecting Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Copying Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Reverting to a Stored Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Sequencer-controlled Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Open Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Open Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Open Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Open Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Open Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Open Install Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Open Sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Open MIDI Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Open Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Larger View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Smaller View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Next Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Zoom Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Close Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tile Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tile Windows Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Stack Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Window List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Library List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.10 On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Help Menu for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Help… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Search Help… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
How to Use Help… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Common Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
About SoundDiver… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
License Agreement…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
SoundDiver Features…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Emagic Distributors…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Layout of the Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
The Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
The Control Bar on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Operating the On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
24
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Standard Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
“Module” Module (e.g. JV1080 Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
“Model” (e.g. XP-80). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Scan…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
MIDI…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
SysEx Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Memory Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
“Data type” (e.g. Patch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
“Bank” (e.g. Performance Mode Temporary Patches) . . . . . 178
Device Parameter box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Credits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
“Data type” Editor (e.g. Patch Editor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
“Parameter group” (e.g. TVA Envelope)… . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
“Parameter” (e.g. Cutoff Frequency)… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.11 The ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
ToolTips in the Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ToolTips in the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adjust ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Particularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.12 The Mini Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Drum Autoplay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Free Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Store Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4.13 MIDI Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
MIDI In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MIDI Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Time Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
… of Status Bytes Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Note Off, …, System messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table of Contents
25
User Manual
Version 3.0
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 5 The Setup Window
5.1 Installing Your Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2 Installing New Devices Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.3 Interactive On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.4 Graphic Display of the Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Icons and Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Activating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Moving Icons with the Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Import New Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Opening a Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Deinstalling a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.5 Contextual Menu on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.6 The Device Parameter Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Hiding and Displaying the Parameter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Out Port and Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Issues Particular to Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Issues Particular to the Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Inputs and Outputs Using Patchbays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Connected to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Out Port (of the Patchbay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Return to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Input (of the Patchbay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Thru Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Preserve Thru-Port/Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Send Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Play Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Patchbay Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Master Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Auto Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.7 Special Device Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
26
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Help on Special Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Special Parameters for Patchbays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Patchbay Program and Standard Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
5.8 Interactive On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.9 Local Menus in the Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Install… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Scan All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Load and Transmit File …. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Build Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Save as…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Export … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Save Library for Logic Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Store All Edits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
As Icons/As List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.10 Automatically Creating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.11 Device Selection Strategy when Sending from a Library. . . . . . 214
Chapter 6 The Device Window
6.1 Data Consistency between the Device and Device Window. . . 218
6.2 Entry Dependency Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Devices with Individual Edit Buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.3 The Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
The Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Zoom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Layout of the Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
The Contents of the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Entries with Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Entries Shown in Gray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Names of ROM Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.4 Functions in the Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Selecting Entries in the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Selecting Entries Using Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Exchanging, Moving and Copying Entries with the Mouse . . . 228
Exchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Table of Contents
27
User Manual
Version 3.0
Using the Edit Menu to Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete Entries . . 229
Editing Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.5 Contextual Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.6 The Device Parameter Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.7 Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.8 Interactive On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.9 Dependency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.10 Local Menus in the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Load and transmit File… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Audition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Build Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Save as…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Export… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Append to Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Link Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Next Device/Previous Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Select Data Type via Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.11 MIDI Functions of the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Requesting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Transmitting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Requesting the Device Window Contents at Power-up . . . . . . 239
6.12 Saving the Device Window to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Saving the Device Window as a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Reloading the Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Reloading Part of the Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Saving the Device Window Contents Automatically . . . . . . . . 242
6.13 Remote Control Adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Chapter 7 The Library
7.1 What Is a SoundDiver Library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.2 The Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
28
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Opening and Closing a Library File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Opening a Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Selecting Entries in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Selecting Child Entries as Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
7.3 Mouse Operations in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
7.4 Contextual Menu on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.5 Managing Libraries on Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.6 Creating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.7 Automatically Loading a Library on Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.8 The Layout of the Library Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Altering the Order of the Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Altering the Widths of the Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
The View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Size of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.9 Sort Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Sorting within the Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
The Sort Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Sort by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Sort by Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Sort by Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Sort by Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Auto (AutoSort) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Undoing Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Sorting a Zoned Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Sort Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
7.10 The Parameter Box for Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Adding Text to Multiple Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Sizing and Hiding the Parameter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Table of Contents
29
User Manual
Version 3.0
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
The Dependency List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.11 Local Library Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Audition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Devices with Individual Edit Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Store Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Delete Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Insert Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Insert File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.12 Requesting Library Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.13 Sending Library Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Default Destination Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.14 The Find Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Opening the Find Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
A Simple Find Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Starting the Find Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Repeating the Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
More Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
What . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Special Issues with the Criterion “Data”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Comparison Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
The Find Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Selection of the Entries Found. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Select One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Add to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Select in Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Keep First, Delete Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Search in All Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Less Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.15 Importing from Other Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Importing Polyframe Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Importing Standard MIDI Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Conditions for the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
How the Import Function Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Import of Files with Several Dumps for the Same Entries. . . 278
30
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Import from a Song File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Unrecognized Dumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Importing SYX Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Conditions for the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
How the Import Function Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Import Functions for Specific Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Format Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Data Format for the Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.16 Exporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Exporting Standard MIDI Files (SMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Exporting SYX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Limitations with File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Questions and Answers on File Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.17 Converting the Sounds of Related Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.18 Saving a Sound Bank as a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Editable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
All Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Selected Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Known Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
“Save as…” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Load and Transmit File… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Loading for a Single Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Importing Different Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Sending Entries from the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Changing the Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Deleting the Memory Location Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
The Edit Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.19 Practical Examples for Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Instantly Saving Sounds for a Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Archiving Layered Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Chapter 8 Editing with SoundDiver
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.2 Opening the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
The Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
8.3 The Easy Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.4 Navigating the Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Table of Contents
31
User Manual
Version 3.0
8.5 Selecting the Parameter to Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Parameter Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
MIDI Thru Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.6 Editing Parameters with the Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Using the Mouse as a Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using the Mouse to Decrement/Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Flip-menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Mouse Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Windows: Keyboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Editing a Flip-menu Object without a Flip-menu . . . . . . . . . 305
Editing with Graphic Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Keyboard Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Keyboard Velocity Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.7 Inputting Values via the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Number-input Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Text Input Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Increasing or Decreasing Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.8 Inputting Values via MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.9 AutoPlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.10 Edit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.11 Contextual Menu in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.12 More than One Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.13 The Edit Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Multiple Edit Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
MIDI Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.14 Remote-control and Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.15 Undo Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.16 Clipboard Functions in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Selecting a Parameter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Clipboard Functions for Selected Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Cutting a Parameter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Copying a Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Pasting a Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Drag-and-Drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Deleting a Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.17 Local Windows in the Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
32
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
The Compare Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Store in…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Snapshots Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Autostore Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Find Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Learn New Controller Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
The Local View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Link Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
New Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Other Local Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Adaptation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Other Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.18 Closing the Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.19 Recalling Editor Window Contents in the Next Session . . . . . . 328
Chapter 9 Controller Assignments
9.1 What’s a Controller Assignment? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
First Example of a Controller Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Controller Assignment Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fader Box Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Example for Creating a Controller Assignment . . . . . . . . . . 333
9.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
9.3 The Controller Assignments Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
The Data Inside the Controller Assignments Window . . . . . . . 337
Handling of Controller Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Table of Contents
33
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Local Assignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Finding Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Parameters of a Controller Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Lo7 min/Lo7 max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Memory Offset/LS Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Controller name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Short name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Requires Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Local Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Controller Assignment Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
9.4 Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Learn Mode Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Learn Mode in the Controller Assignments Window . . . . . . . . 346
Learn Mode in the Editor Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Learn Mode with Launch of the Controller
Assignments Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Learn Mode without Launch of the
Controller Assignments Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
9.5 Fader Box Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fader Box Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Defining Controller Assignments with Drag-and-drop . . . . 348
Finding Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Automatic Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Motor Fader Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Display Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
9.6 Controller Assignment Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
The Current Controller Assignment Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Display of current Controller Assignment Set on Fader Box . . . 352
Remote Control of Current Controller Assignment Set . . . . . . 352
Defining by Drag-and-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
34
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Predefined Controller Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Defining Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Chapter 10 AutoLink
10.1 What Is Autolink?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10.2 How Do You Start Autolink?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Starting AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Starting AutoLink in OMS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10.3 MIDI Communication with AutoLink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
MIDI Thru in AutoLink Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Create Logic Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10.4 The Sound Names in Logic Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Selecting a Sound in Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Configuring the MIDI Channel for Program Change Detection 363
Sound Names in a Multi Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
If AutoLink Doesn’t Work… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10.5 Remote-controlling Logic by SoundDiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Key Commands for Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
10.6 Changing Logic’s Track Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Set Logic Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
10.7 Saving Song Data in a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Save Entries Used by Logic Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Automatically Loading and Sending the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . 370
10.8 Recording Parameter Changes in Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
What to Look out for with Real-time SysEx Editing . . . . . . . . . 373
10.9 Displaying Recorded Parameter Changes in SoundDiver . . . . . 374
10.10 Recording Dumps in Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
10.11 Synchronizing Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
10.12 Open SoundDiver for Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Chapter 11 The Universal Module
11.1 The Differences between Modules and Adaptations . . . . . . . . 380
Differences in MIDI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Differences in Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Other Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
11.2 Editing Adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
The Adaptation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table of Contents
35
User Manual
Version 3.0
Edit… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Altering Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Defaults for Timeout, Send Pause, Play Delay . . . . . . . . . . . 383
11.3 Creating Your Own Adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Chapter 12 The Preferences
12.1 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Particular Issues on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
MIDI Input Buffers per Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
KB per MIDI Input Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Ignore MIDI In Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
USB Plug-and-play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Particular Issues on the Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Modem Port/Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Display of Recognized Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Options for Modem and Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Use MIDI Manager if Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Use OMS if Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
OMS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Particular Issues in AutoLink Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Synchronize Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Process Incoming MIDI only for Active Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Check Device Connections at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Additional Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Request Retries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.2 Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Save Device Entries in Preferences File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Auto Snapshot Every x s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Dependency Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Mouse as Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Fader Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Num Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Deauthorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.3 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Different Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Hide Value in Linear Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
3D Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
36
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
Sound Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Show Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Flicker-free Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
When Pointing on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
While Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
12.4 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Loading Device Entries from Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Saving Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Overwriting Memory Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Deleting Doubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Editing Unknown Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Closing Altered Editor Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Overwriting Edited Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Create Logic Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
12.5 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Auto-save Libraries Every x min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Reopen Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Check Doubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Prefer Selected Devices as Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
12.6 Preferences File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Contents of the Preferences File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Creating the Preferences File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Saving Preferences Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Saving Preferences Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Saving Preferences in the Current File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Save Preferences under a Different File Name . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Loading Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Rebuild the Content of the Install Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Reload Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Reset Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Appendix A Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
A.1 Differences of Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
A.2 Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Table of Contents
37
User Manual
Version 3.0
Appendix B Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Appendix C Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
C.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
C.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
C.3 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
C.4 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
C.5 MIDI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
C.6 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
C.7 Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
C.8 Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
C.9 AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Appendix D Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
38
Table of Contents
Emagic
SoundDiver
The Challenge…
39
User Manual
Version 3.0
Introduction
1.1 The Challenge…
Anyone who uses synthesizers these days potentially has access
to thousands of sounds. In addition, there are effects devices,
MIDI patchbays and other peripheral devices from which data
can be accessed and then managed or archived.
Synthesizers and other MIDI devices offer limited options for
effectively archiving this data and having it available at the
right moment. A synthesizer’s user interface simply cannot
compete with the convenience of a monitor and a mouse. They
also often lack sufficient memory or storage options like a hard
disk, or even a floppy disk drive. Finally, they rarely provide
Chapter 1
40
Chapter 1
Introduction
Emagic
SoundDiver
suitable software for finding and sorting your growing library of
patch data.
…the Solution
All of the above shortcomings can be solved using your
computer. A Mac OS machine or a Windows 98 PC has the
necessary hardware and computing capacity to hold dozens of
sound banks and libraries in its working memory.
SoundDiver provides an intelligent link between the computer
and your MIDI devices. First and foremost, SoundDiver is a
sound management program. You will probably have already
come across programs described as “dump utilities”, “sound
managers” or “librarians”. All these programs deal with the
saveable data of synthesizers, drum machines, effects devices,
MIDI patchbays and so on. Of course SoundDiver can do all of
these things, but it also does much more.
Universal, but Specially Tailored to Every
Device
SoundDiver is a modular system designed to work with almost
any MIDI device. Modules are already supplied for many
devices. The program code for each specific device is stored in
a separate module file. The advantage is, that only modules you
need at a time will occupy space in the working memory and on
your hard disk.
In addition to modules, SoundDiver allows you to create and
save your own adaptations for any MIDI device. This means
you can add devices to your SoundDiver system without wait-
ing for them to be programmed by Emagic or a third party
developer. This is made possible by the Universal Module. This
module can simultaneously manage multiple adaptations. Your
SoundDiver program comes with a large number of adaptations
ready for use. If you are interested in creating your own adapta-
tions, there is a text file version of the programming manual.
The Challenge…
41
User Manual
Version 3.0
Please contact your national distributor for how to obtain a copy
of this file, or go to http://www.emagic.de to download this
file.
Unlike many other universal programs, SoundDiver knows
every detail of those devices for which it has a module, and can
therefore make full use of its particular capabilities. For exam-
ple, SoundDiver’s SY99 module can convert DX7 sounds, and
the Microwave module can manage wave tables.
SoundDiver supports remote control. With this feature any
parameter can be controlled by any MIDI message—which
makes using fader boxes especially convenient.
The Control Center
SoundDiver can be the control center of your MIDI system. It
knows all of the connected devices and their memory contents.
If you alter anything, SoundDiver automatically considers all
the repercussions of the alteration. This makes it virtually
impossible for you to unintentionally alter or delete any of your
files.
SoundDiver uses a Device window with contents that are always
a mirror image of the memory contents of the corresponding
device. If a discrepancy arises—e.g. because you have copied a
sound within the device itself—you can restore the data using
simple commands.
SoundDiver’s Entry Dependency Management also ensures that
the connections between child patches and parent patches
remain intact. Let’s say you create a voice for a Yamaha EX5
and save it to a new memory location. The reference of all the
performances that refer to this program is automatically
updated—you don’t have to worry about doing it yourself.
Best of all, with SoundDiver, you can manage all your sounds
directly on the screen—you never need to touch the device
itself.
42
Chapter 1
Introduction
Emagic
SoundDiver
Mixed Libraries Manage Thousands of
Entries
You also will not have to search through the individual library of
each synthesizer for certain sounds. That’s because Sound-
Diver lets you collect sounds from different synthesizers into
one library.
Open your “Bass Sound” library, and up comes every bass
sound in your MIDI rig, regardless of the device it belongs to!
All you have to do is click the entries and SoundDiver automat-
ically sends the sound to the right synthesizer and ensures that
the master keyboard will play that specific synthesizer.
This feature relieves you of tiresome management work, leav-
ing your mind free for what is most important: concentrating on
the music and having the right sounds available at the right
time.
Automatic Recognition of Connected
Devices
SoundDiver can independently recognize your MIDI setup.
From the Install window, you can ask SoundDiver to automat-
ically scan your MIDI system and install the located devices.
Their memory contents can be automatically transferred to the
computer.
Convenient Editors in SoundDiver
There are Editors for nearly all devices recognized by Sound-
Diver. Even with so many Editors, each Editor has the same
number and type of features that you might only expect in a
program dedicated to a specific device. Features like:
•graphic display and editing of all parameters including enve-
lopes, sound structures and effects;
The Challenge…
43
User Manual
Version 3.0
•an Easy Page, where you can effect global changes with just
a few parameters;
•copying, cutting and pasting of parameter groups between
voices and elements;
•randomize functions.
Although each individual Editor is specifically tailored to a
particular device, all the Editors follow the same general lay-
out and conventions. This makes it easy to use all of the Editors
once you have learned to use just one.
Ease of Use
Despite all of these different options, SoundDiver is easy to
use.
Functions are logically and conveniently grouped into local
menus contained in the individual windows or inserted in the
menu bar.
We have tried to standardize the menus and key commands
whenever possible. For example, the standard menus and key
commands which are found in other Emagic programs are
exactly the same. Of course key commands can be changed to
fit your personal needs.
SoundDiver’s window technology allows you to open several
windows of a sound bank or library and configure the display of
your sounds according to your own wishes. You can save up to
90 of these so-called screensets and recall them instantly with a
key command.
Once again here is a quick summary of the main features:
•SoundDiver is universal: it is designed to work with any
MIDI device. Powerful modules or adaptations are supplied
for most devices. You can create your own adaptations for all
other devices.
44
Chapter 1
Introduction
Emagic
SoundDiver
•SoundDiver is user-friendly—you don’t need to know
anything about System Exclusive data to operate the main
program. You don’t have to know what a dump request or a
manufacturer’s ID is, so you can concentrate fully on your
sounds. However, if you are a MIDI pro, SoundDiver offers
you all sorts of options for editing the pre-supplied adapta-
tions to suit your own taste, or for creating your own patches
from scratch.
•SoundDiver gives you instant access to the right sounds. You
can also create as many libraries with as many entries as you
want, all of which can be searched and sorted. SoundDiver
libraries can also mix the data from different devices within
one library.
•SoundDiver keeps an overview of your entire setup. It
knows the data structure of all the devices and automatically
adjusts any inter-related data to take account of any changes
that are made.
•SoundDiver offers all of this plus convenient Editors for
your devices. Despite the fact that each Editor is specifically
tailored to one device their operation is uniform.
The section Installation from page 49 onwards will explain how
to install SoundDiver and arrange your MIDI setup. In page
95 you can try out what you have just learned on the real thing,
as we take a tour through SoundDiver’s different levels.
Enjoy!
1.2 SoundDiver Variants
SoundDiver is a very powerful program, that allows you to
manage your sounds and other SysEx data in a homogenous
way with direct access to all your data at all times.
It is available in several flavors:
SoundDiver Variants
45
User Manual
Version 3.0
Macintosh vs. Windows versions
SoundDiver is available in more-or-less identical versions for
Windows 98/2000 and Mac OS. The variations in the program
versions relate solely to:
•the details of the file and window management used by the
respective operating system;
•support of color and fonts;
•the contents of the preferences window
•the search window (section The Find Function from page 268
onwards)
•the different hardware accessories—in particular the avail-
able MIDI ports and MIDI interfaces;
•support of MIDI system extensions such as MIDI Manager
or OMS.
SoundDiver OEM Versions
Special versions of SoundDiver come bundled with some
devices, e.g. “SoundDiver EOS”or “SoundDiver K5000”. The
differences from the retail version are:
•SoundDiver OEM is not modular, but has only one Module
integrated into the program code. The Module cannot be
exchanged.
•SoundDiver OEM is not copy protected. Installation
consists of simply starting the program.
•When the program is initially started, the Scan function is
initiated automatically. If the device is not found, you can
install the device manually.
•Only one device can be managed.
•SoundDiver OEM can only open a single library at a time.
Opening a second library first closes the previously opened
one.
46
Chapter 1
Introduction
Emagic
SoundDiver
•As there is no Universal Module available. Adaptations
cannot be used or created.
If you have received this manual for SoundDiver OEM, you
should take the above limitations into account. If you are inter-
ested in the retail version of SoundDiver, please note:
•all files created by SoundDiver OEM (Libraries, prefer-
ences) are fully compatible with SoundDiver.
•SoundDiver contains all Modules of the OEM versions.
As a user of SoundDiver OEM, you can purchase the Sound-
Diver retail version for a special price by contacting your
national Emagic Distributor.
1.3 About this Manual
This SoundDiver manual covers both, the Macintosh and
Windows versions of SoundDiver. Differences between the
two operating systems are explained, and the affected para-
graphs are marked with an icon (see right).
Paragraphs which apply only to the Macintosh version are
marked with “:”.
Please contact your national Emagic Distributor for the avail-
ability of SoundDiver documentation for other languages.
Emagic manuals are always as up-to-date as possible. However, improvements and
additions are sometimes made after an instructional manual has been printed. These
are covered in a Readme file contained on the program disk. We recommend that
you print this file and keep it with your SoundDiver manual. This way you always
have the information handy for when you’re working with the program.
This manual covers SoundDiver Version 3.0. If your program
version is newer, any changes will be listed in the above-
mentioned Readme file.
Concepts
SoundDiver (the program) is available in various languages.
About this Manual
47
User Manual
Version 3.0
If a concept isn’t clear, you can look it up in the glossary
contained in the appendix section of this manual. All of Sound-
Diver’s concepts (e.g. entry, module) are explained there.
Menu Functions
Menu functions are shown in this type face: Function.
If a function can be reached via a hierarchical menu, the levels
are separated this way: Menu > Menu entry > Function.
Key Commands
Most key commands in SoundDiver are user-definable. There-
fore, this manual only shows the fixed assignments and modi-
fier keys in clear text.
For user-definable key commands, you see only this symbol to
the side. The currently assigned key command is displayed by
SoundDiver at the right of the menu item or in the Key
Commands window.
As some key commands and modifier key assignments differ
between the Macintosh and Windows versions, they are shown
abbreviated as the following example depicts: ç (: S). This
means: on Windows, hold down the ç key, and on Macintosh
the S key.
Explanations
Additional hints and tips which are not necessarily required to operate SoundDiver
are displayed like this.
X
48
Chapter 1
Introduction
Emagic
SoundDiver
What the Package Includes
49
User Manual
Version 3.0
Installation
2.1 What the Package Includes
Your SoundDiver package contains the following components:
•the SoundDiver CD
•this manual
•a registration card.
Please complete the registration card as soon as possible and
send it to your country’s distributor.
It is only after you have registered that you will have access
to…
•a regular update and support service via the Internet:
http://www.emagic.de
•support via our Hotline:
in the USA phone 1-530-477 1050, fax 1-530-477 1052
in Germany phone +49-4101-495-110
in other countries: please ask your country’s Emagic distrib-
utor.
Users of SoundDiver OEM (i.e. special versions included free of charge with some
MIDI equipment) are not entitled to use the phone hotline. Please use the above
mentioned Internet facilities.
Chapter 2
50
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
2.2 System Requirements
System Requirements for Windows
Computers
•Pentium computer
•Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, 2000. Windows 98 Second Edition
is recommended.
•MIDI interface with 32-Bit compliant Windows driver. For
details see section Connecting a MIDI Interface on page 51;
•Large high resolution display recommended
•Autolink with Logic Audio Version 4.0 upwards.
•Supported: Microsoft IntelliMouse™, 3-button mouse and
multiple monitors on Windows 98 and Windows 2000.
System Requirements for Macintosh
Computers
•Power Macintosh (68k Macs are no longer supported as of
version 3.0).
•System 7.1 or higher. Mac OS 9.0 or higher is recommended.
•MIDI interface. SoundDiver supports the following inter-
faces:
- all Emagic interfaces (Unitor8, Unitor8 MkII, AMT8,
MT4), either via serial or USB connection
- all MTP compatible interfaces (e.g. MIDI Express, MIDI
Time Piece I/II/AV, Studio 4/5).
- all interfaces with an OMS driver
- all interfaces with a MIDI Manager driver
•Large high resolution display recommended
Connecting a MIDI Interface
51
User Manual
Version 3.0
2.3 Connecting a MIDI Interface
Windows
To use SoundDiver for Windows 95/98 or Windows NT 4.0/
2000, you will need a MIDI interface. A MIDI interface is an
optional accessory, and is not supplied with your PC. They are
available in a variety of configurations, such as ISA cards or
external devices which connect to the printer, serial or USB
port.
You can use any MIDI interface which comes with a 32-bit
compliant Windows driver. Please note that drivers for
Windows 3.1x may work with Windows 95/98, but not with
Windows NT4.0/2000. For this operating system, you need
dedicated drivers.
MIDI interfaces essentially differ in the number of connections
and additional features, like SMPTE synchronization. For
smaller setups, we recommend the Emagic MT4, for larger
setups the AMT 8 and Unitor 8 MkII. These interfaces are
fully compatible with Logic Audio and SoundDiver.
If you want to use an Opcode 8Port/SE, use driver version 1.62 and enable “Back-
wards compatibility” in the driver properties. Driver versions 1.50 and 1.60 don’t
work.
If you want to use a MotU interface (e.g. MIDI Express XT), use driver version 1.01.
Driver version 1.04 does not work reliably with SysEx data.
Many sound cards have a built-in MIDI interface. Most of those sound cards have an
important restriction: they do not allow the simultaneous transmission and reception
of MIDI data (referred to as full duplex mode—not to be confused with full duplex
mode for audio input and output). This ability is extremely important for reliable
operation with SoundDiver. Just as important is that the MIDI driver reliably transmit
system exclusive data. This unfortunately is not the case with many sound cards. If
you experience problems, you should consider purchasing a dedicated MIDI inter-
face.
52
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Macintosh
To operate SoundDiver you need to have a MIDI interface
connected to the modem, printer and/or USB port. A MIDI
interface is an optional accessory, and is not supplied with your
Macintosh. If you don’t have a MIDI interface, ask your music
dealer for advice regarding a suitable model.
You can use any MIDI interface. The special features of the
Emagic Unitor8 are directly supported by SoundDiver. This
also applies to Emagic’s Unitor8 MKII, AMT8, MT4. The
MIDI Time Piece (from Mark of the Unicorn) MIDI Express,
MTP II and MTP AV, as well as Opcode Studio 4 and Studio 5
are also supported.
MIDI interfaces basically differ according to the number of
ports they have, and whether they come with or without a
(SMPTE) synchronizer. For smaller setups, we recommend the
Emagic MT4, for larger setups the AMT 8 and/or Unitor 8
MkII. These interfaces are fully compatible with Logic Audio
and SoundDiver.
2.4 Connecting the System
SoundDiver works best if you connect your MIDI setup in
accordance with the following guidelines:
1. every MIDI device that SoundDiver is going to work with
should be connected with the computer in both direc-
tions. If you are using one or more patchbays please refer
to the section MIDI Patchbays on page 54 below.
2. connect the MIDI Out of the device with the MIDI In of
the MIDI interface and vice versa.
In theory you can connect several devices to a simple MIDI interface, by chaining
them via their MIDI Thru ports. The drawback is that because the MIDI Outs of the
devices are not connected to the Computer, SoundDiver can only communicate with
the devices in one direction. This means that you lose some of SoundDiver’s options
(automatic recognition, auto request, for example.).
Connecting the System
53
User Manual
Version 3.0
We strongly recommend selecting a MIDI interface system that allows the direct
connection of all MIDI devices with the computer in both directions. Plan to use one
MIDI input and output per unit and avoid MIDI thru chaining. The expandable
Unitor8 MkII/AMT8 system is ideal for this purpose.
•you will find more detailed information on setting up your
device in the on-line Help for the relevant device. To call
this up, click the device in the Setup window and select
Windows > Help. There will usually be a reference for
“Installation”.
A Few Rules Governing the MIDI
Configuration
If you have the correct MIDI configuration, SoundDiver can
save you the effort of reprogramming patchbays or swapping
cables around by automatically establishing all the connections.
To guarantee faultless operation and the greatest data safety,
we recommend you adhere to the following simple rules:
•a device should not be simultaneously connected to two
different patchbays, although you can connect the MIDI
Out of a device to a patchbay and the MIDI In to the
computer, or vice versa.
•a device’s input must not be connected directly to the
computer while its output is connected to a patchbay’s input,
as this combination cannot be recognized by SoundDiver’s
Scan function.
•although you can use two identical devices (e.g. two Yamaha
EX5R) with the same device ID, these must be connected to
different MIDI ports of the computer (this also applies to
devices which don’t have a device ID at all, e.g. Oberheim
Matrix-6/6R/1000 and all Alesis devices). However, it is
always better to use different device IDs.
X
54
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Emagic’s Unitor Family and Other
Patchbays
All of Emagic’s MIDI hardware products (Unitor8, Unitor
MkII, AMT8, MT4) provide more functions than simple
patchbays, they include multiport MIDI Interface facilities. In
general, patchbays can be edited at their front panel. The possi-
bility of editing via SoundDiver or via Unitor8 Control elimi-
nates the need to have editing facilities at their front panel.
SoundDiver’s patchbay modules are able to generate assign-
ments within the patchbay to connect a device in both direc-
tions to your computer.
MIDI Patchbays
If you have a MIDI patchbay, this will be fully supported by
SoundDiver. Ideally the patchbay will also be completely
remote-controlled by SoundDiver. All the common patchbays
are directly supported, so that SoundDiver can reprogram the
data paths within the patchbay via SysEx. For patchbays which
are not addressable via SysEx, SoundDiver uses Program
Change commands. In this case, you will have to configure the
required patches manually.
This flexible patchbay support offers you the following options:
•you can connect several patchbays simultaneously
•each patchbay can be connected to a different computer
output
•any number of patchbay inputs can be connected to
computer outputs, as well as any number of patchbay
outputs can be connected to computer inputs. This is impor-
tant if you want to use your sequencer with more than 16
MIDI channels, or the bandwidth of a MIDI cable is not
sufficient.
The cabling is detected by SoundDiver automatically, however, SoundDiver always
uses the first detected input and output when a device is accessed for SysEx data
Connecting the System
55
User Manual
Version 3.0
transfer. Therefore, if you have changed the cabling after the initial setup, perform
the Scan function again, or enter the changes in the Special parameters section in
SoundDiver.
•you can connect the patchbays in any sequence you want—
the exact order doesn’t matter.
SoundDiver supports the following MIDI patchbay models
with dedicated modules:
•J.L.Cooper Synapse, MSB 16/20, MSB Plus and MSB Plus
Rev2
•Digital Music MX-8
•Ensoniq KMX-8 and KMX-16
•MIDITEMP PMM-44/PMM-88
•Roland A-880
•Waldorf Midibay
J.L.Cooper Synapse
❏Define the MIDI In which is connected to the computer as
“Remote In”. To do this hold down the [MODE] key, press
key [18] and set the parameter with keys [12] and [13].
❏define the MIDI Out of the Synapse which leads to the com-
puter as “Remote Out”. The procedure is the same as de-
scribed in the above section but use keys [14] and [15]
instead. If you later connect another MIDI Out to the com-
puter, you will have to scan the patchbay again.
❏set the remote channel to 16. In PC mode, set the Remote
Channel using buttons [16] and [17].
❏don’t store any data in memory location 64 of the patchbay
because this will be overwritten by SoundDiver during the
scan operation, and also when the patchbay is switched over.
J.L.Cooper MSB-16/20
❏Keep in mind that all commands sent to the MSB 16/20 must
come in on the INPUT PORT assigned to OUTPUT
56
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
PORT #20 and that the output data will go out of the OUT-
PUT PORT(s) that are assigned to INPUT PORT #16.
❏Please check the MSB manual for information on which in-
put accepts SysEx-Data.
❏The help file contains additional information.
J.L.Cooper MSB Plus and MSB Plus Rev2
❏Byte 16 dictates the SysEx Output Port assignment (0=port
1, 1=port 2, etc.)
❏SysEx info is dumped to this output port.
❏The help file contains additional information.
Digital Music MX-8
❏Route the MIDI In which is connected to the computer to
processor A. Select the In/Out screen with the “Function”
key, move the cursor to the digit to the left of “→A” and en-
ter the appropriate input with the data keys.
❏If you experience problems, make sure that the MX-8 has
firmware version 1.51 or newer. The version number is
shown at power-up.
Ensoniq KMX-8 and KMX-16
Please bear the following in mind when installing either of
these patchbays:
❏Connect the computer with MIDI Inputs 1 (and possibly 2)
of the patchbay, not Inputs 3 to 8 or 16.
❏With the KMX-16, also be sure that the computer MIDI In-
put and Output are connected with the same port of the
patchbay. Thus, if the computer’s MIDI Out goes to MIDI
In 1 of the KMX-16, the computer’s MIDI In must go to
MIDI Out 1 of the KMX-16.
Connecting the System
57
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏Set the KMX-16’s MIDI channel and Device ID to identical
values in SoundDiver.
MIDITEMP PMM-44/PMM-88
Configure the output of the computer as the master input of the
patchbay:
❏double-click mode
❏edit
❏key 6
❏now press the number of the input. In the display you can
set the MIDI channel for incoming Program Change com-
mands (U stands for unchanged, i.e. all channels). Make
sure that this does not conflict with the MIDI channels of
the other devices
Don’t store any data in memory location 128 of the patchbay,
because this location will be overwritten by SoundDiver during
the scan operation, and also when the patchbay is switched
over.
Only the values 11 to 20 are recognized as possible Device IDs
for reasons of speed, even though the device will recognize 0 to
127.
The PMM-44/PMM-88 will only work with SysEx data if the
data arrives on its master input. If the device isn’t responding,
check this.
The PMM-44/PMM-88 will only work with SysEx data and
Program Changes if the data arrives on this input.
So that the device will react to SysEx, define the master input:
❏Double-click on MODE, 1x EDIT and finally button 6 “U”
Now press the button of the input number that’s connected
to the computer.
58
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Be sure your PMM has a software version of 2-4 or newer. The
version is shown at power-up. If you have an older version,
please contact MIDITEMP.
Roland A-880
❏Make sure that the A-880 has firmware version 1.03 or high-
er. If you experience problems, please contact Roland.
You can determine the version of the A-880 by switching on
the patchbay while pushing Output buttons 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 (all
together). The LED’s give you the version number: LED 1
= 0.01, 2 = 0.02, 3 = 0.04, 4 = 0.08, 5 = 0.16, 6 = 0.32, 7 = 0.64,
8 = 1.28. Add the LEDs to get the version number.
❏Configure the MIDI In which is connected to the computer
as “Control In”: hold down the input key when you switch
on the A-880.
SysEx and Program Change messages are processed on this
input only.
❏The Device ID is the same as the Program Change channel.
It can be set at the device by pressing the “MEMORY” and
“WRITE” buttons together while pressing the correspond-
ing number button.
❏Define the MIDI Out of the A-880 which is connected to the
computer as the mix output.
Waldorf Midibay
❏Connect the computer to Source 1 and Destination 1
❏Don’t set the unit number to “off” or “omni”: press [Mode]
five times. The display shows “un” followed by the unit
number. Use the Up and Down keys to set a value from 1 to
16
Don’t store any data in memory location 99 of the patchbay,
because this will be overwritten by SoundDiver during the scan
operation, and also when the patchbay is switched over.
Connecting the System
59
User Manual
Version 3.0
Other Patchbays
In the next section you will learn how to start SoundDiver for
the first time. It is therefore recommended that you set up your
patchbay so that SoundDiver can address all the connected
devices through it. Before you start SoundDiver you should set
your patchbay so that:
❏the MIDI Out of the computer can address all the MIDI Ins
of the connected devices
❏the MIDI Outs of the connected devices are connected to a
MIDI In of the computer.
If your patchbay doesn’t allow you to simultaneously connect
the MIDI Outs of the connected devices with the MIDI In(s)
of the computer please refer to the section The Setup Window on
page 191 in Chapter 5 The Setup Window.
If at the beginning of the scan operation, a MIDI Thru loop is
revealed you should set the patchbay to an empty program and
reprogram the connections.
Macintosh Peculiarities
Emagic Interfaces Connected via a Macintosh’s USB-Port
SoundDiver supports Emagic’s Unitor8 Mk II, AMT8 and
MT4 connected via USB-Port. OMS is not needed. Hot swap-
ping is possible.
Macintosh Computers with No Modem/Printer Port
If a Macintosh Computer does not have a modem and/or printer
port, this is recognized and shown accordingly in the prefer-
ences: the ports are not available.
If a GeeThree Stealth or a Griffin gPort in a G4 or a blue/white G3 is used, you have
to install the appropriate system extension (“Stealth Serial Port Software 1.0.3” from
<http://www.geethree.com/download.html>, or “gPort Driver 1.1” from <http://
www.griffintechnology.com/g3/>). If it’s not installed, SoundDiver will not recognize
these modem port extensions.
60
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Changed MIDI Ports with Windows
When MME MIDI drivers are added or deleted (or if their
settings are changed), the enumeration of MIDI ports may
change. SoundDiver takes this into account. If a port is not
found an appropriate alert is shown (“MIDI Port xxxx not
found”). This makes it much easier to look for the missing port.
In certain cases it’s a good idea to check the functionality of the
MIDI connection, using Options > Loopback test…. A detailed
description can be found at section Loopback Test from page 162
onwards.
2.5 Installation of SoundDiver
Copy-protection
SoundDiver is protected against illegal copying by special soft-
ware protection. This protection is transparent and is contained
on the SoundDiver CD. You can make as many copies of
SoundDiver as you like onto a hard disk, but these will only
work if the SoundDiver CD is temporarily inserted.
To prevent the need to insert the SoundDiver CD every time
you start SoundDiver, you should authorize the hard disk. This
authorization can be undone if you want to sell your Sound-
Diver licence. Installation is covered in the next section.
•The authorization is saved in the boot partition (Windows) or
Start Volume (Mac). If you are booting from a different parti-
tion or Volume, please authorize this partion or Volume as
well.
•Multiple copies of SoundDiver can be used at different loca-
tions on your machine—only one authorization is needed.
The program file itself does not contain any authorization
information, so that this file can be deleted, copied or moved
as you like.
Installation of SoundDiver
61
User Manual
Version 3.0
You will be asked for the CD every now and then to ensure that
you still have it.
Starting one week before the authorization is due to expire, a
warning will appear when you launch SoundDiver. Insert the
SoundDiver CD as soon as possible, to renew the authorization.
Installing a New Program on a Hard Disk
On the SoundDiver CD you will find an installation program.
Start this program and read the explanations carefully.
You can make any number of copies of the SoundDiver
program file on several hard disks. However, to make a copy
that will run without the need to insert the SoundDiver CD,
you need to authorize the hard disk (see the section Authorizing
the Hard Disk on page 61).
Updating an Existing Program
If you want to update SoundDiver with an update CD, or install
new modules, install the file as usual—either in a new folder or
by overwriting the existing files. The hard disk authorization is
not affected, and you can start the new version immediately.
If you are merely updating modules or adaptations—for example, from http://
www.emagic.de—just copy the new files into the Diver folder. If a warning appears
telling you that the file already exists, click Replace or Replace All. The next time you
run it, SoundDiver will automatically use the new Module or Adaptation version.
Authorizing the Hard Disk
If you are asked to authorize, or if you want to authorize for the
first time, please follow these steps:
❏Start SoundDiver by double-clicking the SoundDiver icon
(Windows: also by selecting the menu item Programs >
Emagic > SoundDiver > SoundDiver in the Start menu).
❏If the original CD is not inserted you will be asked to do so.
62
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏The authorization window will appear
❏Select Authorize in order to allow SoundDiver to be started
from your hard disk. From now on you will be able to run
SoundDiver without using the original SoundDiver CD. A
message will appear confirming this:
SoundDiver has been successfully authorized. You can autho-
rize at any time from CD.
❏Select Quit and the installation will be aborted.
Renewing the Authorization
From time to time you will be asked to renew the authorization.
The following message will appear:
Hard disk authorization will expire in 7 days. Do you want to
reauthorize now or later?
The authorization will expire 7 days after the warning has been
displayed for the first time. It doesn’t matter if SoundDiver is
used in this period or not.
After expiration this message will appear:
Hard disk authorization has expired. You have to re-authorize
from CD.
To avoid this, please renew the authorization as soon as you are
asked for it.
Removing an Authorization
(Deauthorizing)
Removing the authorization has no effect on the program files
or any libraries you have created. Only the authorization file is
removed (If you want to delete files, see the section Completely
Removing SoundDiver from the Hard disk on page 64).
❏Start SoundDiver.
Installation of SoundDiver
63
User Manual
Version 3.0
Open the global settings from Options > Settings > Global
Settings. Click the Deauthorize button. You will get a safety
alert:
Deauthorizing does not require that the CD be inserted.
Starting SoundDiver without
Authorization
You may also start SoundDiver without an authorization. This
can make sense where you want to temporarily use the program
on someone else’s computer. To do this you always need the
original SoundDiver CD:
❏insert the original SoundDiver CD
❏copy SoundDiver to the desired hard disk, and start the copy
by double-clicking its SoundDiver icon. The authorization
dialog box will appear
❏select Continue, and SoundDiver will start.
Optimization Programs
SoundDiver’s copy protection is not affected by disk optimiza-
tion and defragmenting programs. You may use programs such
as Speed Disk or DiskExpressII as often as you like.
Formatting the Hard Disk
If you format or partition a hard disk which is authorized for
SoundDiver, you need to authorize SoundDiver afterwards.
It is not sufficient to make a file backup of the hard disk and
restore it after formatting the hard disk.
64
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Completely Removing SoundDiver from
the Hard disk
To remove SoundDiver completely from the hard disk:
❏remove the authorization as described above, then
❏delete the SoundDiver file, the Diver folder, the libraries and
preferences (: don’t forget the SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences
file in the Preferences folder of the System folder) from the
hard disk.
2.6 Starting the Program for the
First Time
When you start the program for the first time SoundDiver
carries out a few automatic routines that allow as rapid and
correct an installation of your MIDI system as possible. To
ensure that everything functions as well as it should, before you
start the program for the first time, please check that:
❏all devices and any patchbays being used are correctly con-
nected in both directions with the computer
❏all devices are switched on and their MIDI parameters cor-
rectly set. Make especially sure that their System Exclusive
capabilities are enabled, and that similar or identical devices
are set to different Device IDs or MIDI channels
❏: AppleTalk is disabled if it uses LocalTalk. LocalTalk in-
terferes with MIDI communication and can cause transmis-
sion failures.
When SoundDiver is started for the first time, a variety of
dialog boxes appear that present you with the first steps before
scanning.
: SoundDiver starts by opening the Preferences window in
which you define the MIDI port(s) via which the devices and
the computer communicate. You only need to activate the
Installing Devices
65
User Manual
Version 3.0
Printer port here if you have a MIDI interface connected to the
Printer port.
Language Used in SoundDiver
Depending on the currently selected keyboard layout, all
menus and dialogs are displayed in English or German. This is
done automatically—no configuration is necessary; Each
program and Module file contains all text in both languages.
If you want to use SoundDiver in a language different from the
keyboard layout, please refer to the section Language on page
412 and the section Language on page 403.
Support of additional languages is possible. If you are interested, please contact your
country’s Emagic distributor. If desired, you can order a SoundDiver manual in
German, or other languages as well.
2.7 Installing Devices
SoundDiver automatically opens the Setup and Install
windows when started for the first time. Later, you can open
them manually by selecting the menu item Window > Install in
order to install devices. The installation is required for all
subsequent communication.
Installation is very easy: all you need do is select the devices
that SoundDiver is to install, and press R. SoundDiver does all
the rest on its own.
Optionally, you can also click Scan all, in which case all devices
supported by SoundDiver are scanned. Please be aware that
this may take a while.
The following sections cover the installation of devices in
detail.
66
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
The Install Window
The Install window is where you can ask SoundDiver to scan
the devices, or where you can install them manually.
Selecting the Models
First select the desired devices in the Install window before
you scan or manually add them. You may select one or more
models. If you select more than one model, SoundDiver carries
out the desired operation for each model in turn. SoundDiver
shows the icon of the selected device beneath the buttons.
What you can select:
•To select just one model, click its line.
•To select more than one model click each respective line
while pressing ç (: S).
•A second ç (: S) click on a line deselects it.
•To select all the models, select Edit > Select All. In this case
you can use Toggle selection to undo what you’ve done. Please
bear in mind, though, that scanning all the devices
supported by SoundDiver takes a long time, as there are a lot
of them.
Installing Devices
67
User Manual
Version 3.0
Scanning Using the Keys
The Install window allows you to target the names of specific
devices by using the computer keyboard. Considering the
growing number of modules and adaptations, this method of
finding things is much quicker than scrolling the list.
To find a specific device, activate Caps Lock with Y (the key
above S—the Caps Lock LED must be lit, this is the one built
into the Y key on Mac keyboards. On PC keyboards, it is the
middle of the three LEDs on the keyboard) and type in the first
few letters of the model name while the Add New Devices
window is open. The selection beam will jump to the nearest
match it finds.
If you type something like “DX4” SoundDiver finds the DX7,
because it sees the letters DX in several model names, though
not “4”. In this case the next number up that it finds is “7”.
This function relates solely to model names, not those of the manufacturers.
Pressing T allows you to jump around the list alphabetically in
ascending order. ST does the same in reverse.
Scanning
Click the Scan button to start the process. You can also press R
or double-click the name. SoundDiver now analyzes your
MIDI system, and automatically installs the devices it finds,
together with the correct connection settings.
This option is preferable to manual installation, as SoundDiver is then able to gather
the maximum information about the devices, and human-error (incorrectly set MIDI
parameters or connections) is avoided.
After scanning, a dialog box will appear in which you can tell
SoundDiver to directly request the memory contents of any
device that’s been found.
If the scan does not work, please refer to Appendix C Trouble-
shooting on page 421. Here you will find detailed solutions to
various problems.
68
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Bear the following in mind: as most of the SoundDiver modules
apply to a whole family of models, a scan for a specific device
often finds related devices as well, such as finding a TG77
when you wanted an SY99.
SoundDiver supports MIDI patchbays in general, and is capa-
ble of automatically controlling the overall communication with
the patchbay where this is possible. Patchbays, for instance, can
be reprogrammed via SysEx to allow devices to be scanned that
are not patched with the computer in the current patchbay
program.
Important advice when using patchbays:
•The special support for MIDI patchbays is only possible
with patchbays for which there is a dedicated module. You
can find a list in the section MIDI Patchbays on page 54.
•If you scan devices individually, you should always first scan
the patchbays, or the devices connected to it won’t be found.
You can abort this procedure pressing ™ (: ™ or C…).
•Before you start scanning, you should set the patchbay in
such a way that there are no MIDI loops with the computer.
If there are, scanning takes much longer, besides which
incorrect connections may prevent devices from being
found.
Models which Cannot Be Scanned
Some devices cannot be detected by the scan option because
either;
•they don’t have a MIDI output
•they don’t process request messages, and thus cannot iden-
tify themselves
•the Adaptation is not dedicated to a specific device (e.g.
Generic) and thus scanning is not possible
•the Adaptation for the device does not yet support the Scan
function.
Installing Devices
69
User Manual
Version 3.0
In this case, the affected devices are not scanned, and their
names are shown in italic typeface.
You will get an appropriate message at the end of the scan
process.
Scan All
If you are not sure which devices are connected to the
computer, or you don’t want to select the models to be scanned
manually, simply click this button. Then SoundDiver will scan
for all supported models. This can take some time, depending
on the MIDI interfaces and patchbays.
Manually Adding Devices to the Setup
You can also manually add the selected devices to the Setup. In
this case you have to manually set parameters such as their
Device IDs and connections.
You should only add a device manually when it cannot be scanned (e.g. if it has no
MIDI Out port or doesn’t support scanning), or for test purposes.
To manually add the selected devices to the Setup,
❏click the Add button,
❏or press çd (: Cd),
❏: or O-double click one of them.
If there’s already a compatible device in the Setup, you will be asked whether you
really want to add the new device. The newly-added device will be given a new
Device ID by SoundDiver: you will need to manually alter the ID in the device itself to
match SoundDiver.
The message “No more Device IDs” signifies that all the available IDs are being used
on the current output (or the device doesn’t have a Device ID). In this case you should
connect one of the existing devices to a different output of the computer.
: you can double-click module or adaptation files in the Finder, or drag them onto
the SoundDiver icon. The Installation window will then open, and the relevant
models will be selected. A dialog box allows you to select between scanning and
manual installation.
70
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Done
Once you have completed the scanning or installation of the
devices, click Done. The window will close. You may also press
™ or ç£ (: ™ or Cw).
Help
In the Install window, SoundDiver’s on-line Help shows you
the Help message for whichever model is first selected. To
open the Help, select Windows > Help or click the Help button.
: If you open the Help using OH, it becomes a “floating
window”. (Use the “Help” menu with Windows). More on this
can be found in the section On-line Help on page 171 in Chapter
4 SoundDiver’s User Interface.
Creating the List of Models
You may copy all or part of the list of the available models into
the clipboard for further work in a word processor, or for print-
ing out.
Select the devices you want and select Edit > Copy.
There is a complete list of all the models on the SoundDiver CD. Double-click the
SoundDiver 3.0 Model List file.
Check the MIDI Connection
If the scanning fails, it’s wise to check the MIDI connection
using the Options > Loopback test… A detailed description can
be found at section Loopback Test from page 162 onwards.
X
X
Shortcut/Alias of the Program File
71
User Manual
Version 3.0
2.8 Shortcut/Alias of the
Program File
In Windows 95/98, you can create a shortcut for SoundDiver on
the Desktop. By double-clicking this icon, you can start Sound-
Diver extremely quickly.
Under System 7 or later, you can create an alias of SoundDiver
and keep the alias on the Desktop or in the Apple Menu Items
folder within the System folder. This allows you to always have
the program handy without having to search for it. Of course,
you can also create an alias of a library, and start SoundDiver
directly from this library
2.9 The Diver Folder
All module and adaptation files used by SoundDiver are placed
in a specific folder, named Diver, so that SoundDiver can find
them. This folder is created automatically the first time you
start the SoundDiver program (if it does not exist already).
: If there is not enough space on the volume where Sound-
Diver is installed you can move the Diver folder to a different
volume. This is how you do it:
❏Move the folder to the desired position.
❏Delete the old folder.
❏Create an alias of the new folder (select Make Alias from the
File menu in the Finder).
❏Move this alias to the position of the old folder (in the same
folder as the SoundDiver application).
❏Delete the suffix “Alias” so that the alias is called “Diver”.
This also works with the Libraries folder.
72
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
2.10 Windows File Types
SoundDiver uses different file types for saving sound libraries,
help files or modules. The following file name extensions are
used, which help you to recognize the type of file you are deal-
ing with:
2.11 Installing Modules and
Adaptations
SoundDiver’s Install window shows only the modules and
adaptations which are currently located in the Diver folder.
Removing Unwanted Modules
To save space on your hard disk, you can delete module and
adaptation files from the Diver folder or move them somewhere
else. This automatically results in a shorter list in the Install
window.
Also see the section Rebuild the Content of the Install Window from
page 412 onwards.
File type Ending Description Created by
library ∗.LIB Library file with sounds or
other effects programs from
various MIDI devices
SoundDiver by selecting “Save”
from the File menu
module ∗.DLL
(Windows)
module for a specific MIDI
device
the installation program when
installing a module
adaptation ∗.ADA file for the universal module
containing the adaptation for
a MIDI device
the installation program when
installing an adaptation
help file ∗.HLP text file for On-line Help in a
Module or Adaptation
the installation program when
installing a Module or Adapta-
tion
prefer-
ences
∗.PRF saveable default settings SoundDiver when you quit or
select “Save Preferences as…”
SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking
73
User Manual
Version 3.0
Removing Unwanted Adaptations
If you change the contents of the Diver folder (where adapta-
tions and modules reside), the change will not be reflected
within SoundDiver’s Install Device list until you delete the file
Universal Module Cache from the Diver folder. This forces the
Universal module to rebuild its list of adaptations at the next
start-up of SoundDiver. This operation may take a little time.
Also see the section Rebuild the Content of the Install Window from
page 412 onwards.
2.12 SoundDiver and MIDI-
Tasking
You can run SoundDiver either alone or simultaneously with
other programs on your computer.
SoundDiver is compatible with AutoLink.
: SoundDiver also is compatible with the OMS and MIDI
Manager multitasking MIDI systems
SoundDiver will behave slightly differently, depending on the
MIDI-Tasking environment.
AutoLink
Logic Audio’s AutoLink mode gives you many options. For
details see page 357.
74
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
MIDI-Tasking on Macintosh
OMS
What is OMS?
OMS or “Open Music System” (formerly “Opcode MIDI
System”) is a system extension that functions between applica-
tion programs and the physical MIDI ports. OMS allows you to
define so-called “nodes” which represent single devices of your
external MIDI setup. These nodes (generally referred to as
“Devices”), consist of a name, information about where the
device is connected, on which MIDI channels it receives, and
so forth. You can create, modify or delete OMS Devices with
the OMS Setup application. For further information see the
OMS manual.
When you use OMS as a MIDI system driver, SoundDiver does
not know anything about the MIDI interfaces or the real phys-
ical ports. All information about this is hidden in the OMS
system, and is inaccessible to application programs like
SoundDiver. Instead, OMS provides the above mentioned
Devices for communication, and makes sure that the data flow
from and to the Devices is managed correctly, in case data
streams have to be merged.
The main value of OMS, as compared to Autolink for example,
is that it allows you to use several MIDI programs from differ-
ent companies at the same time.
When You Should Use OMS
SoundDiver supports all MIDI functions of OMS and is
compatible with versions 1.2.3 and 2.x (the Name Manager and
Time Manager are currently not supported).
However, you should install OMS only if you want to simulta-
neously use other MIDI programs which don’t support Auto-
Link with SoundDiver, like Steinberg Cubase or Opcode
Vision
SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking
75
User Manual
Version 3.0
You don’t need OMS to use a MIDI interface from Opcode.
The Studio 4 as well as the Studio 5 can be used in MTP
emulation mode without limitations, unless you want to use
more than one Studio 5 connected to a serial port.
Use SoundDiver in OMS mode with OMS 2.2 or newer on PowerBook 1xx models.
These have a problem with the Power Manager, a part of the System software which
may lead to incoming MIDI bytes being “eaten up” if you don’t use OMS.
When OMS Becomes Active
OMS is active (i.e. accesses the serial ports) only as long as at
least one program has signed in to OMS. Thus, it is not neces-
sary to move OMS out of the System folder to deactivate it.
Simply quit all OMS applications.
This is very useful when you have an Opcode interface, but
don’t want to use SoundDiver with OMS. These interfaces
need the OMS Setup program to configure the MTP emulation
and to stripe SMPTE code.
Before you run SoundDiver (without OMS), please quit the OMS Setup program to
deactivate OMS again. Otherwise SoundDiver would complain that it cannot access
the serial ports.
SoundDiver in OMS Mode
To run SoundDiver with OMS, select Options > Settings > MIDI
Interface Communication… and set Use OMS if available to
always.
When OMS is installed, SoundDiver will instantly switch to
OMS mode.
For each device installed in SoundDiver, the output assign-
ment is stored separately for OMS and non-OMS operation.
This allows you to easily switch SoundDiver between using
OMS or not, without requiring that you reassign the outputs
every time you change the mode.
76
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Scanning in OMS Mode
SoundDiver can scan your MIDI studio in OMS mode.
However, it is necessary that for every output of your MIDI
interfaces, an OMS Device be defined. This usually happens
automatically when you install OMS 2.x.
For MTP compatible MIDI interfaces (including the Emagic
Unitor8 and MIDI Express), the OMS installation process
usually adds a “top level” node which sends on all outputs.
Such nodes are skipped by SoundDiver in the scanning
process, as they are not helpful for finding out the exact cabling.
The MIDI patchbay support described in the section MIDI
Patchbays on page 54 is also available in OMS mode, however
this does not have to do anything with the definition of MIDI
patchbays in OMS.
Synchronization of Port Assignments with/without OMS
SoundDiver automatically synchronizes port assignments with
and without OMS:
•when a device has been scanned without OMS, it will auto-
matically get the correct OMS port assignment when
switching to OMS mode.
•and vice versa
This allows you to alternatively scan with and without OMS
mode, and prevents the creation of duplicate devices in the
Setup window.
Of course this feature works only with MIDI interfaces that work with OMS (usually
via a driver for OMS provided by the manufacturer) as well as without OMS.
MIDI Thru and Mini Sequencer in OMS Mode
MIDI thru and SoundDiver’s mini sequencer are also available
in OMS, however only while SoundDiver is in the foreground.
If you have configured your OMS sequencer to generates
MIDI Thru even in background, you should switch off MIDI
Thru and AutoPlay in SoundDiver.
SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking
77
User Manual
Version 3.0
Communication with Logic in OMS Mode
It is possible to use OMS and AutoLink simultaneously in
Logic and SoundDiver. This gives you the convenience of
AutoLink without needing to do without simultaneous opera-
tion of OMS programs.
In this mode, Logic and SoundDiver exchange MIDI output
information in the OMS format (rather than MTP cable
numbers).
To enable OMS and AutoLink, simply activate the options Use
AutoLink if available and Use OMS if available in Logic, as well
the option Use OMS if available in SoundDiver.
Now you have all options of AutoLink available. For further
details, please refer to the section AutoLink on page 357.
If you are using Logic and SoundDiver simultaneously, it is not possible to use one of
them without OMS if the other is using OMS.
Communication with Other Programs in OMS Mode
In OMS, the so-called IAC Bus is available (IAC stands for
“Inter-Application Communication”). This allows you to send
MIDI data from one application to another within the
computer. Thus, you can record parameter changes or dumps in
a sequencer program.
Recording SoundDiver data in the sequencer
❏Make sure that the sequencer program has the IAC Bus ac-
tivated as an input
❏start recording
❏switch over to SoundDiver
❏change the device’s output whose data you want to record,
to the IAC Bus (in the Device Parameter box)
❏generate the desired MIDI messages, e.g. by moving a slider
in an editor
❏reset the device’s output to the original setting.
78
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you want to use this function often, you should instead
❏define an OMS Patch with a “Virtual Instrument” which
sends to the OMS node as well as to the IAC Bus, using a
“Splitter Object”. For further details, refer to the OMS man-
ual or your Opcode interface’s manual.
❏select this “Virtual Instrument” as the output for the device
in SoundDiver.
If this is too complicated for you, you should use Logic and AutoLink instead. In this
case, you don’t have to configure anything, and you can even start recording from
within SoundDiver. Also see the section Recording Parameter Changes in Logic on
page 371.
Displaying recorded data in SoundDiver during playback
❏Create a “Virtual Instrument” that sends to the device as
well as to the IAC Bus, as described above
❏select this “Virtual Instrument” in the track which contains
the recorded data
❏start playing back.
A similar feature is available in AutoLink as well. See the section Displaying Recorded
Parameter Changes in SoundDiver on page 374.
MIDI Manager
SoundDiver is compatible with the Apple MIDI Manager,
which was the standard driver for nearly all MIDI software
applications before OMS became popular. We recommend that
you only use the MIDI Manager if you want to run SoundDiver
in parallel with other MIDI applications which don’t support
AutoLink or OMS.
To install the MIDI Manager, drag the “MIDI Manager” and
“Apple MIDI Driver” files into the System folder. They will be
automatically stored in the correct locations. You should also
install “Patchbay™”.
You should use MIDI Manager 2.0 or newer. Older versions can
cause communication problems.
SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking
79
User Manual
Version 3.0
After installing the MIDI Manager, please restart the
computer.
There are seven separate software inputs and outputs available
which you can configure in “Patchbay™”. The settings made
there are memorized by SoundDiver and automatically recalled
at the next session. You don’t have to do this in “PatchBay™”
yourself.
For further information on the functions of the MIDI Manager
and Patchbay, please refer to the help function in “Patch-
bay™”.
Any Other MIDI-tasking System
Make sure you don’t run any programs in parallel with Sound-
Diver that also use the printer or modem port, as these ports can
only be assigned once. These include, for example, printing or
communications programs. You should deactivate AppleTalk
while running SoundDiver (with the desk accessory “Selectr”
which is usually installed in the Apple menu) if you use Local-
Talk. However, if you want to print using an AppleTalk printer,
please re-activate AppleTalk.
If you run programs in parallel to SoundDiver that perform a lot of background
activity, this can disrupt the program. You should therefore deactivate file sharing if
possible, using the “File Sharing” Control Panel.
MIDI-Tasking on Windows
Multi-client MIDI drivers
When you want to run several MIDI programs on a Windows
PC simultaneously, they must be able to access the MIDI ports
concurrently. This implies that the MIDI driver can be opened
by several programs (clients). Such drivers are called “multi-
client” MIDI drivers. Unfortunately not all MIDI drivers have
this ability, as it is not necessary for “normal” applications like
games.
80
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Conventional MIDI drivers can only be used by one applica-
tion at the same time:
If another application tries to open the MIDI driver, it fails with
an appropriate error message. The reason for this user-
unfriendly behavior is that a driver with only one input and
output is much easier to program.
A multi-client driver however delivers incoming MIDI data to
all applications and merges outgoing data correctly:
MIDI Interfaces with Multi-client Drivers
Fortunately, multi-client MIDI drivers are available for most
MIDI interfaces and sound cards on the market. Please contact
the manufacturer of your interface or sound card to get the
latest driver version.
Virtual MIDI drivers
There are solutions for MIDI interfaces that don’t provide
multi-client drivers. As there are dozens if not hundreds of
different MIDI cards and interfaces available, it would be
impossible to write new MIDI drivers for all these devices.
Instead, there are multi-client drivers which open the conven-
tional drivers as a client, and simply pass on the MIDI data:
MIDI
Input
Driver
Application 1
MIDI
Output
Driver
Multi
Client
Input
Application 1 Multi
Client
Output
Application 2
Application 3
Driver Driver
SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking
81
User Manual
Version 3.0
There are several different “virtual drivers” some of which are
described below.
MultiMID
Multimid is probably the best-known virtual driver. It is
commercial software ($39.95), however there is a “crippled”
demo version available which can be freely copied.
The connections to the “conventional” drivers are defined in
the configuration dialog of MultiMID. For every opened driver
(e.g. “Soundblaster In”), a multi-client capable counterpart
(e.g. “Multi-Soundblaster In”) is created, which can then be
opened by several applications.
A “pipeline” output allows MIDI data to be forwarded from
one application to another. The full version also allows inputs
and outputs to be renamed, as well as the use of plug-ins which
can manipulate MIDI data in real time—similar to Logic’s
environment.
Contact address:
Hermann Seib
Am Tabor 12/1/24
A-1020 Wien
Österreich
Email: seib@t0.or.at
Hubi’s MIDI Loopback Device
This package is freeware (i.e. can be used and copied for free)
and consists of a driver (“Midlpbk.drv”) which installs up to
four “loopback nodes” (LB1 to LB4), as well as an application
which simply connects a MIDI In with a MIDI out. Therefore
Multi
Client
Driver
Application 1
Multi
Client
Driver
MIDI
Input
Driver
MIDI
Output
Driver
Application 2
Application 3
82
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
the name “Hwmdcabl.exe”—the task of this program is compa-
rable to a MIDI cable; however you can define additional
filters.
The user can now open several instances of “Hwmdcabl.exe”
and connect one input with one output each. This is very flex-
ible, and can also connect a program’s input with another
program’s output.
“Hubi’s MIDI Loopback Device” needs very little memory,
has excellent timing, and is very reliable.
By courtesy of the author, we have included this tool on the
CD. The file name is “MDLBK251.ZIP”. You need PKZIP,
WinZip, StuffIt Expander or a similar tool to unpack this file.
The contact address can be found in the file “MIDLPBK.TXT”.
How to Block MIDI Ports (Windows:)
It is possible to prevent SoundDiver from opening certain
MIDI inputs and outputs:
❏Open the file “WIN.INI” in your Windows folder
❏If you have launched SoundDiver at least once, you will find
a section [SoundDiver]. Otherwise, add this section name to
the file (don’t forget the brackets).
❏If you have launched SoundDiver at least once, you will find
a line “portname=1”for each port. For each unwanted port,
change the line to “portname=0”.
For example, if you don’t need input and output 2 of a Unitor8,
WIN.INI should contain
[SoundDiver]
MidiIn_Unitor_In_02=0
MidiOut_Unitor_Out_02=0
This feature is important for using sound cards whose driver
crashes or hangs when sending SysEx to the internal Wavetable
generator. Some drivers show this behavior even when they are
Compatibility of the Windows, Macintosh, and Atari Versions
83
User Manual
Version 3.0
opened while SoundDiver is launching. In this case, they don’t
support SysEx, and can’t be used with SoundDiver anyway.
To prevent MIDI loops using Hubi’s MIDI Loopback Device
use the following:
…
[Logic]
MidiIn_LB1=0
MidiOut_LB2=0
…
[SoundDiver]
MidiOut_LB1=0
MidiIn_LB2=0
SoundDiver as a Background Program
If you are running several applications and you have sufficient
space on the screen, you can keep any number of the windows
permanently open while you are working in the other MIDI
applications. In this case it’s convenient to use two monitors.
Certain activities (e.g. displaying error messages) are stopped
while SoundDiver is in the background. As soon as you activate
it again, any error messages will be shown.
2.13 Compatibility of the
Windows, Macintosh, and
Atari Versions
Converting Files between the three
Platforms
SoundDiver’s Windows and Macintosh versions are file format
compatible. This also applies to the older Atari Versions. This is
very useful if you happen to be using SoundDiver on more than
one of these platforms, or are collaborating with other Sound-
Diver users. Files created by (discontinued) SoundSurfer,
84
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
SoundDiver and SoundDiver OEM versions are compatible as
well.
Libraries, Adaptations, and Help source files are compatible,
and need only be copied from one computer to the other. If
necessary, you have to adjust the file name:
Module files however work only on one platform. To use a
Module on a different platform, you need the appropriate file
version, which you can download from the Emagic web site
(see the section What the Package Includes on page 49).
Since version 2.0.7 the naming convention for files has been
unified:
•: Adaptation files have to have the suffix .ADA even on the
Macintosh. This improves compatibility with adaptations
created in Windows.
•The file name of an adaptation results from the name of the
device the adaptation supports. This name may contain
characters which are not allowed in file names of a certain
platform. These characters are now replaced by “_” on all
platforms.
Example: the Adaptation file “DX21/27/100” is now named
“DX21_27_100.ADA”, on the Macintosh as well as in Windows.
Table 1 File name extensions of Windows/Atari files and Macintosh
Type/Creator
File type Extension Macintosh
File Type Macintosh Creator
(SoundDiver)
Library .LIB EM9F EMA6
Adaptation .ADA EM7F EMA6
Help source file .ADT TEXT any
Standard MIDI file .MID Midi any
SYX / MidiEx .SYX TEXT any
Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI
85
User Manual
Version 3.0
Converting Files from and to the Macintosh
You need a Macintosh program such as File Exchange, PC
Exchange, DOS Mounter, Access PC, or Smart Link to enable
the Macintosh to read DOS floppy disks. PC Exchange is
included in System 7.5. File Exchange is included in Mac OS 8
and 9.
So that the Macintosh can recognize Windows or Atari files
without restrictions, you have to alter the Type and Creator of a
file coming from an PC or Atari.
Many newer versions of PC disk mounters and File Exchange
automatically allow this after you have entered the file name
extension and the Macintosh Creator and Type. Please read
these program’s manuals for more details.
If you don’t have such a program, but have ResEdit, File
Buddy, FastFind or similar, that allows you to manually alter
the Creator, this works as well (although it is less convenient).
When converting Windows or Atari files to the Macintosh, the
file name extension of Library files can remain. With Standard
MIDI files and SYX files however, it is not required, as long as
the file type is correct (also see the section Importing Standard
MIDI Files on page 276).
Adaptation files have to have the extension .ADA even on the
Macintosh. In help source files, the extension .ADT must remain
(for further details, please see the Universal Module Program-
ming Manual).
2.14 Key Commands and Remote
Control via MIDI
You can initiate almost all of SoundDiver’s functions with a key
command or a MIDI message. The Key Commands window is
where you assign key commands to the keys, or to MIDI
messages.
86
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Whenever this manual mentions a key command, this refers to a command which
can be called up by either a keystroke or a MIDI message. This allows you to
completely customize SoundDiver to suit your own working style.
The key commands described in this instruction manual are
based on the default Windows and Macintosh key command
assignments. So if you make changes in the Key Commands
window, the key commands mentioned in this manual may not
apply to your SoundDiver installation.
Modifier Keys on Macintosh vs. Windows
The Macintosh has one modifier key (C) that the Windows
platform does not have, and the modifier keys are also named
slightly differently.
Basically, on Windows you often use the ç key whenever the
Macintosh C modifier key is indicated.
A “variation” of a key command is often carried out using the
CO modifier keys on the Macintosh and çS on Windows.
For example, the command “Quit without saving”, COq
would be executed by pressing ç‚q on Windows.
Please note that the above applies only to the default key
command assignments. If you want, you can change this.
On Windows, the meaning of S and ç is the opposite of the
Macintosh concerning multiple selection.
The remaining modifier keys used within SoundDiver apply to
Windows and Macintosh without distinction.
Save Your Personal Settings
Your personal key assignments are stored (together with the
settings of the Preferences pages) in a file called “SoundDiver
3.0 Preferences” on the Macintosh and “SoundDiver 3.0 Pref-
erences.PRF” on the Windows PC. These setting can be stored
in any file at any place on the hard disk by using File > Save
Prefs as… You should:
Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI
87
User Manual
Version 3.0
•make a backup of this file at another location on your hard
disk;
•make a floppy disk backup of it, in case you need to use a
SoundDiver system on another computer.
•When you install updates to your version of SoundDiver,
your personal key commands will remain unaltered.
Menus and Dialogs
You can respond to all prompts and dialogs via your computer
keyboard in keeping with operating system conventions. Use
R (Return) or ‰ to activate the OK button, ™ to activate
the Cancel button.
On Windows, you can also handle all menus with the keyboard.
•Even the fixed global Key Commands of older versions are
now user definable. Please keep in mind that some of these
commands like Undo, Save, Quit, New, Open, Cut, Copy,
Paste… follow “common conventions” and probably
shouldn’t be altered.
•The defined Key Commands are displayed in the corre-
sponding menu entries.
Special Keys
Some keys have special functions:
•The modifier keys S, ç, and A (: ç, O, S and C)
can only be used in conjunction with other keys.
•The backspace key (B) has the fixed function “delete
selected objects”. It can only be assigned to a function in
conjunction with the modifier keys S, ç, and A (: ç,
O, S and C).
•On Windows only: The ç£ key (close window) and
A£ key combination (close application) cannot be reas-
signed.
88
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
•The + and _ keys increase or decrease any selected para-
meter value in single units. However, they can be assigned
different functions, which then override this function.
Key Commands Window
The Key Commands window can be opened by selecting
Options > Settings > Key Commands…
All the available key commands are listed on the right side.
They are grouped according to the following categories:
•Global commands
•Functions affecting all windows (various windows)
•Functions affecting Libraries
Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI
89
User Manual
Version 3.0
•Functions affecting the Setup window
•Functions affecting the Device window
•Functions affecting the Editor window
•Functions affecting the Install window
•Functions affecting the MIDI Monitor window
•Functions affecting the Controller Assignments window
A “•” (Macintosh) or “*”(Windows) in front of the description
of the function indicates that the function is only available as a
key command, or MIDI command. To the left you can see the
currently-assigned key, and even further to the left, the
assigned MIDI message. A dash here indicates that no assign-
ment has been made.
Assigning a Function to a Key
❏Click the Learn Key button.
❏Select the desired function with the mouse.
❏Press the desired key, if necessary together with the desired
modifier key(s) (S, ç, O, and C on the Macintosh and
S, ç and A on Windows).
❏If you want to make another assignment, repeat steps 2 and
3.
❏Deactivate Learn Key”.
You can also set the key and the modifier via pull-down menus
in the parameter box (top left).
Learn Separate Key
Learn Separate Key works in the same way, but differs in that
it’s not just a reference to an ASCII code that is stored, but the
actual code of the key that is pressed.
90
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
In practice, this means that you can, for example, assign differ-
ent commands to the number keys on the numeric keypad than
to the ones on the number keys on the main part of the
keyboard—and the same goes for the different and—keys on
the numeric keypad and main keyboard. The only disadvan-
tage is that the key code (a number) is displayed in the Key
Commands window instead of the ASCII symbol, which is
more useful for reference purposes.
If there is only one key command defined for the key, it will be used, no matter which
of the two keys is pressed.
If there are two key commands defined (one for the alphanumeric keyboard, one for
the numeric keypad), then the appropriate key command will be used.
Assigning a Function to a MIDI Message
❏Click the Learn MIDI button.
❏Select the desired function with the mouse.
❏Send the desired MIDI message from your controller.
❏If you want to make another assignment repeat steps 2 and
3.
❏Deactivate Learn MIDI.
If you want to assign a Note On message, remember to switch off Learn MIDI before
you release the key in question (and thereby transmit a Note Off message). The last
message received is always the assignment used.
You can set the type of message, the channel and the first and
second data bytes in the Parameter box, using pull-down
menus, or using the mouse.
Deleting Assignments
❏Click on Learn Key, to erase the key assignment, and/or Learn
MIDI, to erase the MIDI assignment.
❏Use the mouse to select the function whose key or MIDI as-
signment you want to delete.
Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI
91
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏Press B.
❏To erase more assignments, repeat the second and third
steps.
❏Deactivate the Learn Key and/or Learn MIDI button.
Switching MIDI Remote on/off
You can use the MIDI Remote button to globally switch on/off
response to all defined MIDI messages. The MIDI command
for this (Toggle MIDI remote) is always active, even when MIDI
Remote is disabled, and is therefore always available.
If you have assigned MIDI Remote commands to all the keys on your master
keyboard, you are advised to use a second foot pedal or a programmable button on
your keyboard for Toggle MIDI Remote, which you cannot accidentally press while
you are recording. If nothing like this is available, use a key you are unlikely to press
by accident (for example the lowest or highest key)—but be aware that you will no
longer be able to use that key to record any notes.
Disable MIDI Remote switches off MIDI remote control.
Checking the Function of a Key
Deactivate Learn Key and Learn sep. Key, and press the key
whose function you want to check. The function will be auto-
matically selected, and displayed in the middle of the window.
Making the Display Clearer
You can use the Hide Used and Hide Unused buttons to remove
all the used, or unused key commands from the window
display.
All the other Key Commands window functions remain avail-
able for you to use.
92
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
Finding Key Commands
Due to the large number of possible key commands, it can
sometimes be difficult to find one in particular. For this reason,
SoundDiver offers a Find function, which lets you search for a
key command by typing in its name (or a part thereof).
Simply click in the white space to the right of the Find: button
and enter the string of characters you’re searching for. The
window will then display only those key commands that
contain that character string (plus the currently selected
command, even if it doesn’t contain that string).
The Key Commands window remains active, even in Find
mode; you don’t have to leave this mode to continue making
assignments.
The Find function is not case-sensitive, it makes no distinction between upper, and
lower case characters.
The Hide Used and Hide Unused buttons work in combination
with Find, but obviously, this means you should switch off both
in order to see all the commands that fit the search criteria,
regardless of the commands’ current assignment.
The Find: button switches Find mode off and on. The button is
automatically activated if a string of characters is entered.
Scroll to Selection
If you select the Options > Scroll To Selection menu, the key
commands window will scroll to the currently selected key
command. The same function will automatically be performed
when the Find: button is disabled.
Printing a Key Command List
TheOptions > Copy Key Commands to Clipboard function
copies the key commands into the clipboard as text. From here,
it’s a simple matter to paste the results into any word processor
document, format them any way you want, and print them out.
Key Commands and Remote Control via MIDI
93
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Copy Key Commands to Clipboard function also takes into
account the Hide and Find: function settings. You could, there-
fore, export only a certain group of key commands (e.g. all those
containing a particular character string). What you see in the
window display is exactly what’s exported.
Storing Key Command Assignments
The assignments you make are stored in the Preferences file
automatically when you quit the program. However, you can
also store your key commands manually, using File > Save Pref-
erences. This also stores all the other Preferences settings as
well.
Importing Key Commands
This function is particularly useful if you need to work tempo-
rarily on someone else’s system; you might wish you could use
your personal key assignments on it, but without altering the
system settings.
TheOptions > Import Key Commands… function in the Key
Commands window allows you to import the key assignments
from any “SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences.PRF” file, with a typical
file selection box, which you could set to look at a floppy disk
containing your personal SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences file).
The Preferences file in the Diver folder that has been in use up
until now will be renamed to “SoundDiver 3.0 Prefer-
ences.bak”. This file contains the old key commands.
You don’t have to restart SoundDiver to continue.
Initializing Key or MIDI Event Assignments
The Options > Initialize > … command either initializes all
Preference options (… All Preferences except Commands), all
key assignments (… All Key Commands) or all MIDI
94
Chapter 2
Installation
Emagic
SoundDiver
commands (… All MIDI Commands). The default assignments
are then in effect.
Please be aware that you will lose your own key command
assignments, if you haven’t created your own copy of the
“SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences.PRF” file.
: All “OMS” assignments are deleted if you use …All Prefer-
ences except Commands.
Entering Numerals
We recommend that you use the number keys on the numeric
keypad if the number is part of a key command (example:
C(). Of course, the number keys on the typewriter keypad
work as well. So if you don’t have a numerical keypad (e.g. you
have a PowerBook), you can press the 5 key instead of the %
on the numerical keypad.
Start
95
User Manual
Version 3.0
Introductory Tour of
SoundDiver
We have prepared a brief tour of SoundDiver so that you can
get to know the program as quickly and easily as possible.
During the tour, you can make a short stop at each station and
carry out a few practical experiments with SoundDiver.
We recommend that you spend half-an-hour doing this, as it
will save you a lot more time later. In the meantime, you’ll get
an overview of the program before getting immersed in the
details.
Before starting the tour you should:
❏install SoundDiver
❏connect at least one device—better still, two or more
❏have available storage space either on a floppy or hard disk,
because we are going to create a library.
The device used in most of the examples is the Yamaha EX5.
The Yamaha SY99 and the access Virus are also used. Of course,
you don’t have to use any of these particular devices. You can
use any device you want because, SoundDiver’s functions are
relatively uniform for all devices.
Off we go…
3.1 Start
We begin the tour by double-clicking SoundDiver’s program
icon. SoundDiver starts up.
Chapter 3
96
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
: You have to configure your ports first. Please look at the
section OMS on page 74
After a short time, the “Install” window pops up, and a dialog
box appears containing a welcome message. You are asked to
select the devices you have and hit R.
Station 1: Setup and Install Windows
97
User Manual
Version 3.0
3.2 Station 1: Setup and Install
Windows
The Setup window displays the connected MIDI system in the
form of icons (symbols). Here you can also select the devices
that you wish to edit. If you have not yet installed any devices,
all you will see is the icon which represents your computer.
This view will change once SoundDiver automatically locates
and installs the connected devices with the help of the Scan
function. (If you’ve already read page 49 and installed your
system successfully, you may wish to skip the next two installa-
tion steps).
98
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Scanning
During the scanning operation, SoundDiver examines all the
MIDI ports to see if a certain device is present. It does this by
first loading the module or adaptation and then sending MIDI
“Requests”. If a device answers, it is installed by SoundDiver
and is then available for use.
Make sure that your devices are connected in both directions.
To the right of the Setup window, you will see the Install
window. If not (maybe because you already have installed a
device, and therefore the Install window is not opened auto-
matically), select New > Install… in the Setup window. The
Setup window has to be the active window to see this menu.
Click the Scan All button. The scan procedure will begin. If
SoundDiver finds a device, an icon will appear in the Setup
window.
The Setup window might end up looking like this:
This means that your devices have been installed.
If there is a problem, please refer to the section Scanning on
page 426 in Appendix C Troubleshooting.
Station 1: Setup and Install Windows
99
User Manual
Version 3.0
If the scan function did not successfully install some or all of
the devices in your system, the next step is to try adding these
devices manually.
Installing Devices Manually
If the Install window is not yet open, select New > Install… in
the Setup window.
We are now going to install a device manually. The list is sorted
alphabetically, according to the manufacturer’s name and
model name. Find the entry for “Waldorf microWAVE XT”,
click it, then click the Add button.
If you already have a Microwave in your system, install this second one anyway
because we are not going to alter the settings for your original Microwave.
The relevant icon (displayed inverted) will appear in the Setup
window. Now close the Install window by clicking the Done
button. We will come back to this newly installed Microwave
later.
Window Operation
Before we cover the actual Setup functions, you should get to
know the main functions relating to window configuration.
These functions are available in SoundDiver’s Setup, Library,
and Device windows.
Window Layout
On the left side of the Setup window is the parameter box. It
displays the parameters of the currently-active device and
allows you to adjust these to suit your taste and system’s idio-
syncrasies.
In the upper left corner of the parameter box is a small triangle.
Clicking this will enlarge or shrink the parameter box. This
function is also available in other SoundDiver windows.
100
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Now move the mouse pointer over the vertical dividing line
down the left-hand border of the icon region. The pointer will
turn into a double-arrow symbol. Hold down the mouse button
and move the mouse left and right. Using this method you can
quickly adjust any SoundDiver window to suit the situation.
Use this function especially if the names of the MIDI-Ports are
only partially visible. Return the dividing line to its original
position.
Local Menus
You have already used the “New” local menu to install your
MIDI devices.
Windows: For most windows in SoundDiver, additional specific
(“local”) menus appear in the menu bar—inserted between the
Options and Windows menu—with functions relating solely to
that window.
: Most windows in SoundDiver also contain a local menu bar
with functions relating solely to that window. The main menu
bar remains visible.
Now select View > Parameters from the Setup window’s local
menu. The parameter box disappears, leaving the whole
window free for the MIDI setup. If you select the same menu
item again, the parameter box reappears.
Scrolling the Contents of the Window
In other programs you have no doubt seen the scroll bars which
are situated along the lower and right-hand edges of the
window. In SoundDiver they are easier to use, since the
contents of the window move at the same time as you drag the
scroll boxes so you always know where you are.
Click anywhere in the empty area of the scroll bar opposite the
box. The contents of the window are moved exactly one page
in the appropriate direction.
Station 1: Setup and Install Windows
101
User Manual
Version 3.0
Click-holding the x/y scroll gadget (a small box at the lower left
corner of any window) allows the simultaneous movement of
the window’s visible section in both the horizontal and vertical
direction. This is also achievable by pressing the wheel of a
wheel-mouse.
Parameter Box
The parameter box in the Setup window is where you set the
parameters for each device: SoundDiver will use these settings
when it communicates with the device.
Clicking a device icon will select it (displayed inverted), and
the contents of the parameter box will change to display the
parameters of that device. If you now click the icon for the
Microwave XT that you just installed, the screen should look
like this:
First, we will give the Microwave XT a new name so it can be
clearly identified. Click the name line in the parameter box and
a text field will appear. Type in “Waldorf 1” (note that entering
w replaces the previous contents by a W). If you then press R,
the name will be entered. We will cover all the other parameters
of the parameter box when we get to page 191.
Now we are going to remove this Microwave since we don’t
actually need it.
102
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
To do this just click the Microwave symbol and select Edit >
Clear. A dialog box appears with a safety question, and you
confirm with OK.
To sum up briefly, the Setup window is an exact depiction of
your MIDI setup. This is where you can scan devices or manu-
ally install and remove them, as well as adjust their parameters.
On we go to the next station…
3.3 Station 2: The Device
Window
In the same way as the Setup window is an exact depiction of
your MIDI setup, the Device window is an exact depiction of
the memory contents of an individual device.
Contents of the Device Window
The Device window displays all the memory locations for
sounds, multis, edit buffers, drum kits and any other data
controlled by the device, either internally or on a card. Sound-
Diver can thereby fully exploit all the MIDI options of the
device.
By virtue of “Entry Link Management” SoundDiver can recog-
nize whether the entry that is currently being edited (e.g.
copied or moved) is being used by another entry, and ensures
that these cross-references remain intact.
Example: if you are moving an entry (“child entry”) which is
being used in another entry (“parent entry”), SoundDiver will
automatically update the corresponding parameters in the
parent entry so that these will continue to use the right sound.
This means that you can move your sounds wherever you want,
and SoundDiver will take care of the rest.
SoundDiver makes it easy to recognize these entries by
displaying them in bold type.
X
Station 2: The Device Window
103
User Manual
Version 3.0
Let’s have a closer look at the Device window. For the follow-
ing experiments you need a MIDI keyboard with a synthesizer.
We will use the Yamaha SY99, but the experiments can be
carried out on any MIDI keyboard or expander. Open the
Device window by double-clicking the symbol for your device
in the Setup window. The Device window will initially be
empty, with the possible exception of ROM entries.
Of course, SoundDiver first needs to receive the memory
contents of the keyboard which will then be used as the basis
for further experiments. If you are missing a certain group of
parameters, or this window is completely empty, select View >
Data types > Show all.
104
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Requesting the Memory Contents of the
Devices
Select Edit > Select all. All the locations in the Device window
will be displayed black which means they have been selected.
Now select Edit > Request. A dialog box will appear saying
“Receiving data from…” and a small bar indicates the progress
of the transfer. You will see the Device window filling up with
entries.
Even though the Device window usually contains the sounds of a synthesizer this
instruction manual always talks in terms of “entries” rather than “sounds”, since
entries can also be effects programs from reverbs, etc. An entry in the Device
window could also be a system setup, a drum-setup or an edit buffer, and in this case
“sound” would not be the correct description.
Take a close look at the Device window: on the left is the
device parameter box which you will recognize from the Setup
window. The Device window displays all the memory locations
for the device. Use the scroll bars or x/y scroll gadget
mentioned previously to access items that are currently out of
view.
Saving the Memory Contents of the
Devices
As mentioned earlier, the Device window is an exact depiction
of the device’s internal memory (also the card memory if avail-
able). This means that when you are working in the Device
window, you are directly accessing the memory contents of your
device, and you could accidentally erase data. We therefore
want to play it safe and let SoundDiver receive the entire
memory contents of your devices and save them to disk. We
will cover the individual steps in detail in a moment, but for the
time being just follow the instructions below:
❏select all the devices installed in the Setup window
❏select New > Build library > All entries in the local menu of
the Setup window. SoundDiver will now request the data of
Station 2: The Device Window
105
User Manual
Version 3.0
the devices—if this was not done in the previous section—
and creates a mixed library named “UNTITLED”
❏now select File > Save. You can now save this new library
onto your hard disk.
Even if you accidentally alter the memory contents of your
devices during the following exercises—although SoundDiver
warns you of this wherever possible—you now have a safety
copy with which you can restore everything to its original state.
Selecting Entries
There are several different ways of selecting entries or groups
of entries.
The Device window is clearly divided into the individual data
types (in this case setup, performances and patches). Every area
has its own small gray title bar.
Click one of these title bars and the relevant area will be
selected. Click a column title bar in the patch bank and just this
column will be selected.
Select Edit > Toggle and all entries will be selected except those
that were previously selected. Now click anywhere in the gray
area and the selection will be cancelled.
Select a single entry by clicking it. Hold down ç (: S) and
you can select other entries as well.
At this point we will try out another function: enable Caps Lock
(this is the key above S), press the letter e and watch what
happens. SoundDiver selects the first entry whose name begins
with an “E”. If there are no entries beginning with “E” the
following entry in the alphabet is selected. Now press T and
the next entry in alphabetical order will be selected. Pressing
ST will take you in the opposite direction.
106
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Auditioning the Selected Entries
To transfer an entry from the Device window to the appropriate
edit buffer in the relevant synthesizer, enable Options >
AutoAudition (so that a checkmark is displayed in this menu
item) and click the entry.
After a short while you can audition the patch on your
keyboard.
Every selected entry you click now is sent automatically to the
device, providing a very quick and convenient way to audition
selected sounds. To disable this feature, select Options >
AutoAudition again.
If you enable Options > AutoPlay as well, SoundDiver will also
transmit a test note, which is useful if your synthesizer doesn’t
have a keyboard or you can’t reach it from the computer.
Moving and Copying Entries
In the Device window you can copy, move, initialize or delete
the entries if you want to sort your sound bank or compile a new
bank from several other banks. You can also copy entries
between Device windows, as long as they originate from iden-
tical or compatible devices.
In this case SoundDiver can automatically recognize whether the data is convertible
if you are dealing with related devices. So, for example, you could copy entries
between a D-50 and a D-550 or even between an M1 and a T1 or a DX7 and an
SY77. You can also copy entries within a library using the mouse (we will cover this
later).
Warning: the following exercise will alter the memory
contents of your device.
Grab an entry with the mouse and move it to another location.
Make sure that you stay within the same bank, i.e., don’t move
a sound program to a system setup or a performance to a drum
kit. If you just move an entry onto another entry their locations
will be swapped.
You can reverse this operation by selecting Edit > Undo.
X
Station 3: The Library
107
User Manual
Version 3.0
If you want to duplicate an entry, hold down A (: O) while
you drag the entry to its destination position. You can also
reverse this operation.
What if you want to initialize a sound or a performance? No
problem. Simply select the relevant entry or entries and select
Entry > Initialize in the local Device window menu. Sound-
Diver will then set all the parameters of the entry to neutral
values. This is equivalent to the initialize function that is found
in many synthesizers and other devices.
Let’s now go to the next station: the library.
3.4 Station 3: The Library
A library in SoundDiver is a sort of database for sounds and
other storable data from your MIDI devices. As in a database,
you can find, sort, delete and copy entries according to certain
criteria.
108
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
A SoundDiver library is unique in that it allows you to gather
together programs from different devices: patches from a
Roland JV-80, voices from a Yamaha SY99, effects programs
from an Alesis Quadraverb—all these can be simultaneously
stored in a single library. There are different ways of compiling
libraries.
In the section Saving the Memory Contents of the Devices on page
104 you created a library and saved it onto disk. We now want to
turn our attention to this library.
Please select Windows > Untitled.
Click the “maximize window” gadget in the upper right corner
of the Library window so that it fills the screen.
User-definable Configuration of the
Library Window
As you can see, the Library window displays not only the names
of the entries, but also a range of important data for each entry
which you can use to search, sort or simply distinguish the
entries from one another.
Take a closer look at the details of the Library window. Notice
that there is a parameter box here as well, which displays the
parameters of every entry in one view. If you can’t see the para-
meter box, select View > Parameters.
Station 3: The Library
109
User Manual
Version 3.0
Now let’s alter its display a bit. For example, at the moment we
don’t need to view the comments column, so let’s get rid of it.
Select View > Comment which previously had a tick beside it.
The comment column disappears and the columns to the right
of it move leftward. Now do the same with the date, since, at
the moment, the date of all the entries in the library is identical.
Sorting
We are now going to alphabetically sort the library display
according to the names of the entries. There are two ways to do
this. You may either double-click the “Name” field in the title
bar or select Sort > Sort by Name in the local menu.
Next, try sorting the library display according to Sort by Data
type and Sort by Size.
For more details, see the section The Library from page 245
onwards
Moving Columns and Altering Their
Widths
Would you rather have the model column on the left? No prob-
lem. Grab the caption “Model” in the title bar and move it over
the caption “Name”. The columns will then be swapped.
Is the “Used by…” column too wide for you? Just click-hold
the right edge of the field in the title bar and drag left when the
mouse pointer turns into a double arrow.
If you have followed these steps the library might look like this:
110
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
You can alter the list display at any time so as to give yourself
the best possible overview.
Mixed Libraries
One of the greatest advantages of SoundDiver libraries is that
you can manage entries from different devices within one
library. If you have more than one MIDI device and you have
installed them in the Setup window, your library will already be
mixed because it will contain data from the different devices. If
you want to gather together all the entries belonging to a certain
device, just sort them according to Sort > Sort by Model.
Dividing a Library into Zones
You can also divide any library into zones which can each be
given an appropriate title. The sort functions will then auto-
matically work within a zone. To demonstrate, try sorting your
mixed library by model. Now locate the point where the entries
for the next device begin, and select the first entry for this
device.
Station 3: The Library
111
User Manual
Version 3.0
Select Library > Insert title from the local menu. A text field
will then open in which you should enter the following:
“Memory contents of <device name>”. Now sort the names
alphabetically. You will see that SoundDiver alphabetically
sorts the zones separately above and below the title.
Delete the title again by selecting it and pressing B.
Find Functions
Even the best library is of no use unless you can quickly locate
specific sounds or other entries. SoundDiver therefore offers a
range of Find functions which will help you find what you are
looking for straight away, whether it is the right piano sound or
all EX5 performances—even in the largest libraries.
Let’s imagine that you want to see if there are any bass sounds
in your library. Initially we have to use the name for the Find,
i.e. we ask SoundDiver to find entries whose names contains
the syllable “bas”.
Select Edit > Find. A window appears in which you enter the
characters. Type in “bas” and click Find. SoundDiver will find
the first entry in the library that matches the criterion, and
select it. Now close the Find window.
Activate Options > AutoPlay and AutoAudition.
112
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Now select Edit > Find Again.
If there is another bass sound, SoundDiver will find it, send it to
the device and play it. You can keep repeating Find again until
you have found all the bass sounds in the library.
What if you want to search according to completely different
criteria? Say you want to transfer all the data that comes from
the EX5 from a mixed library to a new separate library.
To do this open the Find window via Edit > Find… and click
More Options. Here you should enter the following:
SoundDiver now searches for entries that originate from the
model “EX 5” and simultaneously selects all the entries it
finds. You can use standard cut and paste functions to transfer
these to another library, or copy them by dragging them with
the mouse.
It’s time to dive deeper with SoundDiver, and explore some of
the unique editing capabilities it offers.
3.5 Station 4: The Editors
The principle is easy to explain: every module and most of the
adaptations in SoundDiver which already use the Device
window, Setup and Library also have a complete editor for the
relevant device.
X
X
Station 4: The Editors
113
User Manual
Version 3.0
In the past, a program like this was often specially-written for a
specific device. There was a DX7 editor, a Korg M1 editor and
so on. If you used several devices, you had to load a different
program for each device. A few years ago this may have not
been such a problem since the average setup did not usually
contain many devices.
In a larger MIDI setup consisting of many smaller synthesizers
plus effects and MIDI patchbays, this process is too cumber-
some. Say you have just finished a session and you want to store
the sounds of all your devices in the computer. You would have
to load a device’s relevant program, save its sounds, load the
program for the next device and so on…
SoundDiver allows you to organize your sounds universally for
all devices. During a production session, however, you often
need to change or edit the sounds in an arrangement, with the
sequencer running if possible, and without having to continu-
ally start and quit programs.
114
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
SoundDiver allows you to do just that. You can simultaneously
open several editors, each of which contains several windows
offering different views of the sound parameters. This enables
you to zoom in on the envelope of an EX5 on the screen, while
another window will show you the complete effects section.
The screensets let you make optimum use of these options,
even on small screens.
Let’s Start…
Let’s edit a few things in the EX 5. To be on the safe side, make
sure that you’ve created a Backup Library of everything in the
EX 5’s memory, so you don’t change anything permanently by
accident. The procedure is similar to the one described in
section Saving the Memory Contents of the Devices on page 104.
First, open the EX 5’s Device window (or the one of your favor-
ite device).
… in the Library
Select Entry > Build Library from the local menu of the Device
window. This one has a sub-menu where you can select specific
groups of entries:
We want to select all entries, so (not surprisingly) select All
Entries.
Station 4: The Editors
115
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver automatically carries out a number of operations: it
receives the sounds, creates and opens a new library and then
copies the received entries into it.
Welcome to Pleasure-programming…
If you click an entry in SoundDiver it opens the editor (see
above diagram) where you can immediately begin modifying
the sound.
❏first activate Options > AutoAudition and AutoPlay
❏double-click a sound to open the editor. Experiment at ran-
dom with the various operating elements—move the sliders,
redraw the envelopes and switch the functions on and off.
You will be able to simultaneously audition your editing
❏quit the editor by clicking the close box of the window.
If you like the result of your random programming, click Store
in the dialog box that appears. You can also select a different
location for the edited sound in the flip-menu of the dialog box.
On this occasion, it is probably safer to click Don’t Store.
A Handful of Editing Functions…
We are now going to experiment with the editor in more detail.
Have you connected a device and opened the editor? If so, you
should be able to see an editor window.
The diagram shows a typical editor window, in this case for an
EX 5:
116
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Here you can see the Overview that initially appears with more
complex devices. This shows you all the elements of a sound or
program at a single glance.
There are several macro parameters (volume, pan, detune…)
that can be used to edit the sound quickly and easily. This is the
“Easy Page”.
Use these to edit a sound without having to go into too much
detail. In the example given in the diagram, the cutoff
frequency was raised, the resonance lowered slightly and the
attack lengthened.
Say we wanted to edit the filter envelope for tone 1. Click this
button in the Overview display, and SoundDiver switches to
the “detailed display”.
Basically you can view a SoundDiver editor like a street map.
The Editor window is a view of a certain section of this map.
The Overview, on the other hand, is the entire map at a larger
scale.
In the detailed display, you can see every parameter of the
device, although compared to the device itself, these are
presented in a far more convenient and manageable form.
Envelopes may be edited graphically, and there are knobs,
beam displays and flip-menus.
Station 4: The Editors
117
User Manual
Version 3.0
The diagram shows a section of the detailed display of the EX5
editor, where you can see all the major controls at once.
In every editor you can open several windows showing what-
ever section you want. This can be very useful, for example,
when you want to see just the left and right edges of the
detailed editor at the same time. Instead of continually scroll-
ing back and forth between the two sections, just open a second
window by selecting Windows > Open Editor. Position this next
to the first and scroll to the desired section. Another example
might be if you want to simultaneously see the overview and
the detailed display of a sound, as shown in the diagram. No
problem, open two windows and set each view accordingly.
118
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
The screensets allow you to instantly call up the different
editor displays.
If you don’t know what a parameter means, just click it and
press @ (: H). SoundDiver’s On-line Help will immedi-
ately display the relevant information.
Station 4: The Editors
119
User Manual
Version 3.0
If the mouse pointer remains located above a parameter object,
a short explanation and the current value is shown in a small
window until you move the mouse pointer somewhere else.
But that’s not all. The functions of the Edit menu are also avail-
able in the editor. This means that the sound components and
parameter groups may be copied at will, even between differ-
ent entries. Just click a parameter group with S held down to
select it. This feature is available only within modules.
The above diagram shows a group of selected parameters
(DFCs). You can use Edit > Cut, Copy and Paste to copy it via
the edit buffer into other components of the sound (tones,
elements, voices) and of course into other sounds.
120
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Randomize
If you don’t have the urge to program yourself, or you need
some creative impetus, try SoundDiver’s randomizing function.
Not only can it create entire sounds by chance, but also individ-
ual parameter groups. A random envelope in an effect sound, a
random new wave form in a pad sound—and the sound
becomes completely new.
The diagram shows the menu item “Random value” in the
Editor menu, and next to it a randomly generated envelope—it
doesn’t look too bad really…
3.6 Station 5: The On-line Help
SoundDiver has a comprehensive, built-in on-line Help func-
tion. This amounts to an individual instruction manual for the
modules and adaptations, and describes the characteristics of
each one. The on-line Help is interactive and context-sensi-
tive. That sounds a bit complicated but means in practice that
Other Functions
121
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver will always supply you with the appropriate help
text for the situation at hand. Let’s try it out now.
Call up the Setup window and position it so that it occupies the
left half of the screen. Now select Windows > Help.
You should get into the habit of using the on-line Help function
when you encounter a problem. Select one of your devices in
the Setup window and have a look at all its help messages.
Familiarize yourself with the different topics. Now, when you
get into trouble, you will immediately know where to find the
information which may solve your problem.
3.7 Other Functions
The Mini-sequencer
An important component of SoundDiver is its mini-sequencer.
It is not intended for recording complete MIDI songs, but it
gives you the possibility of recording a melody or phrase which
you can use to test out sounds.
You open the sequencer by selecting Windows > Sequencer.
The sequencer window is by default a “floating” window
which always remains in the foreground and cannot be moved
to the background even when you activate another window.
Check that your MIDI keyboard is connected properly by play-
ing a few notes on it. If the sequencer is receiving notes a bar
will appear in the field previously labelled “NO IN” in the
sequencer window, and note information will be displayed.
In the lower part of the sequencer you will see the transport
buttons which look similar to those on a cassette recorder. Click
the record button (upper right). You will now hear a metronome
signal coming from the loudspeaker of your computer; the
counter of the sequencer keeps repeating the first beat—the
sequencer is in waiting mode.
X
X
122
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Now play a short phrase of about four bars. Click the stop
button (lower right) when your are done. The phrase will have
been recorded. You can listen to it by clicking the play button
(below in the middle).
Call up the Library or Device windows. If you have activated
Options > AutoPlay and AutoAudition, as described above, an
entry will be sent to the MIDI device as soon as you click it and
the sequencer will automatically play the test phrase.
Screensets
SoundDiver stores the layouts of the windows and various
other settings as so-called “screensets”. You can assemble up to
90 different screensets and call them up via key commands.
Your current screenset is “1”, which is displayed in the main
menu bar. If you now press 2 you will see an empty screen and
“2” will be displayed in the main menu bar.
Now open a few windows and the sequencer as well.
By alternately pressing 1 and 2 you can toggle between
these predefined screensets. You can arrange the windows
precisely and then lock the screenset by selecting Windows >
Screenset > Locked. You can change the locked screenset, but
when you recall it later, it will have the original window layout.
Selecting the same menu item again unlocks the screenset.
With the help of these recallable screensets, you will always
have an optimum overview, even on a small monitor.
3.8 Short Introduction to SysEx
Don’t worry, you won’t have to deal with SysEx data—that’s
what SoundDiver’s for. However, we thought that a brief intro-
duction wouldn’t hurt. So if you’re interested, read on.
X
X
Short Introduction to SysEx
123
User Manual
Version 3.0
What is System Exclusive Data?
SoundDiver controls sounds, combinations, programs—in short
all the saveable data of your MIDI device. This data differs
from the standardized MIDI commands like Note On, After-
touch or Program Change because they are different for every
device. A special data format was created within the MIDI
specification to deal with the transfer of device-specific para-
meters: System Exclusive data.
There are two plausible explanations for the term “System
Exclusive”: it’s not certain which is “officially” correct. You can
decide for yourself:
•System Exclusive data is the exception among MIDI data
formats because it is the only one that is not uniform for all
devices
•System Exclusive data is intended to be exclusively for a
specific system (device, model) and is ignored by all other
systems
SoundDiver communicates with its MIDI devices almost
entirely on a System Exclusive level. You will hardly be aware
of this, since SoundDiver’s orientation to the different devices
is contained in the modules and adaptations. To you, it may
appear almost as if SoundDiver is addressing all the devices in
the same way. This is exactly how it should look, so that the
operation of the devices is as uniform as possible, and works
quickly and efficiently in practice. However, SoundDiver
sometimes takes longer to receive the memory contents of
device A than device B.
The System Exclusive data format of a device is laid down by
the manufacturer, with hardly any restrictions. This means that
whereas one device may be able to send each sound individu-
ally, another one may not. Even the amount of data used for a
single sound varies greatly from device to device.
124
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
There are a few special features of System Exclusive data
which you will come across in your work with SoundDiver, as
follows.
Device IDs
Normally you distinguish between different devices within the
MIDI system by allocating them different MIDI channels.
When dealing with System Exclusive data, that is not always
practical. For example, say you want to put four synthesizers of
the same model all on one channel but with each one generat-
ing a different sound. In this case you need to be able to distin-
guish between them on the basis of the devices themselves—
not MIDI channels.
For this reason, nearly all new devices and many older ones
have their own identifiable number for System Exclusive
data—the “Device ID”. SysEx-compatible devices within the
system should have different IDs so that they can be addressed
individually. This means that you can individually address
considerably more than just sixteen devices at once and you can
even distinguish between identical devices—say several DX7
modules in one TX816 rack. The device ID is usually totally
independent of the MIDI channel of the device. If a device
treats the MIDI channel and device ID separately, you only
need to let SoundDiver know this ID and from then on you
don’t even have to keep the device on the same MIDI channel.
Dump Request
Nearly all MIDI devices can transmit their data on request.
This is vital if the computer is to be able to communicate with
a device. For example, when you select Edit > Request, Sound-
Diver transmits a dump request to the device asking it to send
this data to the computer. Depending on the device, there are
different dump requests for sound banks, individual sounds,
performances, system setups, drum kits etc. SoundDiver
X
Short Introduction to SysEx
125
User Manual
Version 3.0
supports all types of dump requests used by the different
devices.
Dumps
A dump is a device’s response to a dump request—it contains
the requested sound data. Dumps are also used by SoundDiver
itself, for example, with the AutoAudition function. Many
devices can initiate “active dumps”. These are dumps from
device to computer initiated by the device itself, i.e. without
any dump request having been sent. SoundDiver can process
active dumps at any time.
Parameter Changes
If you change a parameter in a SoundDiver Editor, SoundDiver
uses a “Parameter Change” message to inform the device. Of
course, it could just transmit a dump of the contents of the Edit
Buffer. However, that would take too long and would make
real-time editing impossible. If you are using SoundDiver
together with a sequencer in a MIDI-tasking system you can
record parameter changes in the same way as controller or pitch
bend information.
Unfortunately, not all devices support parameter changes. In
this case, SoundDiver has to transmit a dump. To avoid this
happening after every small alteration (which would make the
Editor unusable), the dump is delayed until about a second
after the last alteration in the Editor.
We hope that this chapter has not only shed some light on the
subject but also wet your appetite for more. So far, we have only
skimmed the surface of SoundDiver’s functions. In the follow-
ing chapters you will learn the details of all SoundDiver’s func-
tions and capabilities.
We advise you to take the time to carefully read the remaining
chapters. It will only take a few hours, but it will pay off in a
126
Chapter 3
Introductory Tour of SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
very short time. Of course, you won’t be able to remember
everything at first. If you come across an unfamiliar term, look
it up in the index. We have endeavored to make this as exten-
sive as possible so that you have some support when you really
need it. Initially, you should also make full use of the on-line
Help which we covered earlier.
In the next chapter you will learn how SoundDiver operates,
and also touch on the main menu bar.
The Look of SoundDiver
127
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver’s User
Interface
In this chapter you will learn how SoundDiver operates by way
of many practical examples. Among other things, you will learn
how to operate the mouse, menus, key commands and
windows, how to optimize the display of your MIDI setup, sort
your sounds in the Device window and create a new library.
After reading this chapter, you will be well on your way to
mastering SoundDiver.
4.1 The Look of SoundDiver
3-D Appearance
As you can see from the illustrations in this manual, Sound-
Diver has acquired the same Emagic family “look” as programs
like Logic or MicroLogic.
Boxes and buttons are in 3-D, and the background has a new
gray 3-D appearance. While these features may improve
SoundDiver’s appearance, they do require some of your
computer’s “thinking time”, something which can be notice-
able with slower computers.
You can accelerate SoundDiver if you disable 3-D Background in
the dialog which appears when you select Options > Settings >
Display Preferences.
Chapter 4
X
128
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
SoundDiver 2.0 Appearance
If you prefer to work with the familiar look of SoundDiver 2.0,
you can switch back. Change the settings in the above
mentioned dialog.
You can also completely switch off the 3-D appearance.
4.2 General Operation
Mouse
The mouse operations are covered in more detail in the respec-
tive chapters because, for example, there are different func-
tions for the Device and Library windows. This section deals
with general mouse operations. We recommend that you try
them out immediately in SoundDiver to help you remember
them:
•clicking a non-selected object will select it and deselect all
others. If the object was already selected, nothing happens,
•if you hold down ç (: S) while you click an object, the
selection of the object will be toggled.
Example: if you click a selected library entry it will be dese-
General Operation
129
User Manual
Version 3.0
lected. The selection of the other devices will remain
unchanged,
•to define a block, click the first entry, hold down S (: ç)
and click the last entry in the block. To select several blocks,
hold down ç (: S) as well after you have selected the first
block.
Example: in a library, you want to select two blocks. First
click the first entry of the first block. Select the last entry
with S (: ç) held down. Now click the first entry of the
second block with ç (: S) held down. Click the last entry
of the second block with Sç (: çS) held down.
•On Windows, the mouse functions as a data “slider”. Click a
value and hold down the mouse button. You can now change
the value by moving the mouse forwards/backwards.
•: The way you change values with the mouse depends on
the Mouse as slider setting in the Options >Settings > Global
Preferences… window.
If Mouse as slider is deactivated (refer to the section Global
Settings on page 397), the mouse works as follows: to increase
a value, click it. To decrease a value, hold down C at the
same time. However if you hold down ç the mouse turns
into a slider and you can alter the value by moving the mouse
forwards/backwards.
•A single click in the background (i.e. not on any object) will
deselect all objects.
•A click in the background with subsequent dragging (while
holding the mouse button) shows a “rubber band”. All
objects inside this rectangle are selected. You can use ç (:
S) here as well to toggle the selection or select the objects
inside several rectangles.
•“Drag-and-Drop”: click and hold an object, then move the
mouse (without releasing the mouse button). The object will
be moved or copied to the location pointed to by the arrow
when the mouse button is released. If this action is
performed within the same organizational unit, the object is
130
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
moved. (If done within the Device window, the locations of
the two items are swapped.) It is however copied instead of
moved if the destination is located in a different organiza-
tional unit, e.g. when dragging an object from a Device
window in a Library, or from one Library to another.
While dragging, the window scrolls automatically when the
mouse points to a window edge. This scrolling will stop once
the mouse travels outside of the window’s edge.
•: The “Sticky Menus” feature from Mac OS 8 is supported
in SoundDiver: one short click on a menu title keeps the
menu open without holding the mouse button down. A click
on a menu item selects it.
Microsoft IntelliMouse™ (Windows Only)
SoundDiver Windows supports the Microsoft IntelliMouse™
according to the guidelines from Microsoft. Please install the
IntelliPoint 2.0 system software for this to work properly.
•Scrolling: turning the IntelliMouse wheel (without clicking a
mouse button) scrolls the section currently visible in the
window. Scrolling is done in the direction (horizontal or
vertical) which has the smallest percentage visible. The
number of lines which is scrolled with one nudge, as well as
the direction, can be adjusted with the IntelliPoint 2.0 soft-
ware (Menu “Start > Settings > Control Panel”, control
panel “Mouse”, tab “Wheel”, button “Settings…”).
•Zooming: turning the IntelliMouse wheel while holding ç
changes the zoom factor, i.e. the font size (only in windows
which have this option).
•Data zoom: in editor windows which offer an overview
display, turning the IntelliMouse wheel while holding S
toggles between the overview and detail display.
•Panning: click somewhere in a window with the wheel
button, hold it and move the mouse. The visible section will
scroll in the desired direction. This function is identical to a
General Operation
131
User Manual
Version 3.0
S-click on the x/y scroll gadget (see the section The x/y Scroll
Gadget on page 136).
•Autoscroll: click and release the wheel button. Now you can
scroll the window (just like with Panning) without the need
to hold a mouse button. Click any mouse button or key on
the keyboard to exit this mode.
Contextual Menus (Windows Only)
In most of the windows, clicking somewhere with the right
mouse button opens a contextual menu, as is done in Windows
95/98 and Windows NT4.0/2000. This contextual menu
contains a summary of the menu items which have an effect on
the selected objects.
If nothing is already selected, the clicked object will be
selected before the contextual menu appears. If the clicked
object has already been selected, the selection will be
unchanged.
A menu item selected in a contextual menu always applies to all
selected objects.
There are more specific explanations in the subsequent chap-
ters.
The Computer Keyboard
There are slight differences in the key commands between the
Macintosh and Windows versions, due to different keyboard
layouts and user interface standards in the operating systems.
These differences are described in the section Differences of Key
Commands on page 415.
Moving the Cursor
In every window there is a cursor indicating the object being
edited. In the Setup window, the device icon on which the
cursor is positioned is displayed emphasized.
132
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Windows: selected objects shown as text are displayed with the
colors for selected objects defined in the “Display” system
control panel.
: selected objects shown as text are displayed with the color
defined in the “Appearance” control panel (formerly: “Color”).
You can move the cursor either with the mouse, by clicking the
desired location (device icon, entry), or using the cursor keys on
the computer keyboard.
Apart from being able to move it in all four directions, there are
a few other options which make the cursor easier to use. All of
these useful options are listed in the table below:
Entering Text
The computer keyboard is not only used for key commands
(see the section Key Commands on page 415) but also for enter-
ing text (names of entries, comments, etc.):
Table 2 Positioning via the computer keyboard
Window Operation Windows Macintosh
All windows select device/entry M, I, J, K M, I, J, K
extend selection by one
object
çM, çI,
çJ, çK
SM, SI,
SJ, SK
turn page down/up N, U N, U
turn page right/left çN, çU çN, çU
scroll towards top left
corner
Ûª
scroll towards bottom
right corner
˙ ¬
List windows extend selection by one
page
çN, çU SN, SU
extend selection to top/
bottom
çÛ,
ç˘)
Sª,
S¬
General Operation
133
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏to enter text, click the relevant field. You can completely de-
lete it by selecting Edit > Select All and then pressing B.
Type in the text and confirm with R,
❏use the cursor keys J or K to change the position of the cur-
sor,
❏you can select a block of text by clicking in front of the first
letter, holding down the mouse button and dragging the
mouse pointer over the desired characters,
❏you can delete a selected object (e.g. a block of text) by
pressing B or ∂ (: L), though if nothing is selected
pressing B will delete the character before the cursor,
❏you can use the Edit menu (see the section The Edit Menu on
page 148) to cut, copy and paste text.
Defining the Font Used (Windows Only)
In Windows you can select the font which SoundDiver uses
throughout the program.
In the WIN.INI file in your Windows folder, add the following
line to the [SoundDiver] section:
Font=Fontname
and replace Fontname with the name of your preferred font.
This function is not available in the Macintosh version.
Menus
Windows
SoundDiver for Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0/2000 is
an MDI (Multiple Document Interface) application. This
means that all document windows are shown within a main
window (the “MDI frame window”). The main window also
contains the menu bar. The menu bar always contains the
menus File, Edit, Options, Window and Help.
X
134
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Depending on the active document window, there are addi-
tional window-specific menus (so-called “local menus”). These
are always shown inserted between the Options and the
Window menu.
Macintosh
To ensure the best overview, SoundDiver’s menus are divided
amongst the main menu bar and the local menu bars.
The main menu bar is situated along the top edge of the screen,
and contains the functions which apply to all areas of Sound-
Diver. It includes the File, Edit and Windows menus which you
will find in every Emagic program.
Most windows in SoundDiver also contain one or more “local”
menus which are situated in their own menu bar below the
window’s title bar. They contain functions which are especially
tailored to that particular window. Thus you can use the Sort
menu in the Library window to sort the library entries accord-
ing to different criteria or the New menu in the Setup window
to install new devices.
That way you only ever see the menus when you need them.
4.3 Managing the Windows
SoundDiver’s windows are operated in exactly the same way as
you are used to from other applications. However, they have a
The main menu bar Local menu bars
Managing the Windows
135
User Manual
Version 3.0
few extra functions which allow you to maintain an overview in
SoundDiver, even in the most complex window configurations.
This section explains how to get the most effective use from
the windows in SoundDiver, so that you always have an opti-
mum overview of your work.
The Standard Gadgets
Macintosh
You will already be familiar with the standard window gadgets
from other programs or from the desktop of your computer:
❏clicking the close gadget in the top left corner closes the
window,
❏clicking the zoom gadget in the top right corner toggles you
between two window sizes,
❏by grabbing and dragging the size gadget at the bottom right
corner of the window allows you to control its vertical and
horizontal size. This even works while the window is in the
background. The window will not be activated. To activate
a window, click it briefly.
Windows
You will already be familiar with the standard window gadgets
from other programs or from the desktop of your computer:
❏clicking the close gadget at the top right corner or double-
clicking at the top left corner closes the window,
❏clicking the zoom gadget to the left of the close gadget tog-
gles you between two window sizes,
❏grabbing and dragging the corners or edges of the window al-
lows you to control its vertical and horizontal size
136
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Scroll Bars
The scroll bars along the
right-hand and lower edges
of each window vary not
only in their position, but
also in their size, which is
proportional to the visible
window section. This
means you can always see
the relationship between
the visible section and the
entire contents of the
window. By clicking the
empty area of the scroll
bars, you can scroll the window section one page in the relevant
direction. If the contents all fit into the current window section,
the boxes will occupy the whole of the scroll bars and the
arrows will disappear.
The x/y Scroll Gadget
In addition to the standard window commands, you may also
use the x/y scroll gadget at the bottom left-hand corner of the
window. This will move the window section both horizontally
and vertically at the same time.
Grab the small gray box and the mouse pointer turns into a
cross-hair. The window view will now move directly in accor-
dance with the mouse. If you click the x/y scroll gadget while
holding S (: C) moving the mouse will control the scrolling
speed instead of the direction.
With a 3-button mouse or the Microsoft IntelliMouse™ on
Windows, you can click on any part of the window with the
middle button (or the wheel button), and move the mouse
while the button is held down.
Scroll bars
Managing the Windows
137
User Manual
Version 3.0
Zooming
In all windows (except the Install, Edit and Sequencer
windows) there is a small zoom button. This zoom gadget lets
you enlarge or shrink the contents of the window (letters and
icons).
A click on the upper half of the gadget will shrink the contents,
a click on the lower half will expand the contents.
Automatic Scrolling
If you enlarge a window, SoundDiver automatically corrects the
section being shown to show as much of the window’s contents
as possible. This also happens when the contents of a window
change and now contains fewer objects, as well as to zooming.
Altering a Window’s Column Layout
In various SoundDiver windows you can alter the width of the
left side of the window using the mouse. Click and hold the
vertical column border and move it left or right. By moving it to
the left you create more space for the contents of the window;
by moving it to the right you enlarge the parameter box,
enabling you to read long parameter descriptions.
A change in the width of the parameter column also changes
the size of the icon above the parameter column.
Moving Windows in the Background
It’s possible to move a window that’s in the background, with-
out making it come into the foreground: press C while you drag
its title bar.
138
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Closing Windows
To close a window in the Windows version, click the close
gadget at the top right corner or double-click the icon in the top
left corner.
: To close a window, click the close gadget at the top left
corner.
Use these features as well:
❏A (: O)-clicking the Library window’s close box closes all
the Library’s windows without closing the Library itself.
This feature is similar to that in Logic.
❏A (: O)-clicking the close box of a window that is not a
Library’s closes all the windows that don’t belong to a Li-
brary.
❏AS (: OS)-clicking the close box of any window closes
all windows.
Enlarging the Window to Full Size
By clicking in the full size gadget in the Windows version, the
window takes up the entire client area of the main window.
With çT you can easily cycle through the single document
windows.
: You can adjust the window size to fit the window contents by
clicking the zoom buttons. This is useful if you want to show or
hide the parameter list, or select a different typeface.
Floating Windows
All windows in SoundDiver may be opened as floating
windows. A floating window will remain in the foreground,
even when you open other windows which overlap it.
If you want to open a window as a floating window, hold down
S (: O) when you open the window. The same modifier can
Managing the Windows
139
User Manual
Version 3.0
also be held down when selecting the equivalent command
from the Windows menu.
Key commands for opening windows are available as a floating
and a non-floating version.
In Windows, floating windows can be moved outside the main
window.
There is one limitation with floating windows: key commands
always apply to the top-most non-floating window. On Macin-
tosh, you have to use the local menus instead. On Windows,
you have to use the contextual menu (right mouse click on the
title bar), as the normal menu also applies to the top-most non-
floating window.
Screensets
You can get an optimum overview of the screen instantly in any
situation by calling up one of SoundDiver’s 90 user-defined
screensets with a key command.
You select the screenset you want by pressing one of the
numbers on the typewriter keyboard. Open a window and set
its size, and the position of the scroll bars. These settings will
automatically be saved, and will be restored the next time you
call up that screenset. The number of the current screenset will
be displayed in the menu bar next to the Windows menu, e.g.
“45”.
You cannot use the 0 key, so there are no screensets for 10, 20 … 90.
Setting and Recalling Screensets
To call up a screenset:
❏press the number key that corresponds to the screenset
number. For example the 7 key will call up screenset 7.
You can also use keys ! to ) on the numeric keypad, providing the number lock is
switched off (see section Num Lock on page 400).
X
140
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏To enter a two-figure number hold down A (: ç) and
type in both the numbers. For example, the combination
A78 (: ç78) will call up screenset 78.
Example: let’s assume you want to store a screenset for a MIDI
Setup window that uses the entire screen and gives you an
overview of your system.
We will use screenset 99. Hold down A (: ç) and press 9
twice. The number 99 will now be displayed next to the
Windows menu but the screen will be empty.
Now open the MIDI Setup window and maximize it’s size.
Now every time you select screenset 99, this screen layout will
be restored. Try it for yourself.
Copying a Screenset
You can easily copy one screenset to another screenset number
to use as a starting point for alterations. First, recall the
screenset you want to copy. Now hold down S and recall the
destination screenset number. You can also use A (: ç) to
copy to a two-digit screenset number.
You can also use the functions Windows > Screenset > Copy
Screenset and Paste Screenset.
Multi-monitor Support
SoundDiver is multi-monitor aware. If your computer and your
operating system support this, it is highly recommended, espe-
cially if SoundDiver is used with a sequencing program like
Logic Audio.
: Multi-monitor operation is possible in all computers with PCI slots, independent
from the Mac OS version.
On Windows, this is only possible with Windows 98 and 2000, but not with
Windows 95 or NT 4.0. The graphics cards’ drivers must also be multi-monitor savvy.
X
Selecting Entries
141
User Manual
Version 3.0
4.4 Selecting Entries
There are several different ways of selecting entries or groups
of entries in a Device window or library. We have already
described the general functions. The special selection options
for the Device and Library windows are covered in their
respective chapters.
Read the following sections carefully and try out the functions
in a Device or Library window.
Selecting Individual Entries
You select individual entries simply by clicking them. To select
several entries which are spread out, hold down ç (: S) and
click the entries you want. Clicking an entry again will deselect
it.
Selecting Blocks
To select a contiguous block of entries, click the first entry, hold
down S (: ç) and then click the last entry.
You can select several blocks by holding down ç (: S) as
well. When selecting the first entry of the second block, hold
down S (: ç), for the last entry use both modifiers.
142
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Rubber Band
So select all entries within a rectangle, click in an empty area (or
a vertical numbering column), hold down the mouse button
and drag a rubber band across the entries you want to select.
As soon as this rubber band touches an edge of the window, the
visible window section scrolls, enabling you to select entries
that were previously not in view.
Inverting the Selection in an Area
To invert the selection within an area click in an empty area
and—as described in the previous section—drag a rubber band
across the entries while holding down ç (: S). The selection
will be inverted for all those entries lying within or touched by
the rubber band.
A current selection can also be inverted with Edit > Toggle Sel.
4.5 The Clipboard
SoundDiver has a clipboard into which data is transferred with
Edit > Cut and Copy and which is inserted somewhere else with
Edit > Paste. This clipboard works between different programs.
For example you could select all the entries in a library and
import their names into a word processing program.
You can also take a clipboard of text from another program and
add it to a library. It will be added as one or more title entries,
and paragraphs of 75 characters per line will be automatically
split up.
Using the clipboard, entries can be copied from a Device
window to a multi instrument in Logic Audio. In case AutoLink
is not working this is a simple workaround.
Printing the key commands is also effortless using the clip-
board. After copying the content of the Key Command window
to the clipboard (local menu item Options > Copy Key
X
X
The File Menu
143
User Manual
Version 3.0
Commands to Clipboard), just paste it to your favorite word
processing program, where you can edit the text for your
personal needs.
4.6 The File Menu
The File menu is where you can create
new library files, open or save existing
ones, print the contents of a library (or
the Help window on the Macintosh),
import and export files, make default
settings or quit SoundDiver.
New
Creates a new library with an empty
Library window and automatically
names it “Untitled”. Every subse-
quently created library is given a
number as well.
Open…
Opens an existing library from a floppy or hard disk. A file selec-
tion box appears in which you select a SoundDiver library.
When a library opens, the windows of the library documents
will be opened in accordance with the current screenset.
If no window was saved for the current screenset, a default
window opens instead.
The screenset information belonging to a library’s windows are saved in the library
file (not in the SoundDiver preferences which is the case for all other window
classes). This way, opening a library automatically opens all windows as they were
opened the last time it was opened, even if you did not use the library at all in the
previous session.
“Open…” basically contains the same functions as “Import…”, which only exists in
the menu for reasons of clarity.
X
X
144
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
: With “Open…” you can only load or import SoundDiver libraries, SoundDiver
preferences, Standard MIDI Files and SYX/MidiEx files. For all other file types, please
us the menu item “Import…”.
Close Library
Closes the current library, including all its windows. If you have
altered anything since opening the library, you will automati-
cally be asked whether you want to save the changes. As
opposed to all other windows, closing a Library window will not
close the library.
If you want to close just one window of the current library, select Windows > Close
window instead.
Save
Saves the current library (the one which is checked in the
Windows menu) onto floppy or hard disk. If you just created
the library using File > New, you will be asked to give the file a
name.
Save as…
Saves the current library under a different name, or using a
different file path. Use this function when you don’t want to
overwrite the existing library.
For both functions the following applies: if a file (of any type) cannot be saved, e.g.
because there is not sufficient space left, the old file will not be overwritten and stays
untouched. An error message will inform you of this.
Revert to Saved
If you have—mistakenly or otherwise—made any changes to a
library which you would like to undo, you can use this function
to call up the last version that you saved. The contents of the
library will be loaded back in, but the windows will remain the
same.
X
X
X
X
X
The File Menu
145
User Manual
Version 3.0
This process will cause all changes made since the previous save to be irretrievably
lost. If you are not sure whether you want to discard all the changes, you should first
save the current library under a different name using “Save as…” and then load the
last version using “Open…”.
Save Preferences
This saves the current settings to the appropriate file. Please
refer to page 411.
Save Preferences as…
Please see the section Save Preferences under a Different File Name
on page 411 for details.
Page Setup…
Opens the window for defining the page layout. The relevant
window for the printer will open. The paper format and indents
are saved in the library file, so they don’t have to be redefined
for the next print job.
Print…
Prints the contents of the currently active window with a
connected printer. You can print the following:
•the current Library window. The column layout is printed
exactly the same as you can see it on the screen. If the print
width is too narrow, the rest of the library columns will be cut
off.
•: the entire on-line Help document which is presently
displayed in the active Help window. Because the layout of
the text depends on the width of the window, this is also
carried over to the printer. However if the window is wider
than the print area of the paper format, the rest of each line
will be cut off. This should not happen with the preset print
area.
X
X
X
X
146
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
To print a Windows help file, please use the appropriate
function in Windows Help.
The format of the printing depends on the settings made in the
Page Setup window (see above).
You can abort the printing with R or ™.
Each library has a different page format, so that individual
libraries can be set to print optimally.
SoundDiver prints a library as “WYSIWYG” (What You See Is
What You Get) and supports TrueType for the best results.
: The Help text’s line-wrapping is determined by the width of the page that you set
under File > Page Setup, not the width of the on-Line Help window.
Margins are expressed in 1⁄72 inches, not in characters or lines.
The paper format is built into the Page Setup dialog box.
Import…
This function allows you to convert files (C-LAB programs
such as Polyframe, X-alyzer, Explorer 32 and Explorer M1 as
well as Atari editor programs and bank loaders from other
manufacturers) into SoundDiver libraries. You can also import
Standard MIDI Files (SMF) and SYX (MidiEx) files.
For more information please refer to the section section Import-
ing SYX Files from page 281 onwards.
Export MIDI File…
This menu item is identical to Edit > Transmit (see the section
Transmit on page 157), except that the data is not transmitted
via MIDI, but saved to a Standard MIDI File.
This means:
•if a Device window is active, the selected entries are saved
•if a Setup window is active, the memory contents of the
selected devices are saved
X
X
The File Menu
147
User Manual
Version 3.0
•if a Library window is active, the selected entries are saved
so that playing back the file (e.g. in a sequencer program)
will transmit the saved entries to the memory locations
which are stated in the library’s “Location” column. If
desired, you can reassign every memory location manually in
the resulting dialog, just as in “Transmit”.
For further details on export functions, please refer to the
section Exporting Files on page 282.
Capture as MIDI-File…
Selecting this menu item puts a check mark next to it, and all
subsequent MIDI output is saved in a temporary buffer. When
the menu item is unchecked the buffer is saved as a Standard
MIDI File. As usual, you are asked for a file name and a path.
Only MIDI output (no incoming MIDI events) is saved, except the output of the built-
in sequencer or from “MIDI Thru”.
Unlike the functions described in section Export MIDI File… on page 146 and in the
section Export … on page 212, the MIDI data is still sent out on the MIDI ports. This
is necessary for example to receive acknowledgement messages from devices which
require handshake communication.
If you select one of the above mentioned “Export” functions, “Capture MIDI File” is
aborted—all recorded data will get lost.
Quit
To quit SoundDiver select this menu command.
If there are libraries still open, you will be given the chance to
save them first.
When you quit the program the preferences (see below) are
always saved as well, so that the next time you start Sound-
Diver it will be set up exactly as it was before you quit the last
time. However, if you don’t want this to happen, you should
quit SoundDiver by selecting the menu item while holding
X
X
148
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
down S (: O) or using key command Quit without saving Pref-
erences.
4.7 The Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the Find and Select functions as well as
the standard functions for cutting, copying and pasting data
which are found in every Macintosh or Windows program.
Because these functions vary within the different levels of
SoundDiver, we will cover them in detail. You will also find
Request and Transmit in this menu transmitting all kinds of
entries from and to SoundDiver.
Undo…
This command allows you to undo the last operation, if you
accidentally deleted or altered something important. The func-
tion is available for practically all SoundDiver operations
including:
•cutting, pasting and deleting in all windows apart from the
Setup window,
•moving and sorting the entries in the library and the Device
window,
•altering parameters and names in all windows. Continuous
changes of the same parameter can only be “undone” as a
whole.
The menu item is always accompanied by a description of the
last operation, so that you always know what you can undo.
Of course all undone operations have an effect on the memory
of your MIDI devices as well.
Example: Delete an entry A in the Device window, then swap
entry B with entry C. By selecting Undo the first time (it now
reads “Undo Swap”), C will be swapped back with B. Selecting
X
The Edit Menu
149
User Manual
Version 3.0
Undo again (the menu now shows “Undo Clear”), entry A is
reestablished.
If the menu item is shown in gray and is named “Can’t undo”,
•the last operation can not be undone (e.g. deleting a device
in the Setup window),
•there is no operation that could be undone,
•or there is not enough memory to undo (all steps are
deleted).
The Undo function is unlimited in the number of undo steps:
you can undo all previous operations, as long as there was suffi-
cient memory to hold the necessary data to do so.
This unlimited Undo feature can take up a lot of memory, depending on the last
performed operations. Therefore, in case of an “out of memory” situation, Sound-
Diver subsequently deletes the first step in the “undo chain” until sufficient memory
is available. Under those circumstances, you would only be able to undo the most
recent operations.
: Undo steps are only deleted when other means (e.g. unloading unnecessary
module or adaptation files) did not help to free memory.
Redo…
This command reverses the most recent Undo, allowing you to
restore the situation to what it was before the undo function. As
with Undo, Redo can be used an unlimited number of times.
If the menu item is shown in gray and is named “Can’t redo”,
•you either haven’t yet performed Undo,
•all undo steps have been redone,
•or there is so little memory left that the “redo chain” had to
be deleted entirely.
As with Undo, there is a “redo chain” which is shortened in “out of memory” situ-
ations step by step; to be precise, it is always the longer of the two chains (“undo
chain” and “redo chain”) which is shortened.
X
150
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
The Text Clipboard
When entries are stored in the clipboard as text when you
perform Cut or Copy in a Library window, every entry is stored
on one line and only the currently displayed columns appear.
These are written out in full, and are separated by Tab charac-
ters.
This format is ideal for laying out tables in word processing
programs or for importing into databases.
Cut
Moves selected objects from a window or text from a text field
to the clipboard. From here the clipboard contents can be
added to other places as often as you like, using paste.
Library/Device Window
If you cut out a library or Device window entry that uses other
entries (“parent entry”; say a performance from the EX 5), the
linked “child entries” are automatically copied into the clip-
board as well. This ensures that if you add the entry to another
library it will still be complete. This function covers all levels
(e.g. program change table → multis → voices → pans). If you
want to delete the linked entries as well as the entry you are
cutting out, you have to select them too. In the library there is
a special function for this: A-click (: O-click).
The term “parent entry” is used here and elsewhere in this manual as a generic way
of describing an entry that is made up of multiple other component entries. The
actual term used by your synthesizer is likely to be something else, i.e., Combi,
Performance, or Preset.
If a linked entry is unknown in the Device window, a dialog box
appears with the following options:
Cancel
the copy operation is cancelled,
X
The Edit Menu
151
User Manual
Version 3.0
Ignore
the entry is copied without its associated entries, which
naturally results in incomplete data,
Ignore all
As with “Ignore”, but subsequent unknown entries are
skipped without further prompting,
Request
the unknown entries are requested from the device via
MIDI and then copied as well,
Request all
As with “Request”, but subsequent unknown entries are re-
quested without further prompting.
If you just want to delete a large amount of data (i.e. you don’t want to copy it from
the clipboard to somewhere else), it is better to use “Clear” (see below), because
“Cut” temporarily duplicates the entries you want to remove, which can sometimes
overload the memory. It’s quicker to clear than to cut.
Copy
Copies the selected objects or text from a window onto the clip-
board, leaving the originals in place. The explanation regarding
Cut also applies here for the library and the Device window.
Paste
Inserts the contents of the clipboard somewhere else, as
follows:
Library
If you have selected an entry, the contents of the clipboard are
added before this entry. If no entry is selected the data is
appended to the end of the library. SoundDiver automatically
checks for duplicates and deletes these if found.
If you add an entry that already exists, the existing one contin-
ues to be used. The reference (to the memory location of the
X
X
152
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Device window) is not changed, but a reference to the existing
entry is created instead.
Warning: the identity of two entries is established on the basis
of the data, not the name. This means that if an identical entry
already exists in the library, but under a different name, the
existing entry continues to be used instead of the added one.
This automatic function can be switched off in the Options >
Settings > Library Preferences window with Check doubles (see
the section Check Doubles on page 408).
Device Window
The contents of the clipboard will overwrite the memory loca-
tions from the first selected entry. If no entry is selected, a suit-
able location will be searched for. SoundDiver has a series of
routines designed to prevent the accidental overwriting of data
or unnecessary addition of entries that are already present. This
operates as follows:
•if the target memory location already contains the data which
is to be added, nothing happens,
•if the entry to be pasted already exists in another memory
location, it will not be added again,
•if there are no entries already present, a new target location is
searched for beginning from the selected entry. When doing
this, SoundDiver first searches for empty memory locations
to avoid unnecessarily overwriting any entries. If there are no
empty locations a dialog box appears in which you can select
the target memory locations for yourself. The program first
suggests a location where there are no cross-references.
Strategies Used in Paste
If you want to know exactly how SoundDiver associates loca-
tions when pasting entries, you will find a detailed explanation
in this section.
The Edit Menu
153
User Manual
Version 3.0
The linked data which is also copied into the clipboard is also
pasted. This works as follows:
•if the entry to be added is already present in any memory
location, this is “reused”. The reference in the parent entry
is adjusted if the memory location found is different from
that given in the parent entry,
•otherwise, as above, the program searches for the most suit-
able target location that has the least effect on existing data.
Example: you previously copied a multi into the library that
uses the voices “Piano” in memory location I-05, “Slap Bass” in
I-17 and “Choir” in I-23. In the meantime you have regrouped
the voices in the Device window so that the “Slap Bass” is now
in location I-03 and the “Choir” is no longer there. If you now
copy the multi from the library back into the Device window,
the following occurs:
•because the piano voice has remained in the same memory
location, nothing happens,
•SoundDiver realizes that “Slap Bass” is no longer in I-17 and
there is a different voice there instead. It therefore searches
for “Slap Bass” and finds it in I-05. The reference in the
multi is adjusted from I-17 to I-03,
•in addition the “Choir” is no longer in I-23. This is also
searched for, but not found. SoundDiver then searches for an
empty memory location. If it cannot find an empty one, it
searches for a location with no reference from other multis
(or program change table). The memory location found is
suggested as a target location in a dialog box, but you can
alter it if you want. After you confirm with OK, the Choir is
added to the Device window and sent to the device. The
reference in the multi is adjusted from I-23 to the new
memory location,
•finally, the altered multi is pasted and sent.
Remember that if you want to copy a parent entry with its asso-
ciated child entries from a library into a Device window, you
154
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
just have to copy this parent entry onto the clipboard and paste
it to the Device window. The associated child entries will be
automatically copied as well. In cases where there is any doubt,
you will be presented with a dialog box containing different
options. The same also applies when operating in the opposite
direction. This makes it easy to manage devices which have
several layers of data (e.g. Korg Wavestation, Roland D-70 or
Waldorf Microwave).
When pasting to the Device window only the sound data is compared, not the name.
Clear
This function deletes the selected objects or text without copy-
ing anything to the clipboard. You can reverse the clear opera-
tion with the Edit > Undo function.
Library
The Entry Dependency Management checks to see if you are
deleting an entry which is being used by another entry. In this
case a dialog box appears where you can select whether to:
Cancel
cancels the entire clear operation,
No
keeps the entry,
OK
deletes the entry,
All
all selected entries are deleted without further request.
In the “OK” and “All” cases the “uses” information in the
entries which use the deleted entry is also deleted. For exam-
ple, this can result in a parent entry becoming incomplete
because you have deleted a child entry that it was using. It is
obviously therefore important to be careful with the clear func-
tion.
X
The Edit Menu
155
User Manual
Version 3.0
Setup Window
Here you will always get a warning message because once you
clear (remove) a device, the operation cannot be undone.
The computer icon can’t be removed.
Select all
Selects all the selectable objects in an active window, or all the
text in a text field. For example, these could be library entries
in the library, or device icons in the Setup window.
Use this function prior to editing, copying or moving the entire
contents of a window.
Toggle Selection
This function toggles the selection within an active window: all
the currently-selected objects are deselected and instead all the
previously non-selected objects are selected.
Example: this would be useful if you wanted to delete most of
the entries in a library. You could select the few entries you
wanted to keep, toggle the selection and delete the selected
entries.
Request
When you select this command, SoundDiver asks the active
MIDI device to transmit the data for the selected entries.
Depending on the selection you can request individual sounds,
a sound bank, all edit buffers or the entire memory contents of
a device.
If you have selected a device icon in the Setup window Sound-
Diver will request the entire memory contents of the device—
another way of doing this would be to activate Select all in the
Device window and then select Request.
X
X
X
156
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Here is a detailed explanation of the functions of the Request
command as it affects the different windows:
Setup Window
In the Setup window all previously unknown memory locations
of the selected device are requested,
•“previously unknown” means that if entries have already
been requested, they will not be requested again. So
Request merely completes the data in the Device windows,
•“memory locations” means that no edit buffers are
requested (because these are temporary) nor are ROM
entries (because as a rule you don’t need to save these in a
library),
•if no device icon is selected a dialog box appears in which
you can select whether the operation should be carried out
for all devices.
Library Window
The same happens in the Library window as in the Setup
window; the memory locations of the selected devices (or all
devices if none are selected) are copied into the library.
Device Window
In the Device window the selected entries are requested. Here,
this can also include edit buffers and ROM entries.
Some devices will not allow some or all data-types to be externally requested. In this
case a dialog box appears in which you can cancel the operation or skip that
particular entry.
If a device will not allow individual entries to be transmitted, the program auto-
matically requests the next largest data block.
Some devices will not allow the entire memory contents to be requested via MIDI
because you cannot change the device mode via MIDI (e.g. Roland JD-800, JD-990).
If this happens you will see either an appropriate warning or the message “SysEx
The Edit Menu
157
User Manual
Version 3.0
communication error”. In this case click the “Help” button to find out what you have
to do.
Editor Window
In editor windows, the currently edited entry is re-requested.
This is particularly necessary if you
•select a different sound from the device’s front panel
•or edit the sound from the device’s front panel and the
device does not transmit parameter change messages,
after you have opened the editor window for this device.
Transmit
This command is primarily for bringing the memory contents of
your device into line with SoundDiver—which is however
seldom necessary, because SoundDiver takes care of this
synchronization itself. If you select this function, SoundDiver
transmits the data for the selected entries to the relevant MIDI
devices.
Unlike the Audition and AutoAudition functions, the transmit function writes the
data directly into the memory, and not into the edit buffer of the device.
Here is a detailed explanation of how SoundDiver operates
when you select the Transmit command:
Setup Window
In the Setup window, all the memory locations of the selected
devices are transmitted,
•“memory locations” here also means that no edit buffers or
ROM entries are transmitted. Of course, there would be no
point in sending the latter anyway,
•if no device icon is selected, a dialog box appears in which
you can select whether the operation should be carried out
for all devices.
X
158
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Library Window
In the Library window, the selected entries are transmitted to
the memory locations of the appropriate devices.
•If no entry is selected, SoundDiver asks if the entire library
should be transmitted.
•The selection of the “appropriate device” is very sophisti-
cated as there are many methods. For more information
please refer to section Device Selection Strategy when Sending
from a Library from page 214 onwards.
•As a preselection for the destination memory location, the
library entry’s Location statement is used. If this statement is
empty, SoundDiver tries to find an appropriate destination
automatically.
Device Window
In the Device window the selected entries are transmitted.
If any of your equipment won’t receive individual entries, SoundDiver will ask if it
should send the entire bank. If any of the entries in the bank are not recognized, you
will be asked if you want the unknown settings to be initialized. If you don’t want
this to happen, select “Cancel”, receive the entire bank, and then repeat the
Transmit procedure.
Editor Window
In editor windows, the currently edited entry is transmitted to
the device. This is necessary in particular if the device was not
ready for reception at the time the editor window was opened
(e.g. because it was switched off).
Find…/Find again
The Find functions allow you to search through one or more
libraries for entries. SoundDiver offers many ways of entering
Find criteria.
X
The Options Menu
159
User Manual
Version 3.0
For a detailed explanation of the Find functions, please refer to
the section section The Find Function from page 268 onwards.
4.8 The Options Menu
Settings
You will find a detailed explanation
in chapter The Preferences from page
385 onwards.
AutoAudition
When AutoAudition is activated, the entries which you select
with the mouse or cursor keys are automatically transmitted to
an edit buffer of the device, so you can listen to the sounds or
programs right away. This saves you the effort of selecting the
Transmit function from the Edit menu every time you select an
entry.
: You can temporarily reverse AutoAudition if you select the
entries by C-clicking them. Thus even if the AutoAudition
function is active, you can select an entry without immediately
sending it to the device.
S- or ç-clicking prevents AutoAudition (both in the Device
window and in the Library). This allows you to achieve a multi-
ple selection without having every clicked entry transmitted.
AutoPlay
Toggles the AutoPlay function between on and off. If activated,
SoundDiver’s built-in sequencer plays the recorded sequence
every time the Audition or AutoAudition operation is triggered,
and also when a parameter in an editor is changed.
This means that you can automatically audition the new sound
with the short sequence.
X
X
160
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
The recording of the test sequence is covered in section The
Mini Sequencer on page 182.
If you are using SoundDiver in conjunction with Logic Audio via Autolink, Sound-
Diver will automatically play a short segment of the open song in Logic Audio, begin-
ning at the left locator position.
MIDI Thru
Toggles SoundDiver’s MIDI Thru function between on and
off. If the MIDI Thru function is active, SoundDiver diverts
events received from the master keyboard to the active device.
You can select the master keyboard in the MIDI Setup window;
more on this in the section section Master Keyboard on page 205.
While requesting or transmitting entries, MIDI Thru is temporarily disabled. This
prevents devices from getting confused by inserted note events.
For more information on the special features of the MIDI Thru
function in connection with MIDI-Tasking please refer to the
section SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking on page 73 in Chapter 2
Installation.
Hold Transmission
If this menu item is checked, all pending transmissions (i.e.
dump messages) are held until the menu item is unchecked.
This feature is global for all devices. So if data is changed in
several devices while Hold transmission is checked, no
changed data will be sent to any device before the menu item is
unchecked.
This feature is handy if you want to reorganize several entries
in a bank, especially if the transmission of a single entry takes a
long time (e.g. because there is only a bank dump message
available).
Example: You want to build a bank from several library entries.
❏check the menu item Hold transmission
X
X
The Options Menu
161
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏drag and drop all entries into the bank (this is quick, because
nothing is transmitted)
❏uncheck the menu entry Hold transmission. All changed en-
tries are then transmitted.
Send MIDI
All Notes Off
Use this function to
correct MIDI prob-
lems such as hanging
notes. When you
select All Notes Off,
all notes which are
still playing are
switched off by
means of a MIDI All Notes Off command sent to all connected
devices. If the built-in sequencer is playing, this is also stopped;
the same applies to an external sequencer if you are using
MIDI-Tasking (AutoLink).
Reset Controllers
This function transmits the MIDI command “Reset Control-
lers” which resets all MIDI controllers (e.g. pitch, modulation,
aftertouch) to their “neutral” positions. Use this function if a
synthesizer reacts weirdly because of a MIDI processing error,
such as where the vibrato stays stuck on, or the pitch is wrong.
This command affects all connected devices.
Maximum Volume
Sets the volume of all the connected devices to maximum. This
is done by sending a value of 127 for Controllers 7 (volume) and
11 (expression) on all channels and over all MIDI outputs.
X
X
X
162
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Loopback Test
This menu item tests the functionality of a MIDI connection.
For this, you temporarily connect a certain MIDI input directly
with a certain MIDI output using a MIDI cable. SoundDiver
sends data packages and compares them with the incoming
data.
To call up this function select Options > Loopback test…. You
can also start the loopback test from a button in the “SysEx
communication error” message.
To choose a certain port, click on a device and select the desired
In and Out port.
SoundDiver leads you through each step.
First connect the MIDI In with the MIDI Out, using a MIDI
cable and click Start tests.
SoundDiver sends MIDI messages to the Output and checks
the imcoming data.
SoundDiver transmitts all 7*16 channel messages (with data
byte 0), then SysEx messages with manufacturer ID “Non-
Commercial SysEx” (7Dh) of increasing size.
You’ll get detailed information in the last message. The tests
continue until there is a problem, or until the tested SysEx
message reaches 20,000 bytes.
The Windows Menu
163
User Manual
Version 3.0
4.9 The Windows Menu
The Windows menu is the only
variable menu in SoundDiver. Its
contents depend on what/how
many windows are open. In the
following sections you will learn
about the different window
classes: “Library”, “Setup” and
“Device window”. Within a
window class you can open several
windows which will then appear
in the Windows menu. If you have
a large number of open, overlap-
ping windows, you can use the
Windows menu to bring any one
of them to the foreground.
If you select one of the Open …
menu items, and a window of this
class is already open, but not active (front-most), the window
gets activated. If no such window is open, or it is already active,
then a new window of this class is opened (as far as multiple
windows of this class are possible).
Example: if you select the menu item Open Library, a new
Library window is opened. But if you select one of the menu
sub-items beneath Library, the window you click is topped—
no new window is opened.
Screensets
Normally you will lay out your windows on the screen in a way
that suits your way of working. This layout with various
164
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
windows, with all their different parameters (display, zoom,
position of each window) is called a screenset, and can be
stored. You can then swap between different screensets, much
as you might swap between different computer monitors.
Windows version: The size and position of the frame window (this is the window
which contains the menu bar) is stored in the screensets, too.
Storing Screensets
Screensets are numbered from 1 to 99 using only the numbers
1 to 9 (the 0 key is not allowed). You can see the number of the
current screenset in the main menu next to the word Windows.
You don’t have to save screensets with an explicit command. It
happens automatically, as soon as you switch to another
screenset. Thus, without any effort, your current working view
is always stored in the current screenset. Look at the section
Screensets from page 122 onwards for an example.
Switching Screensets
Just input the number of the desired screenset (1 to 9). For
two-digit screensets, hold down A (: ç) while inputting
the first digit.
Protecting Screensets
Use the option Windows > Screenset > Locked or the key
command Lock/unlock current Screenset to protect the present
screenset from being altered. A “•”(Macintosh) or
“#”(Windows) then appears in front of the screenset number.
Repeat the key command or menu command to unlock the
screenset.
Copying Screensets
To copy the current screenset to a destination screenset, hold
down S when you switch to the destination screenset. Two
digit screensets are copied with SA (: Sç).
X
The Windows Menu
165
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver offers a safety dialog box if you copy Screensets.
You can also use menu functions to copy Screensets via the clip-
board: Switch to the Screenset you would like to copy and
select Windows > Screenset > Copy Screenset, then switch to
the Screenset you wish to copy to, and select Paste Screenset.
Reverting to a Stored Screenset
The key command Revert to current Screenset resets your screen
to the way it was when you called up the current screenset.
Sequencer-controlled Switching
Using the AutoLink mode, screensets in Logic Audio and
SoundDiver are synchronized. You can use Meta-Event # 49 to
switch screensets via Logic. Look at chapter 10 in the Logic
manual for details.
Open Library
This menu command opens a new window in the active library.
You can open as many windows for one library as you want.
Thus it is possible to lay out differently-sized sections of a
library on the screen to save space.
If no Library has been loaded, the menu item Open Library
remains active. You can use it to open a Library (the function is
the same as File > Open…).
You can open several library windows at the same time. This
allows you to arrange several sections and display scalings of the
same library in order to save space. The library functions are
covered in detail in page 245.
X
X
166
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Open Setup
Opens the Setup window or tops it. You can only open one
Setup window.
The Setup functions are described in detail in page 191.
Open Device
Opens a new Device window for the device that is selected in
the Setup window. If no device is presently selected in the
Setup window, the Device window opens for the device that
was previously active. If the Device window of that device is
already open, it is topped.
If the Device window shows nothing except the parameter box,
check if all data types are shown. To show all data types on the
screen, select View > Data types > Show All. You can also click
on the Al l button at the top right of the device icon. You will
find more information in the section The Device Window on page
220.
X
X
The Windows Menu
167
User Manual
Version 3.0
You can open several Device windows simultaneously for one
device. This allows you to lay out different sections of a Device
window on the screen, and simultaneously display sections that
don’t fit in a single window.
Two-section window of a Device window
The functions of the Device window are covered in detail in
page 217.
Open Editor
When you select this command from the menu, a new Editor
window opens for the entry selected in the Device window. If
there is no entry selected in the Device window, you will not be
able to select this command from the menu. If the selected
entry cannot be edited the Audition function is carried out, and
the Editor window opens for the relevant Edit buffer. If an
Editor window is already open for that entry, it is brought to the
front.
You can open several Editor windows for the same Edit buffer.
This allows you to arrange different sections of an Editor on the
X
168
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
screen to simultaneously display areas which would not other-
wise all fit in a single window.
The Editor functions are covered in detail in page 295.
“Link window” is disabled in all Editor windows if a new Editor window is opened
while there is already an Editor window opened. In this case you usually want to edit
different entries, and “Link window” would prevent this.
Open Controller Assignments
opens a window where you can assign any MIDI-in message to
any parameter within SoundDiver.
Only one Controller Assignments window can be opened, as all
Controller Assignments are administrated from one table.
Look for details in the section Controller Assignments on page
329.
Open Install Window
This item opens the Install window.
New devices can be installed or the setup can be scanned for
new devices. Take a look at the section Installing Devices on
page 65.
Open Sequencer
This menu command opens the window for the built-in
sequencer. This window is (by default) a “floating window”
which is always topped.
To open this window as a normal window, use the key
command Open Sequencer as normal.
The detailed functions of the sequencer are covered in section
The Mini Sequencer on page 182.
X
X
X
The Windows Menu
169
User Manual
Version 3.0
Open MIDI Monitor
This menu item opens a window which displays outgoing and
incoming MIDI messages. It is very helpful for trouble shoot-
ing of communication problems.
The functions of the MIDI Monitor are covered in the section
MIDI Monitor on page 185.
Open Help
Select this menu command or press @ (: H) to call up the
on-line Help (or top it). The help function is context-sensitive,
i.e. it always produces the help page that is relevant to the
current situation.
Example: if you select a device in the Setup window and select
“Help”, the help text for this device will be displayed on the
screen.
The Help functions are described in more detail in the section
On-line Help on page 171.
The following window commands help you get an overview of
the screen by topping windows and placing them around the
screen. They occur in a very similar form in all Emagic
programs.
Larger View
shows the window contents in a larger font size.
Smaller View
shows the window contents in a smaller font size.
Next Window
This option brings the bottom-most window to the top and acti-
vates it if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
170
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Zoom Window
This options has the same function as clicking the zoom gadget
at the top right corner of the active window. It toggles between
maximum use of the screen and the set window size and simul-
taneously places the window beneath the menu bar.
For advanced users: when you switch from the set window size to the maximum
window size, the horizontal and vertical position of the window is only altered if the
window would otherwise no longer fit on the screen.
Close Window
This options closes the active window.You can also simply click
the close gadget at the top left-hand corner of the window.
: In former versions of SoundDiver, the key command for this function used to be
Cu. However, this does not comply with Macintosh conventions, therefore it has
been changed to Cw.
When you close a library window, the library itself is not closed. This is only done
when selecting File > Close Library (see the section Close Library on page 144).
This behavior is helpful when you want to create a screenset which does not have
opened library windows, but you still wish to keep the library open. Also see the
section Screensets on page 139.
Tile Windows
Attempts to lay out all the open windows on the screen so that
you can see them all at once. Of course, whether this is success-
ful depends on the number of open windows and the current
size of the screen.
Tile Windows Horizontally
Attempts to lay out all open windows on the screen so that they
will have maximum width. If there is no useful height left for
the single window, a new row is set. SoundDiver optimizes the
layout.
X
X
X
X
On-line Help
171
User Manual
Version 3.0
Stack Windows
Places the first window beneath the menu bar and overlaps the
other windows beneath it, so that you can easily move or acti-
vate any window.
Window List
Below the window-specific menu items, a list showing all open
windows can be found. The active window has a check mark.
By selecting one of these menu items, the appropriate window
is activated.
If there are more than 10 windows open, you will find an item
More windows… where you can select one of the other open
windows.
Library List
At the bottom of the Windows menu you will see the libraries
that are currently open. The active library has a check mark by
it. If you select a library here it will be activated and its
window—if already open—will be topped. If there was no
window already open for the active library, a new one is auto-
matically opened.
4.10 On-line Help
A vital part of SoundDiver is the comprehensive on-line Help
system, which offers you assistance with problems, questions
and malfunctions. The on-line Help is context-sensitive—
which means that whenever you call up the help, the relevant
help text for the present situation will always appear on the
screen. You can leaf through the pages or use the index function
to directly call up specific topics.
The Windows version uses the Windows Help system.
X
172
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
: A common window is used that you can leave open while
you are working with SoundDiver.
We recommend that to start with you always leave the help
window open—say on the right half of the screen—and read
the help text very carefully.
The on-line Help supplements this instruction manual with
information on specific devices. For example, in the Setup
window you can get help on the selected MIDI device. Apart
from general help messages about SoundDiver there are special
help messages for every module, so that when you are installing
a new module, you are supplied with a relevant up-to-date help
message.
You may call up the on-line Help either by selecting Windows
> Help or pressing @ (: H).
Windows only: By selecting the menu item Options > Help always in fore-
ground, the help window stays in the foreground, even when you click on some-
thing in SoundDiver.
: The Help window is opened as a “floating window” by default. Key commands
for the help window cease to be active. If you want to have key commands available
for the help window, open it with O held down.
Help Menu for Windows
To the right of the Windows menu, you can find the Help
menu. Here, you can open the on-line Help by different means:
Help…
opens the on-line Help with different contents, depending on
the current situation. This menu item is identical with the one
in the Windows menu (see the section Open Help on page 169).
On-line Help
173
User Manual
Version 3.0
Search Help…
opens the index dialog of the help window relevant to the
current situation. Here you can select a help page directly or
search for a certain text passage in the help file.
How to Use Help…
shows help about how to use the Windows Help system.
Common Menus
On the Macintosh in the menu, and on Windows in the Help
menu you will find these items:
About SoundDiver…
opens the info window “About this program”. Among other
information, here you can find the exact version number of
SoundDiver. It is needed for phone support.
The following menu items only occur in the OEM and demo
versions of SoundDiver.
License Agreement…
opens a help file with the license agreement. For the retail
version of SoundDiver, you will find the license agreement
printed in section Emagic Incorporated End User License Agree-
ment on page 4.
SoundDiver Features…
opens a help file with a list of all features in SoundDiver.
Emagic Distributors…
opens a help file with a list of all distributors who distribute
Emagic products.
174
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Layout of the Help Window
The Help Window
Like the other windows, the Help window contains the stan-
dard window elements (scroll bars, close gadget, etc.). You can
therefore place it where you want on the screen or move the
window view.
The title bar always displays the disk path of the current help
message.
The Control Bar on Windows
You can use the local control bar to get around the help
messages as follows:
•this new button scrolls to the first page of the selected
Help file. This is where you normally find a description of
the module or adaptation
• See below.
•takes you to the previously selected page. This
allows you to trace your way back through the on-line Help
messages to the place where you started.
: The Help window is closed as soon as you arrive back at
the start.
Title barControl bar
Hel
p
messa
g
e
Cross-
Scroll bars
references
On-line Help
175
User Manual
Version 3.0
•turns one page back
•turns one page forwards
Index
If you click Index, the index appears on the screen. Select the
term which you need more information on, and click it. If you
change your mind and decide you don’t want to go to another
page from the index, press ™.
Operating the On-line Help
The on-line Help itself contains built-in instructions for navi-
gating the Help system. To bring this up, click the Help button
in the control bar of the Help window (Windows: @).
Zoom
The display within the Help window can be zoomed with the
Zoom gadget on the Macintosh (Windows: sub-menu
“Options” item “Font size”, three sizes).
Cross-references
The help messages always contain cross-references to associ-
ated or extended topics. The relevant key words are bold and
underlined on the Macintosh (Windows: colored and under-
lined). Clicking one of these words will bring the relevant page
up on the screen.
Icons
You will often come across icons which indicate particularly
important sections, warnings or detailed information.
X
X
176
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
please pay close attention to the following text to avoid
malfunctions or loss of data
explains how you operate an object with the mouse
a relevant example of the help message
Standard Pages
Most help files have a minimum set of standard help pages. All
those pages can be recalled by the index (see the section Index
on page 175).
“Module” Module (e.g. JV1080 Module)
This page is located at the very beginning of the help file for a
SoundDiver Module. It contains introductory descriptions of
the Module.
“Model” (e.g. XP-80)
For SoundDiver Modules, this page describes the peculiarities
of the model, especially in comparison to the other models
supported by the Module.
For Adaptations, this page is located at the very beginning of
the help file and contains notes about the Adaptation as well as
about the models supported by it.
This page is recalled from the Install window for the first
selected device.
Installation
describes the necessary steps to install the device for Sound-
Diver, e.g. if any parameters have to be set to certain values so
that the device processes SysEx messages.
On-line Help
177
User Manual
Version 3.0
Scan…
describes peculiarities of the Scan function. Some devices
cannot be scanned, in which case it would be documented here.
MIDI…
Here you find details about what MIDI messages are processed
by the Module or Adaptation. Some Modules don’t process
“bulk dump” and/or Parameter Change messages.
You will also find general notes about peculiarities regarding
MIDI communication with the device here.
AutoLink
This page contains all information which has to do with the
display of names for Program Changes (Name Provider, see the
section The Sound Names in Logic Instruments on page 362): if
there are any entries which have to be requested or any para-
meters to be configured, as well as all recognized Bank Select
messages. If you encounter problems with AutoLink Name
Providing, you should refer to this page first.
SysEx Communication Error
This page enumerates any possible reasons for communication
problems, and relevant fixes or workarounds.
If you click the Help button in the error message “xxx didn’t
answer…”, this help page is displayed.
Memory Manager
Here, all banks of the device are listed, as well as possible
configurations (e.g. cards, memory expansions).
This page is recalled by opening the help window from the
Device window if there is no entry selected, or there is no on-
line Help for the selected entry’s bank.
178
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
“Data type” (e.g. Patch)
defines the data type.
“Bank” (e.g. Performance Mode Temporary Patches)
describes the bank’s peculiarities and contains a link to the
bank’s data type.
This page is displayed if there is an entry selected in the
Device window and the help window is opened, or if an entry is
selected in another bank while the help window is already
open.
Device Parameter box
Here the peculiarities of the device parameter box (see the
section The Device Parameter Box on page 197) as well as the
special parameters (see the section Special Device Parameters on
page 208) are described.
This page is recalled by clicking the Help button in the special
parameters box.
Conversion
If the Module or Adaptation is able to convert data types into
each other (or even between different device models), it is
documented here.
Import
If the Module supports importing alien file formats, it is docu-
mented here.
Credits
Here you can find out who created the Module or Adaptation as
well as the on-line Help file.
The ToolTips
179
User Manual
Version 3.0
“Data type” Editor (e.g. Patch Editor)
Here the overall design and structure of the SoundDiver editor
for a certain data type is described.
This page is recalled by opening the help window if an editor
window is active, but there is no cursor flashing, or there is no
specific help for the cursored parameter.
“Parameter group” (e.g. TVA Envelope)…
describes the purpose of the parameter group, as well as a list-
ing of the secondary parameter groups which may also be
copied separately.
This page is recalled if there is no specific help for the single
parameters in the parameter group.
“Parameter” (e.g. Cutoff Frequency)…
describes the effect of a parameter and the individual parame-
ter values, if appropriate. Often you will also find a link to the
superordinate parameter group.
If the parameter can be edited using “Listen to MIDI” (see
section Inputting Values via MIDI on page 310), you will find the
appropriate icon together with a note on which MIDI messages
can be used for entering a value.
This page is recalled when the help window is opened while
the cursor is flashing on a parameter, or when the cursor is
moved to another parameter while the help window is already
opened.
4.11 The ToolTips
ToolTips are small popup windows, that opens when the
mouse pointer moves over an object and stays there for at least
half a second. ToolTips show information about entries or
describe the function of a button.
180
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
The ToolTip will close if
•the mouse pointer moves to another object,
•a key or button is pushed
•you click an entry in the Device window or
•at the latest after 10 seconds.
ToolTips in the Editor Window
In an Editor window ToolTips display the complete name and
value of the current parameter. A ToolTip opens if you edit a
parameter in an Editor window
•with the mouse (Function “Mouse as slider”). The ToolTip
is closed when the mouse button is released.
•with the keyboard. The ToolTip is closed after 2 seconds.
ToolTips in the Device Window
In Device window ToolTips contain its data type, memory
location, and the complete name for every entry. This informa-
tion is also shown in the status bar on the button of your
window, but only for the selected entry.
Adjust ToolTips
ToolTips can be adjusted with Options > Settings > Display
Preferences.
The ToolTips
181
User Manual
Version 3.0
If when pointing on objects is unchecked, no ToolTips are shown
when you move the mouse pointer over an object.
Disabling while editing suppresses ToolTips only while para-
meters are edited.
Particularities
No ToolTips are shown if parameter groups are copied, initialized or randomized. If
parameters are changed by processing MIDI messages in the Controller Assignments
list, Tooltips are also omitted (see the section Controller Assignments from page 329
onwards).
: If the option Help > Show Balloons is enabled, the ToolTip
windows open immediately and are closed only if the mouse
pointer is moved to a place where there is no object which can
show a ToolTip.
On the Windows platform, the ToolTips background can be
edited in the “Display” control panel, “Appearance” tab. The
color can be edited in the “Color” pull down menu after select-
ing “ToolTip” in the “Item” pull down menu.
See the section ToolTips on page 403 for details.
182
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
4.12 The Mini Sequencer
SoundDiver provides a small sequencer for recording phrases
or melodies that you can use when listening to your sounds.
This sequencer is especially useful whenever you have to work
without a MIDI keyboard. You can integrate test sequences
into every library, and these can then be automatically played
by the Options > AutoPlay function.
: The internal sequencer is switched off whenever you use AutoLink. For more
detailed information please refer to the section SoundDiver and MIDI-Tasking from
page 73 onwards.
To open the sequencer window, select Windows > Sequencer.
The sequencer window is a “floating window”: it is always
active and topped, and doesn’t take up much space, so you can
leave it open permanently if you like. If you want the
sequencer as a common window use the key command Open
Sequencer as normal.
The mini-sequencer has just one track, and contains the major
functions that you will probably already be familiar with from
other sequencers.
Under Autolink, the tempo slider is replaced by an “AutoPlay
Duration” slider. This sets the length of time (in seconds) the
external sequencer runs in the AutoPlay function.
If the external sequencer is already running in “cycle” mode, SoundDiver will not
stop the sequencer. You can therefore try out different sounds while it cycles.
X
X
1Bar display: bar, beat, sixteenth, tick.
2Tempo field
3MIDI In/Out display: shows incoming
3and outgoing MIDI events in text
4Record button
5Pause button
6Play button
1
2
34
5
67
The Mini Sequencer
183
User Manual
Version 3.0
Record
To record a sequence, first use the MIDI In display to check
that the sequencer is receiving data from the keyboard,
❏click the record button; you will hear a metronome and the
position displays for sixteenths and ticks will cycle in a loop,
❏set the tempo by altering the bpm number with the mouse,
❏play the sequence on the MIDI keyboard. As soon as you
begin to play, the clock display will start to run. You can in-
terrupt the recording with the pause button. After you have
finished playing, click the stop button.
Output Parameters
As with MIDI Thru, the sequencer always plays on the MIDI
output assigned to the active device, and on the MIDI channel
which is set in the parameter Thru Ch (see the section Thru
Channel on page 202).
Play
Click the play button to listen to the sequence. The sequencer
plays the phrase once. You can automate the playing of the test
sequence as follows:
If you have activated Options > AutoPlay, the test sequence is
transmitted every time you select an entry.
In this case we advise you to use sequences which are only one
bar or less in duration.
Drum Autoplay
Defines the duration of a note (in milliseconds). This parame-
ter is only used if an editor changes a single note, in which case
a complete sequence doesn’t make sense. When editing drums
the relevant note is played using the duration set in Drum
AutoPlay.
X
X
184
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
This feature is not available in Adaptations.
Free Memory
At the bottom of the Sequencer window, the free memory is
shown. It serves as a global overview of SoundDiver’s memory
consumption.
The shown value displays the largest free block’s size, not the
cumulative size of all free blocks—because the latter is of no
use when allocating one large block of memory.
By clicking the display, you can try to increase free memory:
•a single click “compacts” memory, i.e. moves moveable
blocks so that fragmented free blocks can be combined. This
function is comparable with defragmentation tools like
Norton SpeedDisk.
•a right-click (: C-click) purges purgeable blocks, i.e.
removes blocks which are currently not necessary
•double click frees as much memory as possible, i.e. performs
both of the above procedures.
Store Sequence
The Library window has a menu item Library > Store
sequence. This allows you to integrate the sequence that is
presently in the mini-sequencer into all the selected entries.
For example, you can select all the bass sounds and allocate
them a typical slap bass lick, then allocate all the string sounds
a slow chord progression, etc.
Just record the sequence you want, select the relevant entries
in the library and select this menu command.
This feature is not available when AutoLink is in use, or SoundDiver is used with
another MIDI-Tasking system. In these cases the internal sequencer is disabled.
The sequences are saved with the library onto disk and are
available as soon as you start SoundDiver again.
MIDI Monitor
185
User Manual
Version 3.0
4.13 MIDI Monitor
Abb. MIDI-In-Fenster
The MIDI Monitor window displays the flow of MIDI data,
and is primarily intended for checking the MIDI connections.
To open this window, click the In or Out display in the
Sequencer window.
Another method is to select Windows > Open MIDI Monitor. If
you hold down ‚ (: O) at the same time, the window opens
as a “floating window”.
The window shows all the MIDI data leaving or arriving at the
computer, over all outputs and inputs.
The MIDI data is shown in hexadecimal to the left, and in
ASCII to the right. Status bytes are in bold type (in the illustra-
tion, compare the SysEx Status bytes F0 and F7).
The window’s display can be zoomed (zoom gadget on the
bottom right), and SoundDiver automatically selects the size of
the typeface to match. The contents of the windows scroll as
well.
The window can show up to 256 kBytes of data. To erase the
buffer contents and therefore that of the window select Edit >
Clear.
X
186
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Note for advanced users: for SysEx messages, the vertical column next to the data
window gives the offset of the first Byte of each line in hexadecimal format. Together
with the title line you can easily determine the offset of a data byte inside a SysEx
message.
With all status bytes except F7 (End of Exclusive), there is a
line feed, so that the beginning of a new message is always
shown in a new line. At a change between incoming and outgo-
ing data, or a changing output, there is also a horizontal line as
well as the text “Input:” or “Output:” together with the appro-
priate output name shown. For a better identification, incoming
data is shown red, outgoing data is shown green.
This window is especially useful when troubleshooting failing
requests or scans. You can also find out how SoundDiver’s scan
function works.
Edit Menu
Copy
You can copy the window’s entire contents as text to the clip-
board and paste it into a text editor with the Edit > Copy menu
item. This is useful when you want to give details on a commu-
nication problem. Also see Troubleshooting on page 421 in
Appendix C .
Clear
With the menu item Edit > Clear, you can clear the window
contents. This is useful if the window already is showing 256
KB, or you want to analyze a specific communication problem,
and want only the relevant data shown.
Show Menu
The local View > … menu allows you to show or hide specific
information, and thus tailor the display more closely to your
needs.
X
X
MIDI Monitor
187
User Manual
Version 3.0
MIDI In
Incoming MIDI data is only shown if this menu item is
checked.
MIDI Out
Outgoing MIDI data is only shown if this menu item is
checked.
View Menu
The local View menu allows you to enable and disable the
display of various data, so that you can make it more detailed or
easier to read, depending on your needs.
Time Stamps
When this menu item is checked, time stamps are shown.
Time stamp lines show the exact time when the MIDI bytes
have been transmitted or received. The shown information
consists of:
•the time when the data has been received or transmitted, in
the format HH:MM.SS.mmm (hours, minutes, seconds,
milliseconds). The shown time refers to the time when the
computer was most recently booted.
•the time difference from the last time stamp line in millisec-
onds. This information is only shown if the value is larger
than 0.
•“Input” or “Output” together with the input’s or output’s
name. This information is only shown if it differs from the
last time stamp line.
Time stamps for incoming MIDI bytes refer to the time when SoundDiver or the
Module read them from the input buffer, and not when they actually arrived in the
computer. This can be of difference if SoundDiver is currently occupied by other time-
consuming tasks, e.g. screen redraws.
X
X
X
188
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
The shown time stamp information can help you to find a useful value for the time-
out parameter in the Device Parameter box: simply request an entry and then check
the value in brackets in the incoming data’s first time stamp line.
… of Status Bytes Only
When this menu item is checked, time stamp information is
shown only for status bytes, otherwise it is also shown for all
MIDI messages, i.e. for data bytes.
Below a time stamp line for data bytes, the next data byte is
shown in the column following the last displayed data byte (and
not in the first column), so that the 16’s counting inside SysEx
messages is kept up.
Time stamp lines for data bytes are important for devices which make long pauses
inside SysEx messages (e.g. Lexicon LXP-1/5 Bank Dump, Kawai K5000 ADD Sound
Dump). This circumstance can possibly cause receive errors if the Adaptation or
Module does not take this into account.
Note Off, …, System messages
These eight menu items allow you to filter specific message
types, according to the status byte:
If a menu item is checked, the corresponding MIDI messages
are shown.
Table 3 Status filter
Note Off 80 … 8F
Note On 90 … 9F
Poly Pressure A0 … AF
Control Change B0 … BF
Program Change C0 … CF
Channel Pressure D0 … DF
Pitch Bend E0 … EF
System messages F0 … FF
X
X
MIDI Monitor
189
User Manual
Version 3.0
Incoming Real-time messages (F8h … FFh) are filtered out by principle and thus not
shown.
Limitations
•The MIDI Monitor window is limited to 256 KByte of data.
If this limit is reached, no more data will be shown. You can
clear the window contents with B or the menu item Edit >
Clear (unless the window was opened as a floating window).
•An open MIDI Monitor window slows down MIDI
processing, and could lead to communication problems, so
shut it when you are not using it.
•The time stamp information has a resolution based on the
system timer of 1 ms (1⁄1000 s) on both operating systems.
This resolution is fully sufficient for time-out handling,
which is usually in the range of 20 to 500 ms.
190
Chapter 4
SoundDiver’s User Interface
Emagic
SoundDiver
Installing Your Devices
191
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Setup Window
This chapter will teach you how to configure your setup in
SoundDiver. Among other things, you will learn how tomake
SoundDiver automatically scan your system for connected
devices, install devices manually, make individual settings for
each device and automatically create a library for one or more
devices.
5.1 Installing Your Devices
The section Installing Devices on page 65 in Chapter 2 Installa-
tion deals with the Install window and its functions in detail.
This is where you can install your devices, either manually or
using the automatic scan function. If you haven’t read this
section yet, you should take a look at it now.
5.2 Installing New Devices
Manually
Every device has to be installed before SoundDiver can start
communication with it. New devices can be installed at any
time using the Install window.
If you want to install devices manually—i.e. without the scan
function—select New > Install…. When the Install window
opens, you may select the device you want and install it. For
details please refer to the section dealing with The Install
Window on page 66 in Chapter 2 Installation.
If there is already a compatible device in the Setup, a dialog box informs you that the
new device has automatically been assigned another device ID and a number has
been added to the name. The Setup window will also be activated so that you can
Chapter 5
192
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
immediately make any necessary corrections (in case the automatically assigned
device ID is not right). We advise that you give the device a distinguishing name right
away.
5.3 Interactive On-line Help
If you select a device in the list and then click the Help button
or press @ (: H), a help message is displayed for the
selected device, with tips on any special features or limitations.
If you select another device while the help function is open, the
help message is automatically updated.
If you want information on installing the device, click Index in
the Help window and then select Installation.
5.4 Graphic Display of the Setup
Device
Special
Setup
box
parameter
parameters
Graphic Display of the Setup
193
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Setup window consists of a graphic display of the current
setup, with the device parameter box to the left.
The graphic display of the setup normally takes up the largest
part of the Setup window. There is one icon for the computer
and one for every device known to SoundDiver.
Icons and Lists
The Setup window’s display can figure with icons (already
seen) and as a list.
You switch between the views with the menu items View > As
Icons and As List
Abb. links Setup-Icons, rechts Setup-Liste
As you can see, the list display is not quite as informative as a
graphical representation of the Setup, but you see far more
devices within the same amount of space.
X
194
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
The devices are shown in alphabetic order. Each device in the
list has a name, MIDI port and Device ID. To the very right,
the memory allocation of the device (in bytes) is shown. This
may be useful to determine which device uses up the most
memory, based on the currently known entries.
The menu items Windows > Larger view and Windows >
Smaller view are used to change the text size, and hence the
number of devices you can see.
In the text display mode, there’s a little space to the left where
you can click to deselect all the devices or to select several
devices with the rubber band.
Activating a Device
You can activate a device within the setup in any of the follow-
ing ways:
•click its icon.
•type in the first letter of the device name (don’t forget to
enable Caps Lock).
•place the cursor (represented by a darker display of the
selected icon) using the cursor keys (MIJK).
The contents of the device parameter box and the special para-
meter box (see below) automatically reflect the parameters of
the active device.
To select several devices at once, either click them while hold-
ing down ç (: S) or drag the rubber band over them.
After a device has been activated, SoundDiver sometimes transmits a Program
Change message or SysEx data to set up the correct patchbay connections.
Moving Icons with the Mouse
In the setup you will see one icon for the computer and one for
each installed device; there are also connecting lines which
represent the MIDI wiring but do not correspond to MIDI
X
Graphic Display of the Setup
195
User Manual
Version 3.0
cabling in terms of MIDI In and Out. SoundDiver lays out the
icons one below the other in the order in which they were
installed. If a device was located via a patchbay the device’s
icon is shown indented.
You can change the layout in the setup at any time, e.g. if you
•want to make space on the screen or
•want to match the position of the icons with the arrangement
of your real devices.
Moving icons with the mouse in SoundDiver is done in exactly
the same way as on the desktop of your computer. You can
select and move several icons at once.
Just grab the icon with the mouse and drag it to the desired
spot. It will be automatically placed on the next position by a
“magnetic grid” and the connecting cables will also be adjusted
accordingly. The size of the icons is taken into consideration to
prevent overlapping. Cables are set accordingly.
To move several icons at once, first hold down the mouse
button and drag a rubber band over the icons to select them.
Import New Icons
From time to time, modules are delivered with new icons.
SoundDiver can update the present icons while loading the
preferences. Press ç (: C) while loading the preferences.
Opening a Device Window
You can open the Device window of a device from the Setup
window by first selecting the desired icon (see above) and then
•double-clicking the icon,
•selecting Windows > Open Device or
•pressing R;
X
196
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
You can open the Device windows for several devices at once by selecting the desired
icons and pressing R. In this situation the Window link option of all Device windows
will be disabled, because otherwise all the open windows would end up with the
contents of the most recently opened Device window.
Deinstalling a Device
To remove one or more devices from the setup, click it/them
with the mouse and
•press B or
•select Edit > Clear.
Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting
You can use these two buttons to request or transmit the
memory contents of the selected device(s). These functions
can also be found in the Edit menu. Just click the relevant
button to execute the corresponding function.
Request is represented by a question mark and an arrow pointing
away from the device, Transmit by an exclamation mark and an
arrow pointing to the device.
The functions Request and Transmit in the Setup window act on all the memory loca-
tions of the selected device(s), with the exception of the Edit buffer and ROM data.
5.5 Contextual Menu on
Windows
When you click a device icon with the right mouse button, the
device will be selected, if it wasn’t previously, and a contextual
menu will appear. The following menu items can be selected:
•Open Device: see the section Opening a Device Window on
page 195.
•Request: see the section Request on page 155 and the section
Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting on page 196.
The Device Parameter Box
197
User Manual
Version 3.0
•Transmit: see the section Transmit on page 157 and the
section Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting on page 196.
•Hold Transmission: see the section Hold Transmission on
page 160.
•Clear: see thesection Deinstalling a Device on page 196.
•Open Install: see thesection The Install Window on page 66
and the section Install… on page 211.
•Scan all models: see the section Scan All on page 69 and the
section Scan All Models on page 211.
•Store all edits: see the section Store All Edits on page 212.
•Parameters: see the section Parameters on page 212.
•as Icons: see the section Icons and Lists on page 193 in
Chapter 5 The Setup Window.
•as List: see the section Icons and Lists on page 193 in Chapter
5 The Setup Window.
If you click into an empty area instead, a shorter contextual
menu will appear, which contains functions that are unrelated
to devices.
5.6 The Device Parameter Box
The parameter box in the Setup window contains the individ-
ual device parameters which control the routing and transfer of
SysEx information. You can alter most of these parameters if
necessary.
Some parameters are automatically entered by SoundDiver if they have been
predefined in the modules or adaptations, e.g. the device name or the send pause
time. Other parameters (e.g. Out Port) are automatically entered only if SoundDiver
installed the device using the Scan function.
198
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Hiding and Displaying the Parameter Box
You can hide the parameter box to create free space on the
screen. You may have to do this on computers with small moni-
tors in order to make the special parameter box visible, or to
make more space available for the Setup window;
❏if you click the small triangle in the upper left-hand corner
of the parameter box (left of the device’s name), it will be
vertically shortened which then allows you to see the special
parameters beneath it,
❏if you want to hide or display the entire parameter box, se-
lect View > Parameters in the local menu of the Setup win-
dow. In this case the width of the setup will be adjusted
accordingly.
Name
The name of the device is displayed in the top line of the para-
meter box. SoundDiver automatically enters the name given in
the module or adaptation but you can change it, say if you want
to distinguish between two identical devices. To do this, just
click the name and a text field will appear in which you enter
the new name. Confirm your selection with R.
Out Port and Input
This shows the MIDI output and input ports via which the
computer is connected with the device. When you click these
lines, a flip menu appears in which you select the output or
input from the available options. These options vary according
to what MIDI interface you are using.
The out port and input are set by the Scan function.
With the release of SoundDiver 3.0 the input ports can be
assigned separately. This allows SoundDiver to correctly assign
incoming messages from identical devices, even if they use the
same device ID.
X
The Device Parameter Box
199
User Manual
Version 3.0
If you don’t want an input assigned (i.e. messages are always
processed, no matter on which input they are received), select
the any item from the flip menu. This is also the default setting
for preferences files from older SoundDiver versions.
The selection list is different, if patchbays are used. See the
section Inputs and Outputs Using Patchbays from page 199
onwards.
Issues Particular to Windows
•The output “MIDI Mapper” is not available—it is usually
just a duplicate of an explicit output and is thus superfluous.
•Although output names shown in gray can be selected, they
cannot be used, as they are already in use by another appli-
cation, and can not be opened by SoundDiver. If you want to
use such an output with SoundDiver, you need to make the
output multi-client capable. For details, refer to the section
Multi-client MIDI drivers on page 79.
Issues Particular to the Macintosh
•In OMS mode, the OMS instrument is displayed and can be
edited here.
Inputs and Outputs Using Patchbays
If at least one patchbay supported by SoundDiver is installed
(see the section MIDI Patchbays on page 54), two additional
parameters Connected to and Return to appear.
Connected to
This parameter allows you to determine how the device is
connected to SoundDiver—whether via a patchbay or directly
with the computer.
Click-hold the Connected to line in the parameter box to make a
flip-menu appear for selecting the desired device.
200
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
This parameter is automatically set by the Scan function.
Out Port (of the Patchbay)
If Connected to is set to a patchbay, this parameter lets you select
the output at the patchbay, not at the computer or MIDI inter-
face.
This parameter is automatically set by the Scan function.
Return to
This parameter tells you whether the device’s MIDI Out is
connected directly to the computer or to a patchbay.
This parameter is automatically set by the Scan function.
Input (of the Patchbay)
If “Return to” is set to a patchbay, this parameter shows the
MIDI input of the patchbay. If you click the line a flip menu
appears where you can select one of the inputs. The number of
available inputs depends on the type of patchbay.
This parameter is automatically set by the Scan function.
Bear this in mind: SoundDiver allows you to have several patchbays connected in
series. It is however not possible to have the output of a patchbay directly or indi-
rectly connected to the input of the first patchbay. A warning message will appear if
this is detected.
Here are two examples of cabling: in the first example, the EX5
is directly connected with the computer in both directions by
Emagic’s Unitor8 interface:
The Device Parameter Box
201
User Manual
Version 3.0
Abb. Beispiel Anschluss & Beispiel Ausgang 2
The MIDI In of the EX5 in the second example is connected
to output 2 of an J.L.Cooper Synapse, and the EX5 MIDI Out
directly goes back to the computer’s interface input (Unitor 8,
port 01).
The Scan function can recognize a device if its input is connected to a patchbay and
its output is connected directly to the computer, but not vice versa. In this case you
have to install the device manually.
Device ID
Here is where you select the device’s SysEx identification
number within the MIDI system. This is used to address each
individual device, and also to distinguish between devices of
the same model. We recommend that you always use different
device IDs for similar devices. Refer to the on-line help for
information on where to find the relevant parameters within the
particular device.
202
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
The value range of the available device IDs depends on the
model. Some devices cannot have a device ID which is separate
from the MIDI channel. In this case the Thru channel will not
be available in the parameter box but will always be identical to
the device ID.
Some devices do not even use a device ID, in which case this
parameter will not be available. If you want to address two such
identical devices you have to connect them to different outputs
(either of the computer or patchbay).
This parameter is automatically set by the Scan function.
Thru Channel
If you have activated Options > MIDI Thru, incoming MIDI
events—apart from Program Changes and SysEx data—are
readdressed to the device on this channel. If the Thru channel
field is empty, the data passes through unaltered, i.e., it is not
re-channelized.
This parameter is only ascertained automatically by the Scan function for modules.
With adaptations of devices where the device ID may be different from the Thru
channel (mostly those which have MIDI Multi mode), you have to set the Thru
channel manually.
Preserve Thru-Port/Channel
This option leaves the MIDI port and channel untouched if the
active device is changed.
Use this function when editing effects devices.
Example:
❏first click a sound generator device in the Setup window
whose audio out is routed to the effects device,
❏then click the effects device. As Preserve Thru Port/Ch is en-
abled for the effects device, MIDI Thru and the sequencer
output will still go to the sound generator device
X
The Device Parameter Box
203
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏do some editing in the effects device. You will hear the
sound generator playing.
Velocity
The value is added to (or subtracted from) the velocity of notes
coming from a MIDI Thru or a sequencer note. The range is
from −127 to +127.
This makes it easy to adjust the general volume of a device.
This function is not available in AutoLink mode. In this case, you have to adjust the
Velocity parameter of the matching Logic Instrument.
Timeout
Here is where you determine the time that SoundDiver gives a
device to react. If this time (in milliseconds) is exceeded,
SoundDiver repeats the request several times (the number of
retries is adjustable, see the section Request Retries from page
396 onwards). If there is still no reaction from the device, an
error message appears saying “SysEx Communication Error:
XY didn’t respond”.
SoundDiver sets this parameter to a reasonable value when you install the device.
However, if you consistently receive this error message you can try increasing the
time and see if it improves the communication.
Send Pause
Many devices transmit their data in blocks, even when transfer-
ring the entire contents of a Device window. This parameter
determines the length of time SoundDiver waits between two
such dumps, so that the device has sufficient time to process
the single dumps.
Some devices even need some time to process single parameter
change messages. In this case, SoundDiver pauses as well for
this duration so as not to confuse the device.
204
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
This parameter is also set to a reasonable value when you install the device. However,
if you get a newer operating system for the device which allows faster MIDI transfer,
you may be able to shorten the pause.
Play Delay
If AutoPlay is active, SoundDiver waits a short time after trans-
ferring an entry before sending the test note. This ensures that
the device is ready to play again after receiving the dump, and
will not produce crackling or cut-off notes, because, for exam-
ple, it has not finished initializing the effects section. This is
where you set the required time, in milliseconds as always.
Patchbay Program
If you have connected your device to a patchbay which is not
supported by SoundDiver with its own module, you can still
ensure that SoundDiver always addresses the correct device.
You do this by predefining a program in your patchbay which
SoundDiver automatically calls up whenever the device is
selected. To do this:
❏add the device manually, as the Scan function has probably
not found it automatically
❏set the Out port and Input parameters to the MIDI ports the
patchbay is connected to the computer
❏activate the patchbay program change by clicking the check-
box. Additional parameters will then appear,
❏select a program on your patchbay and set it so that the com-
puter and the device are correctly connected via MIDI in
both directions. The output of the master keyboard should
be “merged” with the input of the computer if the patchbay
has a merge option. You can thereby ensure that the MIDI
Thru is functioning properly. If the patchbay does not have
a merge function you will have to connect the master key-
board to a separate computer input,
The Device Parameter Box
205
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏set the number of the patchbay program next to the activat-
ed checkbox. Pay attention to the numbering of the patch-
bay. SoundDiver numbers the patchbay programs 1…128,
❏under ..Out/Ch select the MIDI Out of the computer to
which the patchbay is connected. To the right of this, enter
the MIDI channel on which the program changes are to be
sent to the patchbay.
❏if your patchbay takes a certain amount of time to reprogram
the inputs and outputs, you can set a pause time in millisec-
onds under ..Delay. After sending the program change,
SoundDiver will then wait this length of time before trans-
mitting any dumps or test notes.
Master Keyboard
If you are using a MIDI patchbay together with the MIDI Thru
function in SoundDiver, it is useful to define one of the
keyboards connected to the patchbay as the master keyboard.
SoundDiver will then automatically divert the MIDI notes
from this keyboard to the synthesizer that you are presently
editing. The patchbays will also be automatically repro-
grammed if necessary. SoundDiver looks after everything!
Of course the master keyboard control only works with patch-
bays that are supported by SoundDiver. With any other patch-
bays the master keyboard button is irrelevant, and you have to
program the patchbay yourself so that the output of the master
keyboard is merged with the computer.
To define a device as the master keyboard, select the device in
the Setup window by clicking it with the mouse and activate
the Master keyboard button in its parameter box. The current
master keyboard is indicated by “hands above the keyboard”.
SoundDiver itself ensures that you don’t mistakenly define
devices without a keyboard as the master keyboard. The only
exceptions to this are adaptations which are intended to be for
both the keyboard and expander versions (e.g. Matrix 6 and
6R).
206
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you want to control your MIDI setup from the master
keyboard, activate Options > MIDI Thru.
The “Master keyboard” feature is only required if your master keyboard is connected
to a patchbay. If it is connected directly to the computer, MIDI Thru will always
forward MIDI data received from the master keyboard to the active device.
Auto Request
If you have activated this function SoundDiver automatically
requests the data of the device every time you start the
program. You can set the number of requested entries using the
following options:
None
nothing is requested;
I
only the internal memory is requested (no cards, no ROM);
I+C
only the internal memory and any available RAM cards are
requested;
I+C+R
everything is requested except the contents of the edit
buffers;
All
everything is requested.
The Auto Request function is useful because it always allows
you to see the device’s current memory contents in the Device
window directly after the program start; however the process
can take a while depending on the device.
Please also refer to the section Save Device Entries in Preferences
File on page 397.
X
The Device Parameter Box
207
User Manual
Version 3.0
Module
This is where you can see the name of the module which is
responsible for the selected device. To get more detailed infor-
mation on the module, click the module name.
For Adaptations, this parameter displays Uni for “Universal
module”
Model
Here is where the name of the model is displayed. As you know,
one module can control several models (e.g. SY77 module:
SY77, TG77, SY99).
For Adaptations, this parameter displays the name of the Adap-
tation.
Version
This shows the software version of the device’s firmware. This
information is only available if you installed the device using
the scan function (and the device provides a way to transfer its
version number via MIDI).
We therefore strongly advise you to always use the scan func-
tion. Many SoundDiver modules can distinguish between the
features of the different software versions and adapt the SysEx
communication accordingly. If on the other hand you install a
device manually, SoundDiver always uses the first software
version. This can sometimes mean that functions which were
added later, or improvements to the operating software will not
be supported by SoundDiver. The result could be considerable
reductions in the efficiency of MIDI transmission.
208
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
5.7 Special Device Parameters
You will find additional settings for
many devices below the device para-
meter box. The corresponding buttons
change with each active device.
Help on Special
Parameters
Click the help button to get more detailed information on the
special parameters for each device.
Special Parameters for Patchbays
The Setup window’s Special Parameter
box shows the patchbay’s inputs and
outputs that are directly or indirectly
connected to the computer. These
parameters are automatically set by the
Scan function.
The first of the patchbay’s active inputs and outputs are used
by the computer when a device wants to communicate via the
patchbay. Each active input and output is of course ignored by
the Scan function.
You can use these buttons to manually install a patchbay or, if
you’ve changed the cabling between the patchbay and the
computer.
Bear this in mind:
•Make sure that at least one input and output are active,
otherwise devices attached to the patchbay won’t be
addressed.
•It stands to reason that these settings must correspond with
the actual cabling.
Special Device Parameters
209
User Manual
Version 3.0
•Changes to the button settings cannot be undone using
“Undo parameter change”.
•When SoundDiver establishes a connection to a device
connected to a patchbay, this is always done with the
patchbay’s first input and output connected to the computer.
It is currently not possible to control a device via a specific
patchbay input or output.
Patchbay Program and Standard Program
In the Setup window’s Parameter box, each device has the
Patchbay Program parameter. This ensures that SoundDiver is
always able to address the device by selecting the appropriate
program in the patchbay (see the section Patchbay Program from
page 204 onwards).
If the device is itself a patchbay, the
parameter is called Standard Prg.
Here, you can enter a Patchbay
Program, called up every time a data
transfer with a device has been
completed.
Normally, a patchbay has a standard
program that’s used with a sequencer.
Its structure is usually:
•Master keyboard → Computer
•Computer → various devices
(depending on the situation several computer outputs can be
connected with the patchbay, each of which is internally
patched with several outputs)
Set the MIDI Program number of this patchbay program in the
Standard Prg parameter. SoundDiver then automatically checks
that this patchbay program is the normally active one. During
communication with a different device (i.e. entries are being
requested or sent) the patchbay is reprogrammed or switched
210
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
(using the device’s Patchbay Prg). The Standard Prg is then
automatically recalled so that sequencer activity is again possi-
ble.
Make sure that you also set the “Out/Ch” and “Delay” parameters correctly (see
section Patchbay Program on page 204).
This automatic switching is even possible while the sequencer is running. This means
for instance that you can try out different sounds in a library using AutoAudition.
If a note gets stuck, it unfortunately means that the patchbay sends no “All Notes
Off” messages before switching, or that the device doesn’t understand “All Notes
Off”. In this case, access the device only with the sequencer stopped.
When a device is being edited, the patchbay’s Default Program remains active. To
ensure parameter changes get to the device, this program should be set in such a
way as to provide a connection from the computer to the edited device.
5.8 Interactive On-line Help
If you have selected a device icon, you can get a help message
on that model by selecting Windows > Help. Because the help
function is interactive, the help display will change as soon as
you select a different icon in the Setup window.
: If no icon is presently selected, selecting the help function
will initially produce a list of all modules and adaptations.
Clicking one of the key words will take you to the relevant
Help page.
X
Local Menus in the Setup Window
211
User Manual
Version 3.0
5.9 Local Menus in the Setup
Window
New
Install…
Use this menu function to install a device manually. For more
detailed information refer to the above section Installing New
Devices Manually on page 191. This menu item is identical with
Windows > Open Install.
Scan All Models
This function initiates the scan operation for installing devices.
For a more detailed explanation refer to the above section Scan-
ning from page 67 onwards.
Load and Transmit File …
This option is also available in the Device window. It acts only
on the entries of the current device. See the section Load and
transmit File… on page 232
Build Library
This function enables you to automatically create a library from
the memory contents of all the selected devices. For more
details refer to section Saving a Sound Bank as a Library on page
286.
Save as…
This menu item works the same way as Create Library, but
saves the created library directly to disk once you have entered
its name and path in the file selector.
X
X
X
212
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Export …
This function is identical to Save as …, however the file is
saved either as a Standard MIDI File or as a SYX/MidiEx file.
See
Save Library for Logic Song
This function is only available in AutoLink mode using Logic
(Macintosh Version 2.5 onwards, Windows Version 4.0
onwards). It allows you to automatically create a library contain-
ing all the entries (including all links) called up by the current
Logic song via Instrument program changes.
If AutoLink is not active, or the Logic version does not yet
support this feature, you will get an error message.
For details, refer to the section Saving Song Data in a Library on
page 369.
Store All Edits
This menu item performs the function “Store” for all edited,
yet unsaved edit buffers in all devices. The entries will be
saved in the appropriate source (memory location in the Device
window or library entry). If there is nothing to store, the menu
item can not be selected.
Also see the section Store on page 320.
View
Parameters
Selecting this menu item enables you to hide or show the
device parameter box. Hiding the device parameter box leaves
all the space in the Setup window free for displaying the icons.
X
X
Automatically Creating a Library
213
User Manual
Version 3.0
As Icons/As List
The contents of the Setup window can be changed from icons
to a list.
The icon view can’t be zoomed.
Windows only: Using a wheel mouse the size of the characters can be zoomed with
the wheel and ç pressed.
5.10 Automatically Creating a
Library
SoundDiver allows you to automatically request the memory
contents of one or more devices and use them to create a library.
You could use this function to create a library from the internal
memory of an EX5, an Access Virus or even your entire setup:
❏select the device(s) whose memory contents are to be stored
in the library by clicking it/them in the Setup window,
❏select one of the sub-menu entries of New > Build library in
the local menu of the Setup window.
If you have not selected any devices when you select this menu function, a dialog
box appears asking you to select whether you want the operation to be carried out
on all the connected devices.
SoundDiver will now automatically create a new library and
copy the desired data into it. Depending on the selected sub-
menu item, certain entries are requested if they are not yet
received. Any entries which are already available are not
requested again. For the meaning of the sub-menu items see
the section Sub Menu on page 287.
You can use this function to make a safety copy of your whole setup with a single
“click”. Don’t forget to save the library!
X
214
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
5.11 Device Selection Strategy
when Sending from a Library
By selecting devices in the MIDI Setup window, you can influ-
ence which device SoundDiver sends data to if there are
several possibilities:
•SoundDiver gives priority to transferring to devices that are
selected in the setup—but only if the option Prefer selected
devices as target in the Options > Settings > Library Prefer-
ences … window is activated (see the section Prefer Selected
Devices as Target on page 408). For example, if you want to
transmit a DX7 voice to an SY77, even if you also have a
DX7 in the setup, select the SY77. The voice will then auto-
matically be converted and sent to the SY77;
•if no device is selected in the MIDI Setup window, the voice
is sent to the device that can process the data without
converting it, in this case the DX7;
•if there are several of these devices, the voice is sent to the
device whose device ID matches that of the entry;
•if a device is selected in the MIDI Setup window which does
not match the entry (e.g. a DX7 for a D-50 sound), the most
suitable of the remaining devices is automatically selected.
•For the last three items, the currently active device (i.e. the
one which is displayed in the Setup window’s Device Param-
eter box) is preferred over the others.
Example: in the setup there is a DX7II, an SY77 and a D-50.
The latter is selected. A TX802 voice would then be sent to the
DX7II, even though the SY77 could also convert the data.
The following table illustrates this strategy:
X
Device Selection Strategy when Sending from a Library
215
User Manual
Version 3.0
Table 4 Device selection strategy
Pass Device is
selected
Module Model Device ID Module /
Adaptation
loaded Device
activematches
1a
a. skipped if option “Prefer selected Devices as target” is deactivat-
ed.
√
2√ √ √ √ √
3√ √ √ √
4√ √ √
5√ √ √ √
6√ √ √
7√ √
8√ √ √ √
9√ √ √
10 √ √
11 √ √ √
12 √ √
13 √
14 √ √
15 √
16 no conditions, only a suitable edit buffer is searched
216
Chapter 5
The Setup Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Device Selection Strategy when Sending from a Library
217
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Device Window
In this chapter you will learn about the Device window. It
displays the contents of the internal memory of a MIDI device
on the screen. The Device window is where you can edit the
various types of entries for your device. You can sort entries,
delete them, copy them from a library into the Device window,
and much more.
The term “entry” is used here and elsewhere in this manual as a generic way of
describing a piece of data. Depending on the device and the type of data, it may be
called a “Sound”, “Program”, “Patch”, “Performance”, “Combi”, “Multi”, “Global
Data”, “System Setting”, “Tuning Table”, “Wavetable” etc.
Chapter 6
218
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
To make sure that everything works properly, SoundDiver has
two important features:
6.1 Data Consistency between
the Device and Device
Window
Many other librarian programs use banks in which the sounds
saved can be completely different from the memory contents of
the device itself. In contrast, with SoundDiver, the contents of
the Device window always matches the data in the connected
device. So the Device window is not a function that is indepen-
dent of the device, but rather a reflection of your device’s
memory.
Important: this principle is only maintained if you edit the
data of your devices in SoundDiver, and not in the device itself.
Copy or delete functions are not transmitted from the device
via MIDI, so SoundDiver cannot recognize them. Therefore,
there is the danger of accidentally overwriting important
sounds. If you do change something within the device itself—
e.g. during a live concert or rehearsal—the next time you start
SoundDiver you should immediately request the altered
version, so that you always see the current state of your device
on the screen. SoundDiver can to this on it’s own, as shown in
the section Auto Request on page 206.
6.2 Entry Dependency
Management
Most modern synthesizers offer “parent entries” (often called
Multis, Combinations or Performances) combining several
sounds. These parent entries access the actual sound memory
locations of the device.
Entry Dependency Management
219
User Manual
Version 3.0
The term “parent entry” (called in other program also “parent patch”) is used here
and elsewhere in this manual as a generic way of describing an entry that is made
up of multiple other component entries. The actual term used by your synthesizer is
very possibly something else, i.e., Multi, Combi, Performance, or Preset.
An entry which is referenced to by a parent entry is called “child entry” (also called
“child patch”).
For example, an EX 5 performance called “Drum&Bass”
might use the programs A24 “Drum” and B36 “Bass”. As soon
as you overwrite both memory locations with new sounds, the
combination program usually becomes useless, because it is
using the wrong sounds.
This is not the case with SoundDiver, thanks to a feature called
“Entry Dependency Management”. This function automati-
cally keeps an eye on which entries are being used by others.
To illustrate, let’s use the above example. If you move the
drums from A24 to B65, SoundDiver automatically alters the
Parent Entry, so that in the future it uses B65. Entry Depen-
dency Management can even cover several levels of the
device—for example the Waldorf MicroWave Program Change
table → Multi → Voice → Wavetable → Wave.
Of course, in practice you don’t need to worry about these
connections, since SoundDiver controls everything automati-
cally in the background.
Bear in mind that these dependencies must be defined in the
adaptations. This occurs with special objects in the editors.
Devices with Individual Edit Buffers
Some multi-mode devices, like the Roland JV-1080/2080, as
well as Waldorf microWave XT, offer separate edit buffers for
all child entries currently used by a parent entry. These edit
buffers are called “Parts” or “Instruments”. When you audition
a parent entry within the Device window, the SoundDiver
modules supporting these devices cause the contents in these
Parts to be updated. The device does this for itself whenever it
receives a dump or program change message which selects a
Performance or Multi.
220
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Now, if you edit such a Part or Instrument, the parent entry’s
link parameter still points to the memory location where the
child entry originated from (you have however changed the
child entry in the meantime). In this case, SoundDiver derives
the correct dependency—that is to the Part, and not to the child
entry’s original memory location, so that you can easily save the
parent entry in a library without the need to store the edited
Parts in the device back to the original child entry memory loca-
tions beforehand.
Also see the section The Edit Buffers on page 291 and the section
Devices with Individual Edit Buffers on page 219.
6.3 The Device Window
You open the Device window of the active device by:
•selecting Windows > Open Device,
•pressing R in the Setup window or double-clicking the
device icon.
SoundDiver will then open a Device window for the active
device. If several devices were selected, a Device window is
opened for each one.
If a Device window was already open in the background, it will be topped. If the
window is already topped, another will be opened.
You can open several Device windows for the same device—for
more information please refer to section Layout of the Device
Window on page 222.
The Link Function
Above the parameter box in the Device window, there is
another button containing three stylized chain links. This
is where you can switch the link function on and off. When the
link function is active, the contents of the Device window are
X
X
The Device Window
221
User Manual
Version 3.0
always based on the active device whose name is displayed in
the title bar.
Example: if you open the Device window for the EX5 while
the link function is active and then select the Virus in the Setup
window, SoundDiver shows the Virus in the same Device
window. So you only need one single Device window for all the
devices.
If there are several Device windows open at the same time, the
link function is automatically switched off.
Buttons for Requesting/Transmitting
The Device window also has the Request/Transmit buttons
that were described earlier in the Buttons for Requesting/Trans-
mitting on page 196 in Chapter 5 The Setup Window.
The Request and Transmit functions in the Device window act only on the currently
selected entries of the corresponding device.
Zoom Functions
The Device window display can
be zoomed.
On the Macintosh, click on the
zoom button in the top-right
corner of the Device window to
get a closer view of the section, or
to display the entries in a larger
typeface.
Select the menu item Windows >
Larger view or Windows >
Smaller view to get the same effect.
With a Microsoft IntelliMouse™ on Windows, you can also
zoom in and out by turning the mouse wheel while holding ç.
X
X
222
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Note: if banks overlap or are too far apart in an adaptation, the adaptation has to
be adapted to the new format. To do this, open the Adaptation Editor. For further
details, refer to the Universal Module Programming Manual.
Layout of the Device Window
The Device window contains several standard elements, a
parameter box and local menus.
With most devices, the contents of the Device window will be
unable to fit on a normal screen. However, as usual you can
move the window section using the scroll bars or the x/y
element.
Another solution is to open several Device window for the same
device and lay these out around the screen. You could use this
method to make space if, for example, you only wanted to see
the left and right parts of the Device window, but not the area
in the middle. Here is an example:
The Device Window
223
User Manual
Version 3.0
Additionally, all data types can be individually shown or
hidden.
There are two ways:
•The buttons on top of the window make types disappear
with a click.
•You can also use the View> Data types > … menu. Check or
uncheck the various types as needed. See Data Types on page
236 in Chapter 6 The Device Window for details.
You can use the screensets (see the section Screensets from page
139 onwards) to preprogram the right display for every situa-
tion.
The Contents of the Device Window
The Device window displays the entire internal memory of the
device—if a device contains preset sounds (ROM), these are
also displayed on the screen so that they can be copied into the
internal memory. However this is not always possible—
depending on the device’s SysEx capabilities.
Banks
The display of the internal memory varies from device to
device and is based on the type and number of the memory
locations. For example, the Yamaha EX5 has 128 internal
performances and four banks with 128 voices. Of course Sound-
Diver also manages the global or drum kit data of this device
and the edit buffers. With the Access Virus you will find 128
Multis and two banks with 128 Singles. In most cases Sound-
Diver can control any data from the device which is supported
by its SysEx implementation.
Some devices do not allow certain banks to be transferred, e.g. the SY77 cannot
receive or send its card voices. Unfortunately, if this is the case you cannot display the
bank.
224
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Entries with Dependencies
Entries shown in bold face are called “child entries” used
(referred to) by at least one “parent entry”, i.e. there is a depen-
dency to bold-printed entries. You should not overwrite such
entries, as otherwise some parent entries might sound differ-
ent.
If the dependency management is switched off, this display feature is switched off
as well. See section Dependency Management on page 399.
Entries Shown in Gray
SoundDiver shows entries in gray instead of black if only their
name, but not their patch data is known. These are either ROM
entries or entries which have been received, but deleted again
in the meantime.
When SoundDiver deletes an entry in the Device window, it still remembers its name.
This allows you to save memory if you only need the names for the name providing
features of AutoLink (see the section The Sound Names in Logic Instruments from
page 362 onwards).
Names of ROM Entries
SoundDiver also receives the ROM entries of a device, displays
them in the Device window and allows you to copy them into
the library.
Abb. ROM-Einträge
Functions in the Device Window
225
User Manual
Version 3.0
ROM entries may be edited (providing there is an Edit Buffer
of the same data type), although they cannot be stored back in
their original location, because this cannot be overwritten. The
names are shown even when SoundDiver does not know their
actual data. If they are requested, however, the actual name is
shown. This may differ from the gray name, if the manufacturer
has stored different ROM sounds in a new version of the
device.
Naturally, you can use a ROM sound as the starting point for
one of your own creations. To do so, simply open it and store it
in a free RAM space. For more details, see the section Store on
page 320.
In case you need only the names of a ROM bank (e.g. to use them in a Logic multi
instrument), you don’t need to request them. The function “Copy” in the Edit menu
copies the names into the clipboard, even if they are only shown in gray. But try the
AutoLink function first, which offers much more facilities (section The Sound Names
in Logic Instruments on page 362).
6.4 Functions in the Device
Window
In the Device window, entries of the same data-type can be
exchanged, copied, deleted etc. Please note that SoundDiver
immediately transmits these alterations to the device, because
the contents of the device must always correspond to the
Device window display.
Before you begin moving or copying entries please make sure
that the Device window reflects the actual memory contents of
the device. If you want to be completely sure, select the device
in the Setup window and select Edit > Request. SoundDiver
will then receive the entire memory contents of the device and
the Device window will definitely be up to date.
X
226
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Selecting Entries in the Device Window
In Selecting Entries on page 141 in Chapter 4 SoundDiver’s User
Interface you read about the selection functions; these also apply
in the Device window. Here is a brief summary:
•To select an entry, click it. Clicking the gray area within the
Device window cancels the selection,
•To select several entries inside a rectangle, use the rubber
band function. Click and hold in the background or in the
numbering column to the left of a bank, and open up the
rectangle.
•To select several entries, click them one after the other while
holding down ç (: S). You can toggle the selection by
clicking while holding down ç (: S) or by holding down
ç (: S) and dragging a rubber band over the entries,
•To select a whole block, click the first entry and then click
the last entry while holding down S (: ç). You can select
several blocks by repeating this operation while also pressing
ç (: S). It does not matter if the blocks contain different
data types;
•to select a column, click the column title (in the above
example labelled “1” to “4”). You can select several columns
if you also hold down ç (: S),
Functions in the Device Window
227
User Manual
Version 3.0
•to select a whole bank, click the black bank title (in the
above example labeled “Internal Patches”). You can select
several banks if you also hold down ç (: S);
•the rubber band function from the Setup window is also
available in the Device window,
•you can use the Edit menu to select all entries at once, or to
toggle the selection;
•to deselect all the entries, click a gray area within the Device
window, or in a numbered column.
Clicking the selection bar of a bank with only one entry is handled as if clicking the
entry itself. Double-clicking the selection bar opens the entry, dragging the selection
bar drags the entry.
Selecting Entries Using Names
You can search for entries in the Device window using the entry
names or run through the entries in alphabetical order.
First, enable Caps Lock. This is done with Y, (the key above
the left S key).
Now just type in the first letter(s) of the entry name. The first
entry whose name begins with the same character(s) will be
selected.
To select the next alphabetical entry, press T; to jump to the
previous one, press ST.
These functions help you target the entries using their names.
SoundDiver still recognizes entries that do not contain any
data, but are still present as names (e.g. deleted entries, that can
be seen in the Device window).
X
228
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Exchanging, Moving and Copying Entries
with the Mouse
Exchanging
To exchange the locations of two entries
within the Device window, grab one entry
with the mouse and drag it onto the other
entry.
The locations will be automatically
exchanged. Of course you can also select several entries and
drag them to another location. SoundDiver will then exchange
the locations of the entries in accordance with their order in the
Device window.
Example: if you drag entries 12, 15, 18 and 32 onto entry 56,
they will be moved in order onto entries 56 to 59 which in turn
will be exchanged with the entries that replaced them.
If you drag entries onto empty locations they will simply be
moved there.
Copying
If you hold down A (: O) during this operation, the target
entry is overwritten instead. This is how you duplicate entries
within the Device window.
Example: if you hold down A (: O) and drag entries 12, 15,
18 and 32 onto entry 56, they will be copied onto locations 56 to
59. Thus, entry 56 contains a duplicate of entry 12, entry 57 one
of 15, 58 of 18 and 59 of 32.
Whenever you drag entries from a Device window into another
window, they are always copied.
Try not to select entries printed in bold face as a destination. These are child entries
and already in use by another entry. See also section Entries with Dependencies on
page 224.
Contextual Menu
229
User Manual
Version 3.0
Using the Edit Menu to Cut, Copy, Paste
and Delete Entries
You can select entries from the Device window and use the
functions of the Edit menu to copy, cut, paste or clear (delete)
them. This also applies to entries from a library. The functions
of the Edit menu are covered in detail in the section The Edit
Menu from page 148 onwards.
SoundDiver keeps all names of deleted entries, even if the data was deleted. The
appropriate entries are shown in gray instead of black (like ROM entries. This is espe-
cially helpful when using Autolink.
Editing Entries
If you double-click an entry in SoundDiver, the Editor opens
instead. For details refer to the chapter Editing with SoundDiver
from page 295 onwards.
6.5 Contextual Menu
When you click an entry with the right mouse button, it is
selected (if not selected already), and a context menu appears.
The following menu items are available:
•Edit: see Edit on page 234 in Chapter 6 The Device Window.
•Audition: see the section Audition on page 233.
•Cut, Copy, Paste: see the section Using the Edit Menu to Cut,
Copy, Paste and Delete Entries on page 229.
•Request: see the section Requesting Entries on page 237
•Transmit: see the section Transmitting Entries on page 238.
•Hold Transmission: see the section Hold Transmission on
page 160.
•Rename: see the section Rename on page 233.
230
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
•Export MIDI File…: see the section Export MIDI File… on
page 146.
•Parameters: see the section Parameters on page 235.
When you click an empty area with the mouse button a shorter
contextual menu appears which contains the only the items
Parameters and Hold Transmission.
6.6 The Device Parameter Box
The device parameter box in the Device window is identical to
the parameter box in the Setup window, except for the lines
uses… or used by. The individual parameters are covered in
detail in the section The Device Parameter Box from page 197
onwards.
The function View > Parameters allows you to switch the para-
meter box’s display off and on.
6.7 Special Functions
Below the parameter box are some
more special functions. If you can’t see
them properly, click the little triangle in
the upper left corner of the parameter
box to collapse it.
With devices that have a card slot for
RAM or ROM cards, you can use the Card button to determine
whether the card data should also be displayed in the Device
window.
Most modules can recognize an inserted card either, during the
Scan function or at any time (e.g. Korg M1), depending on the
MIDI capabilities of the individual device.
The universal module displays up to four card switches.
However, the function depends on the particular adaptation.
X
Interactive On-line Help
231
User Manual
Version 3.0
6.8 Interactive On-line Help
You can call up the interactive help by clicking the Help button
which produces help messages relating to the device parameter
box and the special functions. You can open the complete on-
line Help by selecting Windows > Help. The contents of this
Help window will then depend on the position of the cursor
bar. The help messages contain information on the different
data-types or special functions.
If there is no separate help message for the area concerned, the
display will contain general information.
Example: open the interactive help and position it on the
screen so that you can see the Device window entries. Click the
different areas of the Device window to familiarize yourself
with the interactive help system. If you want to open it as a
floating window, see the section On-line Help on page 171.
6.9 Dependency List
Below the special functions
you will find the dependency
list. It tells you which other
entries are used by the
selected entry and which entries use the selected entry itself. If
no entry or more than one entry is selected, the dependency list
will be empty.
uses… this field displays the names of the entries which are
used by the selected entry. If you select a parent entry (e.g.
performance, multi or combination) the names of the child
entries belonging to it will be shown here.
X
232
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
used by… this field displays
the names of the parent entries
which use the selected entry. If
you select a sound (or patch,
voice, program) you will be
able to see here which parent
entries (multis, performances, combis), if any, it is used in.
If you click a name in the dependency list this entry will then
be selected.
If the data type of the clicked entry is currently hidden, SoundDiver will automatically
show this data type.
The memory location number is shown in the left-hand margin
of each entry. If an entry has no name, its data-type name is
shown instead (e.g. “Program Change Map”). You may have to
adjust the width of the Parameter list to make this number visi-
ble.
When the dependency management is switched off, the dependency list is not
displayed. Also see the section Dependency Management on page 399.
6.10 Local Menus in the Device
Window
Entry
Load and transmit File…
For a description of this function
refer to the section Loading for a
Single Device on page 290 and the
section Load and Transmit File…
on page 288.
X
Local Menus in the Device Window
233
User Manual
Version 3.0
Initialize
You can initialize sounds, performances or other memory loca-
tions in the Device window. This function is equivalent to the
“Initialize”, “Default” or “Voice Init” functions offered by
some devices:
❏select the entries that you want to initialize by clicking
them;
❏select Entry > Initialize—the relevant entries will be initial-
ized and sent to the device.
The initialized entry will be written directly into the relevant memory location. You
can undo the initialization by selecting Edit > Undo.
Rename
You can rename an entry by selecting it and selecting Entry >
Rename. Type the new name in the text input field and then
press R or click outside the input field. The new name will
now be displayed and the entry will be sent to the device.
If you want to rename a whole group of entries in a row, instead of pressing R after
you enter a name just press one of the cursor keys I or M which will make you jump
to the next entry while keeping the text field open.
Renaming can be aborted any time by pressing ™.
The number of characters available for entering the name depends on the device.
Audition
If you want to listen to a selected entry select Entry > Audition.
This causes the data of the entry to be sent to the appropriate
edit buffer, and providing the AutoPlay function is active, the
sound will be played by the test note.
When you use the Audition function please note that none of
the memory contents are overwritten. The only exception to
this is ROM entries which don’t have an edit buffer (e.g. micro-
Wave Waves). In this case the Audition function overwrites a
X
X
X
X
234
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
RAM memory location of the same type, but only after asking
you whether it should.
Please also refer to the section AutoAudition on page 159.
Edit
This menu item copies the entry into an Edit buffer and opens
the Editor window. For details refer to the chapter Editing with
SoundDiver from page 295 onwards.
Build Library
This menu item is identical to its counterpart in the Setup
window, although here it applies only to the active device. It
creates a new library from the entries in the Device window.
Please also refer to the section Build Library from page 211
onwards.
Save as…
This menu item works the same way as Build Library, but saves
the created library directly to disk once you have entered its
name and path in the file selector.
Export…
This menu item works the same way as Save as…, but the file
is saved either as a Standard MIDI File or as a SYX/MidiEx file.
For further details see the section Exporting Files on page 282.
Append to Library
This menu item appends the selected entries to the active (the
most recently selected) library.
This function is especially helpful when you are receiving various banks from a device
(e.g. because you want to convert the contents of several ROM cards or disks into a
SoundDiver library):
X
X
Local Menus in the Device Window
235
User Manual
Version 3.0
View
Parameters
This function determines whether
the parameter box in the Device
window should be displayed. If it is
deactivated, the entire area of the Device window will be avail-
able for displaying the entries.
Link Windows
This function activates the link mode.In this mode the
contents of the Device window are determined by the active
device in the Setup window.
This function is identical using the link symbol—the settings
are synchronized.
You will find an example in the section The Link Function on
page 220
Next Device/Previous Device
These functions let you quickly select devices without opening
the Setup window or creating various screensets. The order of
selection is the same as the one you established in the Setup
window’s list.
Note that as long as you hold down ç (: C), only the title bar
of the newly selected device is updated. As soon as you release
the key the complete window contents are updated. This
allows quick selection in larger setups.
X
X
X
236
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
Data Types
With devices with a
lot of data types
(multis, voices,
effects, pans…) you
can easily get lost
with a little scrolling.
To alleviate this, you
can hide certain or all
groups of parameters.
The content of this
menu item mirrors
the structure of the
device.The picture
shows the menu for a Yamaha SY99.
Select the types you want to see and access.
At the top of the sub-menu, all data types are listed separately.
At the bottom you can Show All or Show None.
If a Device window is completely empty or something is missing, take a look at this
option first, and select Show All.
Select Data Type via Buttons
Display of data types can also be controlled with the buttons on
the top of the window. You will find this feature only with
devices which have more than one data type.
The buttons are sorted starting on the left with All, followed by
a button for every single type. To select more than one type,
click the buttons with S pressed.
X
X
MIDI Functions of the Device Window
237
User Manual
Version 3.0
Special
With some devices, the menu bar of the Device window
contains another special menu with functions geared to that
particular device. For example, with the Korg Wavestation you
get another special menu whose functions are explained in the
on-line Help.
Adaptation
In adaptations’ Device windows, you’ll find another local menu
from which you can edit and save adaptations. More on this can
be found in the chapter The Universal Module from page 379
onwards.
6.11 MIDI Functions of the Device
Window
Requesting Entries
You can instruct SoundDiver to update the selected entries in
the Device window by requesting the relevant data from the
device.
Select one or more entries and select Edit > Request. You can
also click the question mark icon above the device parameter
box. SoundDiver requests the data from the device and
updates the corresponding entries in the window.
This function is especially useful if you have altered the
memory contents of a device on the device itself and Sound-
Diver is therefore no longer completely up-to-date.
X
238
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you want to receive the entire contents of the Device window at once, you should
first select Edit > Select all.
Transmitting Entries
You can transmit the selected entries to the device via MIDI.
Normally this happens automatically, because SoundDiver
works in the background to ensure that there is a constant
synchronization between the contents of the devices and the
contents of the window. If a device is not aware of a change in
SoundDiver (e.g. because it has not been switched on), you can
transmit the entries manually: select Edit > Transmit, or click
the button with the exclamation mark above the device para-
meter box.
If you begin by selecting Edit > Select All, this option will trans-
mit the entire contents of the Device window at once.
These entries are requested
X
X
X
MIDI Functions of the Device Window
239
User Manual
Version 3.0
Warning: unlike the Audition function, the entries are written
directly into the memory locations, and not into an edit buffer.
Requesting the Device Window Contents
at Power-up
You can instruct SoundDiver to automatically request the
memory contents of the installed devices at the start of the
program.
Click-hold to the right of Auto Request in the device parameter
box. A flip menu opens where you can determine which data
you want SoundDiver to request:
none
no entries
I
Internal
I+C
Internal + Card
I+C+R
Internal + Card + ROM
all
entire memory contents (including edit buffers)
SoundDiver will then automatically request the selected
memory contents of the device whenever the program is
started.
Remember that this can take a few minutes, depending on the device, and can
therefore significantly lengthen SoundDiver’s start time, especially with larger MIDI
setups.
You can dispense with this automatic request procedure by
saving the contents of the Device window to disk before you
quit the program. For more details refer to the section Save
Device Entries in Preferences File from page 397 onwards.
240
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
6.12 Saving the Device Window
to Disk
If you want to save the contents of the Device window to hard
disk, you have two options:
•You can instruct SoundDiver to create a library containing all
or part of the Device window, and save this to disk, or
•You can have the contents of the Device windows of all the
installed devices automatically saved when you quit the
program (refer to the section section Save Device Entries in
Preferences File from page 397 onwards).
Saving the Device Window as a Library
A sound bank in the Device window (right) and in the library
To save the contents of the Device window in a library, either
❏select Entry > Build library > Memory locations in the De-
vice window’s local menu or
Saving the Device Window to Disk
241
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏select the device in the Setup window and select Entry >
Build library > Memory locations in the local menu.
SoundDiver then creates a new library containing the complete
memory contents of the device. Only the edit buffers and the
ROM entries are excluded. You can save the new library by
selecting File > Save. You can also immediately select Save as…
instead of Build library.
If you want to save specific entries, select them in the Device
window and select Entry > Build library > Selected entries or
Entry > Save as… > Selected Entries in the Device window.
Reloading the Device Window
If you want to reload the contents of the Device window that
were saved to disk,
❏load the library by either selecting New > Load and transmit
File… in the Setup window or Entry > Load and transmit
File… in the Device window, and select the desired library
in the file selection box.
❏After the entries have been transferred to the Device win-
dow, you will get a safety message asking if you really want
to have them transmitted to the device.
Reloading Part of the Device Window
If you want to reload part of a library into the Device window,
❏open the library by selecting File > Open…and select the de-
sired library in the file selection box,
❏switch off Options > AutoAudition,
❏select the desired entries,
❏select Edit > Transmit.
You can amend the target memory location for each of the
entries in the dialog box which appears. If you want all the
X
X
X
X
X
242
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
entries to go to their original memory locations just click All.
The entries are then automatically sent to the device.
For more details on the library functions refer to the section The
Library from page 245 onwards.
Saving the Device Window Contents
Automatically
By activating the option Save Device Entries in Preferences file in
the preferences (opened by Options > Settings > Global Prefer-
ences), the contents of all installed devices are saved automat-
ically to disk. Using the flip menu, you can additionally select
which entries should be saved automatically. For further details
refer to the section Save Device Entries in Preferences File on page
397.
If only the name of an entry is known, it is saved in the preferences, independent
from the above settings. This way you see the names of the recent entries in the next
session.
6.13 Remote Control Adaptations
Some Adaptations contain only one editor which does not
correspond to a specific edit buffer of any particular device, but
instead allows remote control or display of certain controls. We
call these Adaptations “Remote Control Adaptations”.
As there are no dumps in Remote Control Adaptations which
could be requested or transmitted, the display of a Device
X
Remote Control Adaptations
243
User Manual
Version 3.0
window is not necessary. Therefore, opening the Adaptation
from the Setup window does not open the Device window, but
the Editor window directly, with initialized values. Examples
include the provided “Mixer”, “Monitor” and “Roland
Addresses” Adaptations.
However, there are also “normal” Adaptations which contain
such a remote control editor (e.g. Dynacord DRP-15) in addi-
tion to their other editors. In this case, the Device window is
opened as usual. When opening the “remote control” entry
from the Device window however, it is initialized and opened
without request.
Remote control of SoundDiver has nothing to do with these
remote control adaptations. For more on this see the chapter
Controller Assignments from page 329 onwards.
244
Chapter 6
The Device Window
Emagic
SoundDiver
What Is a SoundDiver Library?
245
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Library
In this chapter you will learn how to use the library in Sound-
Diver to compile sound data banks. These data banks allow you
to find and sort sounds and data in your MIDI system quickly
and effectively.
7.1 What Is a SoundDiver
Library?
A SoundDiver library is a file in which any SysEx data (e.g.
programs, sounds, combinations, multis, effects and other data)
from your MIDI devices can be saved, sorted and displayed
from different perspectives.
The purpose of such a library is to enable you to compile a large
collection of sounds and other data, allowing you to find the
right ones immediately by sorting them using the appropriate
criteria. You can then bring them up on the screen and transmit
them to your MIDI devices.
In this respect, a library is similar to a database which you may
use for filing addresses or book-keeping. In the same way that
an address file will allow you to search through thousands of
addresses and find the ones whose ZIP code begins with 4, you
can search a SoundDiver library, instantly select all the sounds
whose names contain “piano” and send them to the relevant
devices.
Apart from the usual management functions, SoundDiver
libraries offer some remarkable features:
•the size of a library is limited only by the RAM capacity of
your computer. You can decide whether to use a few large
Chapter 7
246
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
libraries or several small ones. For example, a library can
contain thousands of sounds from different synthesizers or
just the contents of a single Device window. Because you can
exchange, copy and import the contents of different
libraries, your collection of data can be compiled to suit your
own requirements.
•SoundDiver allows you to compile mixed libraries. You can
therefore store any data from different devices in a single
library. So-called “Performances” from a Yamaha EX5,
“Multis” from a Yamaha SY99 and “Singles” from an Access
Virus could all be managed in the same library.
7.2 The Library Window
The library window contains three important elements:
•the library
•the parameter box for entries
•the link list
•: and the local menu bar
In the local menu bar you will find functions to help you with
functions like displaying and sorting the library.
The Library Window
247
User Manual
Version 3.0
The library list itself is divided into a title bar which can be
reconfigured, and of course the table of entries. For every entry
there is a list of parameters which may be displayed in the para-
meter box.
Opening and Closing a Library File
You open a library file by selecting File > Open… and selecting
a library file in the dialog box which appears. You can open
several library documents at once and copy entries back and
forth between these libraries.
To close the library file, select File > Close Library. If you have
changed the library at all, a dialog box appears asking you
whether or not you wish to save the altered library.
Refer to the section section The File Menu from page 143
onwards for more details on the management of library files.
Closing a Library window does not close the file itself.
A (: O)-clicking the window’s close box closes all the library’s windows without
closing the library itself.
Opening a Library Window
You can open a Library window by selecting Windows >
Library. You can open several windows for the same library.
The title bar of every Library
window contains the library
name and—from the second
window upwards—a serial
number.
For example; you can bring up
several sections from one library
on the screen, or display the library in different sizes.
X
X
X
248
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Selecting Entries in the Library
In the section Selecting Entries from page 141 onwards you
learned about the selection functions. These also apply in the
library. Here is a brief summary:
•select an entry by clicking it; if you click it again while
holding down ç (: S) the selection will be toggled;
•to select several entries, click them one after the other while
holding down ç (: S);
•to select a block, click the first entry, then while holding
down S (: ç) click the last one;
•you can select blocks
of entries within the
library by clicking in
the narrow column at
the left edge of the
library table and
dragging a “rubber
band” across the
entries while holding
down the mouse
button. The entries
within or touching
the “rubber band”
will be selected. You
can select several
blocks by holding
down ç (: S) as well as after you have selected the first
block,
•By clicking a title entry (see the section Insert Title from page
265 onwards) in the library while holding down A (: O),
all subsequent entries up to the next title entry are selected.
This allows you to select blocks in a library very easily.
•use the Edit menu to select all entries at once, or toggle the
selection;
Click here
X
Mouse Operations in the Library
249
User Manual
Version 3.0
•in the library you can deselect all the entries at once by
clicking in the narrow strip along the left or bottom empty
area of the library table (if the latter is visible).
Selecting Child Entries as Well
In practice you will often want to cut or delete parent entries
from the library along with their constituent child entries. To
save you the effort of having to search through the library for
the child entries, there is a key command you can use so that
when you select a parent entry, the child entries that it uses are
selected as well.
Just click the parent entry while holding down A (: O). The
associated child entries will also be selected and “taken along”
when you cut, move or copy the parent entry.
Whenever you cut or delete a parent entry along with its child entries, SoundDiver
checks whether any of the child entries are used in other parent entries as well. If this
is the case, you will be asked if you really want to delete the child entries. You can
therefore avoid destroying the completeness of any other parent entries.
If you want to copy a parent entry with its component child entries, you simply select
the parent entry. When you copy a parent entry the component child entries are
always “taken along”, regardless of whether they are selected or not. You can
always switch off this feature (see the section Dependency Management on page
399).
7.3 Mouse Operations in the
Library
Apart from the general mouse operations (Mouse on page 128 in
Chapter 4 SoundDiver’s User Interface) the library contains the
following special functions:
•to move one or more entries within the library, select the
desired entries and drag them with the mouse to another
position within the same window. However, if you want to
move the entries into a window of another library, hold down
250
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
A (: O) while dragging, otherwise the entries will be
copied.
•: If you click an entry with C held down, the AutoAudition
setting is toggled. That’s helpful if you have activated
AutoAudition but you now want to select an entry without
transmitting it via MIDI, select it with the right mouse
button.
7.4 Contextual Menu on
Windows
When you click an entry with the right mouse button, this
contextual menu appears. The following menu items are avail-
able:
•Audition: see the section Audition on page 263.
•Edit: see section Edit on page 264.
•Cut: see the section Cut on page 150.
•Copy: see the section Copy on page 151.
•Paste: see the section Paste on page 151.
•Request: see the section Requesting Library Entries on page
267.
•Transmit: see the section Sending Library Entries on page 267.
•Hold Transmission: see the section Hold Transmission on
page 160.
•Store sequence: see the section Store Sequence on page 265.
•Insert title: see the section Insert Title on page 265.
•Insert file…: see the section Insert File on page 266.
•Parameters: see the section Sizing and Hiding the Parameter
Box on page 260.
Managing Libraries on Disk
251
User Manual
Version 3.0
When you click on an empty area with the right mouse button,
a shorter contextual menu appears, which consists only of the
items Paste, Hold Transmission and the last three items.
7.5 Managing Libraries on Disk
You manage libraries on hard disk using the functions of the File
menu, which are covered in detail in section The File Menu from
page 143 onwards.
7.6 Creating a Library
There are several ways to create a library in SoundDiver:
•select File > New to open a new empty Library window in
which to copy entries,
•select one or more devices in the Setup window and then
select New > Build library in the local menu to automatically
generate a library, using the memory contents of the selected
devices.
•Create a new library and import libraries or banks from other
programs. (see the section Insert File on page 266).
C-LAB Polyframe libraries can be loaded into a SoundDiver library using File >
Open…. This allows you to continue using your Polyframe libraries in SoundDiver.
The conversion is automatic and SoundDiver retains the name of the old library.
Polyframe Setup files (with the extension .PS) cannot be directly loaded into Sound-
Diver. Instead, load the Polyframe Setup into the respective Device window and save
the whole Device window as a Polyframe library. SoundDiver can then read this
library.
To import a Polyframe library, first rename it so that its extension is changed from .PL
to .LIB.
: The file type has to be set to EM9F and its creator to EMA6. See the section
Compatibility of the Windows, Macintosh, and Atari Versions on page 83 for details.
X
252
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
All management functions for libraries are described in section
The File Menu from page 143 onwards. Please refer to this
section for more details.
7.7 Automatically Loading a
Library on Start-up
If you are working in SoundDiver with one or more standard
libraries, there’s no need to define special Autoload libraries.
When you quit the program, SoundDiver remembers which
libraries were open, and opens them again the next time the
program is started. SoundDiver will be in exactly the same
mode as it was when you were last working within it.
If your starting point is always the same library, you can rename
it Autoload (Macintosh) or AUTOLOAD.LIB (Windows) and, if
necessary, move it to the Libraries folder. It will then be auto-
matically loaded on start-up.
7.8 The Layout of the Library
Table
You are free to determine the look of the Library window. Using
the mouse, you can determine the width of the parameter box,
the relative widths of the library columns and the size of the
display.
Taking advantage of the screensets, you can pre-define the various layouts of a
Library window and switch between them as required. For more on the definition of
screensets, please see section Screensets from page 139 onwards.
The library is displayed in the form of a table. The entries are
arranged vertically, and can be sorted as you wish (See the
section Sort Functions on page 255 for details).
The Layout of the Library Table
253
User Manual
Version 3.0
The title bar contains all sorts of functions for determining the
layout of the Library window. You can alter the order of the
columns, switch out individual columns or alter their widths.
Number
Each entry has a numbered position in the library. This number
has nothing to do with the memory position of the entry in a
Device window, but simply defines where the entry is in the
library. This is the reason why you cannot sort by number in the
library.
Altering the Order of the Columns
To change a column’s position in the list, click-hold the desired
column heading in the title bar: the mouse arrow becomes a
hand. Drag the title field to the column’s desired position and
release the mouse button. The column will be inserted there
and all other columns will be moved correspondingly to the
right.
Altering the Widths of the Columns
To alter the
width of a
column, move
the mouse
cursor to the right end of the column’s title: the mouse cursor
becomes a double-arrow. Drag the column’s border to the
desired position and release the mouse button.
If you hold S during this operation, the next column’s width
will alter correspondingly so that what you are changing is the
border between the two. This function does not effect any of
the other columns.
To make a column disappear, drag its right border as far as
possible to the left.
254
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
The View Menu
The local View menu is where you can hide/show the columns.
Disabling a column in this menu is equivalent to setting its
width to its minimum value. Enabling a column sets it to a
width of 100 pixels: you are free to change this width using the
dragging method described above.
To enable and disable columns, simply select them in the
menu: the check mark shows their status.
It’s also possible to use the menu items Show All and Show
None to determine the display of the entire table.
Example: there’s a whole range of columns visible, but you
want to see the names and dates only. The simplest way is to
use Show None followed by Show Name and Show Date, rather
than disabling each column individually.
Size of Text
The zoom gadget can enlarge (lower half) or reduce
(upper half) the font size.
With Windows > Larger view and Smaller view
you can select the font size for a library window.
On Windows with the Microsoft IntelliMouse™ this can also be
done by turning the wheel while holding down ç.
: You use the little telescope symbol in the
Library window’s upper right-hand corner to
select the size of the text in the window. Click
the left half of the zoom box to select a smaller
size, and the right half to select a bigger one.
Select a small text size if you want to view as many entries at a
time as possible. Bear in mind this makes them harder to read.
You can also make use of the screensets (see the section Screensets on page 139) to
store your favorite displays and switch between them.
X
Zoom box
Sort Functions
255
User Manual
Version 3.0
7.9 Sort Functions
A library’s entries can be sorted at any time by using Sound-
Diver’s range of simple and handy sort functions. It’s possible
to sort according to most of the entry parameters, whether or
not those parameters are currently being displayed.
A sort routine can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo as long as
this is done directly after the sort.
SoundDiver can manage up to three sort levels, which are also
stored in the library file. If you sort a library, the previous three
sorting orders are memorized. A description with examples is
shown in the section Sort Levels on page 258.
The sort functions are only available for the entire library,
although a library can be divided into zones. This means that if
you do a sort in one Library window, this will affect all other
windows opened for the same library.
Sorting within the Title Bar
There’s a quick way of resorting the library: double-click the
parameter in the title bar corresponding to the way you want
the display to be sorted. This immediately sorts the display, and
if AutoSort (section The Sort Menu on page 255) is enabled, the
appropriate parameters will also appear underlined in the title
bar.
The Sort Menu
The Library window’s local Sort menu lets you select a sort
criteria: the library is sorted as you select the menu contents.
The Sort menu has one advantage over and above the title bar
method of sorting, in that you can sort according to parameters
that are not currently visible in the title bar.
X
256
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Sort by Name
The entries are sorted alphabetically according to their names.
This allows you to quickly find, say, all sounds beginning with
“Strings”, no matter what their device.
Sort by Module
The entries are sorted alphabetically according to their module.
This allows you to have a library display in which the entries are
divided up into blocks determined by their respective devices.
Sort by Model
The entries are sorted alphabetically according to their model.
The result of this sort is independent of the “module” criteria
(e.g. “SD-1”, “SY77”, “VFX”).
Sort by Device ID
The entries are sorted by their device ID. If you are not familiar
with this, take a look at the section Device ID on page 201.
If you have more than one device of the same kind in your
setup, it’s easy to find entries in a certain device. Sort first by
ID, then by entry name.
Sort by Data Type
The entries are sorted alphabetically according to their data
type.
Example: in the table, EX5 Performances appear first, then
EX5 Preset Voices, finally SY99 Voices.
Sort by Location
The entries are sorted by ascending order according to their
storage location in your device.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sort Functions
257
User Manual
Version 3.0
Sort by Size
The entries are sorted in ascending order according to their size
in bytes.
Sort by Date
The entries are sorted in ascending order according to their
date of creation. The earliest entries appear at the start, and the
latest at the end of the table.
The library dates and times are shown in the local language’s
format. It can be adjusted with the “Date & Time” control
panel (Macintosh) or “International” control panel (Windows).
Sort by Comment
The entries are sorted alphabetically according to their
comments. Giving a range of entries comments such as
“Piano”, “Strings” or even “Studio” or “Live Set 07.07.2001”
means they can immediately be found on demand.
Auto (AutoSort)
The entries are sorted according to last-selected sort criteria if
anything was changed. Automatic sorting makes it easy to keep
repeating the same sort after insert or cut operations.
To activate AutoSort, select Sort > Auto.
When AutoSort is active, the positions of the insert cursor or the target position for
mouse operations are irrelevant. The only exception is if the library is divided into
zones by title entries.
Undoing Sorts
Edit > Undo reverses the effects of the last sort, and allows you to
toggle between the original and the last sort.
X
X
X
X
X
258
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Sorting a Zoned Library
Inserting a title entry allows libraries to be subdivided into
zones; this can be used for grouping sound banks, sounds for
specific live sets, etc. This makes more sense than creating a
new library for each grouping as sort and searches need only to
be done once.
Seethe section Insert Title on page 265 for how to insert a title
entry.
SoundDiver takes zones into account when sorting, and sorts
them individually. This retains the relationship of the entries to
their zones.
Sorting recommences at each new title entry
Sort Levels
SoundDiver remembers the three last sort operations, and
retains the results. With this feature you can sort within a group
of entries with an identical criteria.
Example: Your library is sorted by date and you’re looking for a
certain performance on the EX5.
Sort first by name, then by module and at last by data type.
Look at the section EX5 performances, which is now sorted in
alphabetic order.
After the sort by name, SoundDiver has listed the entries by
module (you find all entries within the single devices sorted in
alphabetic order). Now we have sorted by data type, so that it’s
The Parameter Box for Entries
259
User Manual
Version 3.0
easy to find the section of performances and our desired perfor-
mance by it’s name.
7.10 The Parameter Box for
Entries
Each entry—no matter whether sound, effects program or
multi—is saved with a range of parameters which help in the
sorting and organizing. Some of these can be edited, such as the
name of an entry.
Whenever you select an entry, you see its parameters in the
box.
The parameter box’s display always relates to the selected
entries. If a particular parameter has different values among the
selected entries, an asterisk (*) will be displayed instead of a
value.
You can edit some of the parameters in the box. Editing will
always effect all of the selected entries.
Adding Text to Multiple Entries
With this function identical text can be added to the names,
comments or locations of more than one entry at the same time,
without deleting the current text.
❏First select all entries that are to be changed.
❏Click on the parameter (e.g. name).
❏Enter an asterisk (*) first, followed by the common text.
❏Close the text field with R.
260
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Sizing and Hiding the Parameter Box
The parameter box can be reduced in size by clicking the trian-
gle in the upper left of the parameter box. Selecting View >
Parameters allows you to switch the parameter box on/off.
Name
This line displays “No selection” if no entry is selected. If just
one entry is selected, it’s name is displayed here.
If more than one entry is selected, the total number of selec-
tions is given, e.g. “35 selected”.
Clicking on the name line makes a text field open for renaming
the entry. If more than one entry is selected, any alphanumeric
input will affect all of them. The name of the first entry appears
in the text field as a default.
To be able to edit the names of several entries one after the
other, select the first entry, open the text field, type in the
name, then move around the list using the cursor keys M and I
to get to the next entry. The text field will remain open and
doesn’t need to be reopened each time.
You can use these two features to give all selected entries an additional identity. You
can finish by giving each entry its own name.
If you want to add some letters or words to entries, take a look at the section Adding
Text to Multiple Entries on page 259.
If you want to exit the field without making any changes, press ™.
Module
This line displays the module that created this entry. Clicking
on this line produces an information window giving more
details on this particular module.
X
The Parameter Box for Entries
261
User Manual
Version 3.0
Model
This line displays the model that created this entry. It cannot
be edited.
A module can include several different models. For this reason, the model display
serves to differentiate more precisely between the various devices that are served by
the one module.
Device ID
This line displays the MIDI device ID of the device that
created this entry. Broadly speaking, this is an identity number
for SysEx data, allowing devices of the same model-type to be
separately identified within a MIDI system. So, if you are audi-
tioning a selection of entries to several identical devices (e.g. a
TX816 containing eight DX7 modules), the device ID allows
you to see to which device the current entry is being sent.
Example: if there are two EX5Rs in your MIDI system, the
device ID differentiates between them.
Data Type
This line displays the data type of the library entry. It tells you
whether the entry is a sound or a multi of an effects program.
Example: the Yamaha EX5 contains “Voices” and “Perfor-
mance” data types; the Yamaha SY99 has “Voice”, “Multi”,
“Synth Setup”, “Pan”, “Microtuning” and “Seq Setup” data
types.
This parameter is not editable.
262
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Location
SoundDiver immedi-
ately notes the Device
window location of an
entry (sound,
program) when it was
copied into the library.
This location appears
in the library and is
always included in all operations within SoundDiver.
When a library entry which is to be transmitted has no location statement, Sound-
Diver uses a special strategy in order to guess the desired destination. See the section
Default Destination Location on page 267.
If you want to add some letters or words to the location, take a look at the section
Adding Text to Multiple Entries on page 259.
Date
This shows the date of the entry’s creation. If you double-click
the line, you can enter the date with the computer keyboard.
When entering the values, use non-numerical characters to divide the year, month
and day.
Time
This shows the time of the entry’s creation. Editing is carried
out in the same way as the date. Odd-numbered seconds are
not supported.
Size
This line displays the entry’s size in bytes. This size is not iden-
tical to the length of the actual SysEx message, as the modules
optimize the amount of data by leaving out any parameter
groups not being used.
Local Library Menu
263
User Manual
Version 3.0
Comment
Each entry can be given its own line of comment. As you can
sort according to comments, groups can be created if their
respective entries are given identical comments. To give
several entries the same comment, select them all and click the
comment line, a text field opens in which you can enter the
text.
Giving entries that belong together the same comment (e.g. Piano, Strings, Solo)
allows them to be quickly found again or sorted in the library.
If you want to add some letters or word to the location, take a look at the section
Adding Text to Multiple Entries on page 259.
The Dependency List
The dependency list is described in the section Entry Depen-
dency Management on page 218. It functions the same in the
Library window, except that the memory location number is
not shown.
7.11 Local Library Menu
The local Library menu allows you to
send selected entries to the edit buffers
for checking, playing a test sequence,
inserting subtitles into the library or
loading libraries that are on disk into the
current library.
Audition
Selecting this menu item sends the selected entries to the edit
buffers of the appropriate devices for auditioning.
As the entries are sent to edit buffers only, there is no danger
that the AutoAudition operation will mistakenly over-write
memory contents. The one exception is the sending of data for
X
264
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
which a device has no edit buffer. However, this is always
preceded by a warning.
If an entry is a parent entry, i.e. it has child entries which belong
to it—such as several Sounds belonging to a Multi—Sound-
Diver asks you in a dialog box whether these should be sent as
well. If you select “All”, the parent entry and the child entries
are transmitted.
To permanently store the selected entries in the device, just copy them to the Device
window by dragging them across to the corresponding target position of a Device
window or selecting Edit > Transmit.
Devices with Individual Edit Buffers
Some devices, like the ones with multi mode from Roland (D-
70, JV-80/90/1000, JV-1080, U-20/220, XP-50/80) as well as the
Waldorf MicroWave, offer separate edit buffers for the child
entries used by a parent entry. SoundDiver can take advantage
of this: when you Audition a parent entry (e.g. Performance or
Multi), and some of the linked child entries (e.g. Patches or
Sounds) do not yet exist in the device, they are not transferred
to a memory location, as is usual for Transmit. but to the edit
buffer representing the appropriate “Part”. The device then
uses the data it finds in the part, even if the link in the parent
entry might point to a completely different child entry in the
device’s memory. This way, you can easily audition a parent
entry residing in a library, without the need to overwrite
memory locations in the device.
Also see the section Devices with Individual Edit Buffers on page
219 and the section Multiple Edit Buffers on page 314.
Edit
Library > Edit opens the Editor window of the entry.
If a Device window was already open in the background, it will
initially be topped. If the window was already topped another
will be opened.
X
X
Local Library Menu
265
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Editor window can be opened by a double click on an entry or by pressing R.
Store Sequence
The test sequence recorded in SoundDiver’s mini-sequencer is
assigned to the selected entries, allowing each entry to have its
own suitable auditioning sequence, such as a chord for string
sounds and a melody for solo sounds. To have this sequence
play, activate the options AutoPlay and AutoAudition.
Entries which contain a sequence show an asterisk (*) in the
Sequence column.
This operation is not available if you are using SoundDiver
within AutoLink, as this automatically disables the internal
sequencer.
This operation over-writes an existing sequence that’s already been assigned to the
entry without warning.
Delete Sequence
The stored sequence is deleted for all selected entries. All
asterisks (*) are erased.
Insert Title
This function lets you insert text at any location within the
library. Select the entry above which the text is to be inserted
and select Library > Insert title. This opens a text field for you
X
X
X
266
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
to type into. If you need several lines of text, you may select the
menu item as many times as you like in a row.
The text can be later edited by first clicking on it in the Library
window, then clicking on the text line in the parameter box, or
you simply double-click on the title.
Important: these titles subdivide a library into zones—e.g.
“Stage sounds”, “Studio sounds”, “SY99 working sounds” and
so on.
To get rid of a title, select it and choose Edit > Delete.
You can select all the title entries in a library with the aid of the find function. Acti-
vate “More Options”, and use “The data type” “is” “Title” and “Select all”. If you
need to find out how to operate the find function, please refer to the section The
Find Function on page 268.
The zones are recognized by the sort routines, in that the rela-
tionship between title and entries remains safeguarded. Sound-
Diver will always sort entries within each zone individually.
Insert File
You can insert a library or imported file from floppy or hard disk
into a SoundDiver library. This would allow you to make one
big library out of several small ones. Insert file… is similar to
Import … in the File menu, except that it doesn’t create a new
library document.
Select the entry before the new library is to be inserted and
select Insert file…. Now select the desired library from the
selection box that appears. If this library is “foreign” (Poly-
frame, X-alyzer, Synthworks, etc.) it is automatically converted.
You’ll find more details in the section Importing Polyframe
Libraries on page 275.
This operation automatically inserts a subtitle before the new library, giving the name
of the file. You are free to delete this title afterwards.
It is possible to use a Find function to look for title entries, by selecting “more
options” and selecting criteria “The data-type” “is” “Title”. The search functions are
explained in the section The Find Function from page 268 onwards.
X
X
Requesting Library Entries
267
User Manual
Version 3.0
7.12 Requesting Library Entries
If you select Edit > Request, this requests the internal memo-
ries of all the devices selected in the Setup window and inserts
them in the library. (see the section section Request from page
155 onwards)
7.13 Sending Library Entries
If you select the desired entries first and select Edit > Transmit,
this sends the data to the devices whose IDs agree with those of
the entries being sent. So, if you want to send eight DX7 voices
to the eight modules in a TX816, you can use the device IDs to
determine which voice goes to which expander.
For details regarding the converting of data between related
devices (such as the DX7 and SY77), please see the section
section Device Selection Strategy when Sending from a Library from
page 214 onwards.
Default Destination Location
When you transmit a library entry to a device with the menu
item Transmit, SoundDiver uses the Location statement as a
default destination value. When the safety message “Overwrit-
ing memory entries” is activated (see the section Overwriting
Memory Entries on page 405), a dialog will appear which allows
you to manipulate this default destination. Generally, you just
have to confirm with R.
If there is no location statement in the library entry, Sound-
Diver suggests the most suitable memory location to you:
•If an equivalent entry already exists in the Device window
(i.e. it is identical concerning the data—the names are not
compared), this entry is used as a target. In this case, no
safety message appears. Otherwise, the next entry is
suggested which has the following properties in descending
priority:
X
X
268
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
•unknown and not used by other entries (not a child entry)
•known and not used by other entries (not a child entry)
•unknown
•known
This means that you can transmit an entire library without the
need to adjust the destination positions manually, even if the
library contains dependencies, but no location statements.
You can also easily fill up banks with sounds without overwrit-
ing already used locations. Simply select the desired entries in
the library and select Edit > Transmit. SoundDiver now auto-
matically writes them into locations which are not yet used by
other entries.
7.14 The Find Function
One of SoundDiver’s most powerful features is the Find func-
tion; it allows you to conduct a targeted search for an entry
through a zone within a library, a whole library or your whole
MIDI system. This function is of particular use in the studio,
where you often need to find a specific sound or a range of suit-
able sounds from within a large collection. Here are a few prac-
tical examples:
•Looking for all the string sounds within a group of selected
entries
•Looking for a sound called “SuperBass” within all the
opened libraries
•Looking for all the sounds that were created before
07.07.2001
•Looking for all the EX5 sounds in a library
Searching makes sense only if a library is present—so the menu
item and the key commands Edit > Find… and Edit > Find again
are only available when a libray is loaded.
The Find Function
269
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver can conduct simple searches according to names or
syllables, but can also make use of more complex criteria.
The Find windows looks different in the Macintosh and
Windows versions. You will therefore find pictures of both in
the following section.
Opening the Find Window
Select Edit > Find….
Macintosh
Windows
Important: the Find window is a real window, not a dialog box.
The advantage is that it remains open during the Find opera-
tion to allow you to improve or change the Find criteria. You can
even position the library and Find windows on the screen in
such a way that you can see them both at the same time. The
window positions and the Find criteria you have defined are
stored by SoundDiver when you quit the program.
X
270
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
A Simple Find Operation
When you first open the Find window, all it contains is a text
field and the buttons More options and Find. In this mode you
can find entries by name or part of a name. The case of charac-
ters is ignored.
If you are looking for a character string at the beginning of a
name in a library, you don’t even need to open the Find
window: the Library window offers a quick method like the one
you have already come across in the Device window, as follows:
❏First enable Caps Lock by pressing the Y key (the one
above the left S key).
❏Simply type in the first character(s) of the desired entry’s
name. SoundDiver immediately finds the first entry whose
name begins with the characters you have typed.
❏Use of T allows you to jump to the next entry alphabetical-
ly; TS jumps to the previous one.
Starting the Find Operation
Enter the desired text and click Find.
The search for names that contain those characters now starts in
the active library, beginning from the selected entry.
The first entry to be found is selected. If AutoAudition and/or
AutoPlay are active, the entry is immediately sent and/or audi-
tioned.
If no name is found, a dialog box opens.
Repeating the Find
After the first Find, the Find button becomes Find again. Click-
ing it continues the operation for the next name. You can also
select Edit > Find again.
X
X
The Find Function
271
User Manual
Version 3.0
If you make use of the key or menu commands, you are able to close the Find
window to save screen space.
More Options
If you require more sophisticated Find criteria, click the Find
window’s More options button. The Find window expands to
display a range of flip menus that are used to define more
complex Find criteria.
:
Windows:
What
This flip menu allows you to define the main parameter that
will be used as a Find criteria. You can define the entry’s name,
model, data type, date, size, comment, location and “data” (see
the next section).
What How Value to be found
A selection of the entries found
What How Value to be found
A selection of the entries found
272
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Special Issues with the Criterion “Data”
This option appears nowhere else but in the Find window: it
tells SoundDiver to compare the entry’s SysEx data. This
allows you to find similar sounding sounds if a name search
produces nothing useful.
This function cannot guarantee that the sounds it finds will be similar. If you alter a
synth sound’s basic wave form, it will sound completely different, though the corre-
sponding SysEx parameter may have hardly changed.
It makes sense to use the “Data” operation in situations where
you have created several variations (envelopes, filter) of the
same sound, and now wish to delete those variations.
Warning: never use “Data” with “Keep first, delete rest” as
this might delete entries you wanted to keep.
How
This flip menu contains the conditions that the “What” Find
criteria must match for the entry to be found. The contents of
the flip menu refer to the criteria selected under “What”.
Table 5 “How”-conditions
Condition Description
contains contains the text entered
does not contain does not contain the text entered
begins with begins with the text entered
ends with (not date, size,
contents)
ends with the text entered
is exactly matches the text entered
is not does not match the text entered
is before (date only) was created before the date entered
is after (date only) was created after the date entered
is less than (size only) size is smaller than value entered
is greater than (size only) size is greater than value entered
The Find Function
273
User Manual
Version 3.0
Comparison Criteria
The next four criteria do not search for a given example, but
each compares two entries taken as a pair. This allows you to
find, say, all sounds that have similar names.
The Find Value
Depending on the contents of the first two fields, a text field
appears (e.g. for names or comments) or a numerical field (for
date or size inputs).
Selection of the Entries Found
This additional flip menu allows you to define what Sound-
Diver does with the entries it finds:
Table 6 Examples
What How Value Finds Examples
The name contains bas all entries whose names con-
tain the syllable “bas”
Bass, BasicPad
The name begins with DX all entries whose names
begin with DX
DX Rhodes, DX
Bass, DX7Pno
The name is Congas all entries whose names are
exactly “Congas”
Congas
The model is not 01/W all entries that are not from a
01/W
The size is greater than 345 all entries whose sizes are
more than 345 bytes
Table 7 Comparison criteria
Condition Description
is equal to selection selects an entry that is identical with one of the selected entries
is similar to selection selects an entry that is similar to one of the selected entries
is equal in pairs selects two identical entries
is similar in pairs selects two similar entries
274
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Select One
This deselects all previous entries, selects the first entry found
and moves the window section correspondingly to show it. If
AutoAudition is active, the entry is also sent to its device.
If no window is open for the current library, one will open auto-
matically. Find again only makes sense here if you don’t change
the Find conditions.
Select All
This selects all the entries found and deselects all previous
entries.
Add to Selection
Those entries found are selected in addition to entries already
selected (“logical OR”).
Select in Selection
The search is conducted within the selection only. Only those
entries found remain selected; all others are deselected (“logi-
cal AND”).
Keep First, Delete Rest
This option exists only in conjunction with the comparison
criteria (see section Comparison Criteria on page 273). If an entry
is identical with, or similar to, one or more other entries, the first
one found is kept and the others are marked as being ready for
deletion by being showed “dimmed” (in gray).
The actual deletion takes place after the search operation is
over, and only after you have responded to a warning prompt.
This function is particularly suitable when used in combination with “Search in all
documents” and “The Data” “is equal in pairs”. The result then corresponds to the
deletion of duplicates that might be spread across more than one library.
Importing from Other Programs
275
User Manual
Version 3.0
Search in All Documents
Activating this option conducts searches through all open
libraries. When used with comparison criteria (see the section
Comparison Criteria on page 273) each entry in each library is
compared with each entry in each of the other open libraries.
Less Options
Click this button if all you want to do is search by name and
don’t need the extra options.
Find
Click this button to start the search. After the first entry has
been found the button’s caption changes to Find again. Click it
or press R to initiate the next Find.
The menu item Edit > Find again … allows you to Find again even if the Find
window is closed.
7.15 Importing from Other
Programs
SoundDiver is capable of loading other programs’ files and
converting them into SoundDiver libraries. This import func-
tion offers a range of options that make it easy to import files.
Selecting File > Import… opens a file selection box. Confirm
your selection and SoundDiver will attempt to load it.
Importing Polyframe Libraries
When you import Polyframe libraries all the data is converted
into the SoundDiver format. The only thing lacking is the link
information because this is not available in a Polyframe library.
You can generate links by copying the desired entries into a
X
X
276
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Device window and copying them from there into a new library
(see the New menu item).
To make SoundDiver on Windows see Polyframe libraries,
change their file name extension from PL to LIB.
: To make SoundDiver see Polyframe libraries, make them
have the same file type as SoundDiver libraries. You can
achieve this by assigning the file suffix PL to the file type EM9F
in the “File Exchange” control panel which is part of Mac OS—
however you can also use similar third party products.
Open the “File Exchange” control panel, click the “Add…”
button, select the SoundDiver application file, enter “PL” in
the text field at the top and select the SoundDiver library icon
at the bottom. You can now insert an Atari floppy disk contain-
ing a Polyframe library, and it can be immediately loaded by
SoundDiver.
Importing Standard MIDI Files
Standard MIDI Files (SMF) can be written by most MIDI
programs. SoundDiver can import Standard MIDI Files,
containing SysEx dumps and either send them to the relevant
device or convert them into a library.
Conditions for the File
SoundDiver is able to read all MIDI File formats (0, 1, 2) and is
therefore compatible with any sequencer, editor or other MIDI
software that can create MIDI Files. All the sequences within a
MIDI File are evaluated.
Standard MIDI Files use the .MID file extension.
: Usually you will find this extension on the Macintosh too,
although file name extensions are not common. The file type
must be either “Midi”, or the file type must be “????”, “BINA”,
“MDOS”, “mdos”, “pBIN” or “TEXT”, and the file must have the
extension .MID. The “Creator” is irrelevant. (“MDOS” and
“mdos” are the file types which are used by PC Exchange by
Importing from Other Programs
277
User Manual
Version 3.0
default.) Also see the section Converting Files between the three
Platforms on page 83.
You can import SMF files either by selecting File > Open… or
File > Import… or by selecting Load and transmit file… from
the Setup or Device window.
: You can also drag the SMF file icon onto the SoundDiver
icon.
How the Import Function Works
Imported SMF files simulate incoming MIDI messages, so that
the loaded data ends up in the relevant Device windows. It is
therefore imperative that a device is present in the SoundDiver
setup for which the accompanying module or adaptation can
process dumps in the Standard MIDI File format.
The device ID is irrelevant however—it is not taken into
account while importing files. This is very helpful when you
have a file and you don’t know which device ID was used when
the file was created.
If you have several devices in the setup which can process messages in the file, you
should first select the desired destination device in order to prefer it. SoundDiver
always tries to assign incoming MIDI data to the active device first, then to all others.
As imported SMF/SYX files are internally handled like incoming MIDI, this preference
technique works here as well.
Standard MIDI files which contain data from several different
devices can be imported by SoundDiver in one operation.
When data has been found for a specific device while import-
ing, the device’s Device window is opened so that you can
monitor the imported data immediately.
After an SMF has been imported, you will either get a message
that no data was recognized, or you get the following message,
X
278
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Abort
The imported entries remain in the Device window but
nothing else happens. Warning: this will probably give rise
to an inconsistency with the data in your MIDI devices.
Library
The imported entries are placed in a new library. You can
then save it.
Transmit
The imported entries are sent to the devices.
After moving imported entries into a library, the previous entries reappear in the
Device window. You don’t need to re-request the Device window contents after such
an import operation. However, if you selected “Abort” or “Transmit”, you can undo
the import: the menu item Edit > Undo is then named Undo Import.
Import of Files with Several Dumps for the Same
Entries
If an SMF file contains several dumps for the same banks or
entries, the following dialog appears:
Abort
The already imported entries remain in the Device win-
dow, the rest of the imported file is ignored.
Importing from Other Programs
279
User Manual
Version 3.0
Skip
All entries recognized as doubles are skipped. The remain-
ing file is imported, except for duplicates.
New version
All entries recognized as duplicates are loaded and will
overwrite previously loaded entries.
Library
All previously imported and all yet to be imported entries
are moved into a new library, or appended to it. Afterwards
you can save the library. The message “Do you want to
transmit the loaded entries or move them into a library?” is
omitted, to be consistent.
The latter option allows you to import huge amounts of data
from different programs if they can save their data as Standard
MIDI Files. Opcode’s Galaxy™ for example uses the “MIDI
File Capture” function for this:
❏Select the menu item “Start MIDI File Capture…” from the
Play menu
❏Open library, bundle and bank files to your heart’s content
and transmit their entire contents.
❏Select the menu item “Save MIDI File…” from the Play
menu.
❏Quit Galaxy™
❏Start SoundDiver and select the desired devices in the setup
window
❏Import the Standard MIDI File in SoundDiver. When the
above dialog appears, select “Library”.
Import from a Song File
You are even able to extract sounds from a sequencer song
saved as a Standard MIDI File. As an example: you are working
on a production that was created by someone else. The creator
of the file has sent you the song as a MIDI File disk. The song
280
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
also contains the sounds of the instruments used. You can use
the import function to load the song file into SoundDiver and
send the sounds direct to the relevant keyboards. The remain-
ing data is ignored.
Unrecognized Dumps
If the file to be imported contains SysEx dumps which cannot
be processed by any of the devices installed in the Setup, you
get the following message:
Abort
Aborts the file import.
Install
Opens the Install window. You can now install the suitable
device. Afterwards, retry the file import.
Generic SysEx
Installs the Adaptation “Generic SysEx” and repeats the
file import. This Adaptation can process any kind of SysEx
messages.
Some devices provide a so-called “Bulk Dump” (or “All Dump”) which is the
contents of several banks of different data types in one single SysEx message. This
type of message is often not supported by the SoundDiver modules or adaptations.
If you import a file which contains such a bulk dump message, you will get the above
message, although the appropriate device is already installed in the Setup window.
In this case, you should first import the file with “Generic SysEx”, transmit the data
from there to the device and then request the banks with the dedicated module or
adaptation directly from that device. Using this detour, the bulk dump is converted
to single or bank dump messages which can be handled by the module or adapta-
tion.
Importing from Other Programs
281
User Manual
Version 3.0
Importing SYX Files
SYX files (also known as MidiEx or SysEx files) contain the raw
dump data in unencoded form. SoundDiver can import these
files and either send them to the relevant device or convert
them into a library.
Conditions for the File
SYX files use the file extensions .SYX, .MQX, .DMP.
: SYX files usually have the file type “BULK”. Files of this type
can be opened directly with File > Open …. If a SYX file has the
file type “????”, “BINA”, “MDOS”, “mdos”, “pBIN” or “TEXT”,
and the file name has one of the above extensions, they are
detected by SoundDiver, however you have to load them using
File > Import ….
How the Import Function Works
Imported SYX files simulate incoming MIDI messages (like
SMF files). Please remember the special conditions which
apply; see the section Importing Standard MIDI Files on page
276.
If you want to import a file but you don’t know its format it will probably be an SYX
file. Alter the file name extension to .SYX and then try to import the file.
: SYX files can also be imported by simply dragging the file’s icon onto SoundDiver’s
program icon.
Import Functions for Specific Modules
Some SoundDiver modules allow you to import certain file
formats. You can convert these files with the menu item File
>Import… into a SoundDiver library.
Format Recognition
Because some modules contain special import functions that
can identify the format of the selected file, you may find that
X
282
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
SoundDiver will load several modules one after the other until
the format is recognized. This operation is automatic and can
take a little time to complete.
As soon as SoundDiver recognizes the data format, it creates a
new library whose title is taken from the file name, and loads
the converted data. The number of entries it contains depends,
of course, on the number of entries in the original file.
Data Format for the Import
To find out what data format each module is capable of recog-
nizing, use the On-line Help.
Select the desired device in the Setup window and select
Windows > Help. That device’s On-line Help now appears.
Click Index and select Import from the list that appears.
You can find this information as well in the “SoundDiver 3.0
Model List.pdf” file.
Additional Information
•If a file cannot be imported, a dialog box will open allowing
you to ignore the file or abort the whole operation.
•When importing, SoundDiver will automatically delete any
duplicate entries it finds.
•SoundDiver allows you to influence the order in which the
modules are selected: simply select the device in the Setup
window that is the one most likely to be compatible with the
file to be imported.
7.16 Exporting Files
SoundDiver offers various options for exporting files. This is
helpful if you work with programs from other manufacturers
which don’t provide flexible means of data exchange, or if you
want to give sound data to friends who don’t have SoundDiver.
X
Exporting Files
283
User Manual
Version 3.0
You should use the export functions only if there is no other way. There are some
restrictions in comparison to using SoundDiver libraries (see below).
Exporting Standard MIDI Files (SMF)
For the operation of the various export variations see
•the section Export MIDI File… on page 146
•the section Capture as MIDI-File… on page 147
•the section Export … on page 212
•the section Export… on page 234
SoundDiver writes a Standard MIDI File in format 0 (i.e. it
contains only one track). The file does not contain tempo infor-
mation which leads to a default tempo of 120 bpm, and the
resolution is 96 ppq. This is the most commonly used format
and should be compatible with every program which can read
SMF.
The transmission duration of all MIDI messages is taken into
account, which results in incrementing clock positions. The
clock distance between two events is always at least one tick,
even if it should actually be 0 because of the low resolution.
This prevents the order of MIDI events from being changed by
sequencers which have some kind of “intelligent” priority opti-
mization.
Delays which are necessary for the correct transmission of
dumps are recorded as well (i.e. converted into appropriate
meta events which correspond to the delay at 120 bpm).
: The files are saved with file type “Midi” as the standard
designates.
When you load a MIDI file created by SoundDiver and set a tempo higher than 120
bpm, this can lead to problems when sending the data, as delays necessary for a
correct transfer are shortened.
When SoundDiver creates a MIDI file which contains dumps for several devices,
which are connected to different MIDI outputs of the computer; all dumps are
contained in the same track. To make a sequencer able to send the loaded file
correctly, you should “demix” the loaded events to separate tracks so that they can
be sent to the correct outputs.
284
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Exporting SYX Files
For details see
•the section Export … on page 212
•the section Export… on page 234
Such files contain plain MIDI data without any formatting.
There is no time stamp information, thus it can lead to prob-
lems if the file is transmitted with a generic utility like
“MidiEx”. If delays are necessary for correct transmission you
will get a warning message when you try to export a file in SYX
format.
: The file is saved with file type “BULK”. This file type is
recognized by freeware tools like “Bulk SysEx Utility” or
“MIDI Pack’en”.
If SoundDiver needs handshake communication in order to
send certain entries, you will get an error message. The reason
is that the device does not reply with the required “Acknowl-
edge” message (as SoundDiver’s MIDI output is redirected to
the export file) and the SoundDiver module consequently
thinks that the data has not “arrived” at the device.
In this case you should check if you can send the data without
handshake communication (either in the special parameters or in
a dialog box).
Otherwise use the function Capture MIDI File… (see the
section Capture as MIDI-File… on page 147).
Finally you have to state the folder and file name for the file to
be exported.
: It is advisable (but not required) to append a .mid or .syx
extension to be able to recognize the format from the file name.
On Windows it is necessary to use the correct file name exten-
sion, as otherwise the file cannot be read by other programs.
Exporting Files
285
User Manual
Version 3.0
Limitations with File Export
The data to be exported is stored in a temporary buffer in
computer memory first, not actually sent out as MIDI
messages. Known limitation: there must be sufficient memory.
If you get a message “Out of memory”, you must save several
small files instead of one large file.
: You can also assign more memory to SoundDiver.
Questions and Answers on File Export
? When I save a single Multi A-01 from the MicroWave as a
Standard MIDI File and try to re-import the file, the Multi
appears in the edit buffer and not in memory location A-01.
Why is this?
! Because the MicroWave does not provide SysEx messages to
transmit a single Multi or Voice directly to a specific memory
location. As a workaround, SoundDiver first transmits the Multi
or Voice to the edit buffer and then a command “store the edit
buffer to memory location xxx”. When importing this sequence
of SysEx commands, the MW module ignores this “store”
command (as the MicroWave never does send this command).
However, if you send the MIDI file directly to the MicroWave,
the desired effect is achieved.
This problem occurs with all devices which do not support
direct single dump messages or if you don’t save an entire bank.
If you have to import a MIDI file in SoundDiver for any reason,
it should always consist of whole banks.
? When I save a parent entry in a MIDI file or a SYX file with
Export… > Selected Entries, the dependent child entries are
not saved, unless I select them explicitly. Why is this?
! Because the Transmit function does not do this either.
Because of SoundDiver’s “WYSIWYH” concept, the manual
Transmit function is only needed in exceptional situations.
Thus you have to manually add the desired data to the file
286
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
yourself. An alternative is to activate File > Capture MIDI File…
and transmit the parent entry from a library to an empty Device
window. It is important that the Device window be empty, as
otherwise dumps could be missing if SoundDiver has already
skipped existing child entries for optimization.
7.17 Converting the Sounds of
Related Devices
Some SoundDiver modules are capable of converting sounds
that come from different synthesizers. In most cases, these are
related or older devices. For example; the JV-80 module can
load the sounds of a Roland D-70 and convert them into JV-80
sounds. The SY77 module will do the same with DX7 sounds.
The on-line Help will tell you what conversions are available
for your devices, and will give more information on the convert-
ing process, as follows:
Select the desired device in the Setup window and select
Windows > Help. That device’s on-line Help will now appear.
Click Index and select Conversion from the list. This is where
you can learn all about what the conversion can do for that
particular device.
7.18 Saving a Sound Bank as a
Library
You can manage your devices’ sounds in libraries without losing
their memory allocations.
❏Select the desired device in the Setup window. You can also
select several devices if you want to save their contents in a
single library.
❏Select New > Build Library from the Setup window’s local
menu, and one of the sub-options. SoundDiver now copies
X
Saving a Sound Bank as a Library
287
User Manual
Version 3.0
them into a new library. If needed, entries are automatically
requested for this purpose. See section Automatically Creating
a Library from page 213 onwards for more information.
Build Library can also be found in the Device window’s local Entry menu—you
don’t have to change to the Setup window. The difference is that this menu acts only
on the entries of the current device, not all of the selected devices.
Sub Menu
Use the sub-menu under Build Library for selecting the entries
SoundDiver is to use for the library.
Editable Entries
The library is created out of all the device’s directly editable
entries. This includes the Edit Buffers, as well as the entries in
the memory locations that are directly editable, such as the
Yamaha SY99’s Pan settings, the Multi-Setup of the Virus or the
global setup of an Alesis DM Pro. In the broadest sense, this
option stores the current state of the device thus allowing you
to load it again later.
Bear in mind that all the entries of some adaptations fall into this category, as the
Edit Buffers cannot be directly addressed via MIDI.
The Entry Dependency Management is active here as well. If
you write a parent entry that addresses child entries into the
library, these child entries will also be included.
288
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Memory Locations
This option acts on all the memory locations including those of
cards, but not ROM entries. This option is specially useful
where you address all the sounds via a Program Change in the
sequencer and don’t want to transfer Edit Buffers into the
library.
All Entries
This option creates the library out of all the entries (except
ROM). Select All Entries when you want to create an entire
backup of the device including its edit buffers.
Selected Entries
Selected entries only (except ROM) are put in the library. It
allows you to manually determine what the library is to contain.
Known Entries
This creates the library out of the entries already requested in
the Device window. Use this option when you want to create a
safety copy from a specific number of entries (e.g. just locations
1 to 30, just the Multis, etc.).
“Save as…”
This menu item in the Setup window’s local New menu works
the same way as Build Library, but saves the created library
directly to disk once you have entered its name and path into
the file selector.
This option is also available in the Device window; it acts only
on the entries of the current device.
Load and Transmit File…
You’ll find this menu item in the Setup window’s local New
menu and in the Device window’s local Entry menu.
X
Saving a Sound Bank as a Library
289
User Manual
Version 3.0
It allows a library to be loaded from disk and directly sent to the
appropriate device(s). If you have used Create Library to make a
copy of all or part of the memory contents of your Setup, Load
and transmit File… retrieves them again.
If you select a number of devices, only the entries of those
devices will be accepted.
Strictly speaking, Load and transmit File… is a macro that loads a library without
opening a window, selects everything, sends it all to the device(s) and then closes the
library again.
Library entries that are blank in the location field are copied as
usual to the next available location. If the Preference Safety
message overwriting memory locations is active, a dialog box
appears so you can select a different target.
If a library contains several entries for the same memory loca-
tion, only the last one is processed.
The selection in the Device window is extended by all the
loaded entries. If you deselect everything first you will instantly
be able to see any changes.
The process may be aborted using ™ (: or C.). Edit > Undo
undoes the load.
After you have loaded a library, you are asked if you want to
transmit the loaded data to the corresponding devices (except
with MIDI Files; see below). This prevents you from overwrit-
ing the devices’ memory by accidentally loading the wrong file.
If you click “Cancel”, the data in the devices won’t match the data in the computer,
so be warned!
With MIDI Files, SoundDiver first checks to see whether they
contain data suitable for any of the installed devices. If they do
not, a warning message appears.
X
290
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
Loading for a Single Device
Load and transmit File… is also found in the Device window’s
local Entry menu. If you use this menu command, the process is
limited to the current device only.
Example: after completing a production, you have made a
safety copy of your entire sound palette in the form of a Sound-
Diver library, and now wish to load the sounds of just the Ober-
heim Xpander for a new production. In this situation select
Load and transmit File… from the Xpander’s Device window.
The other devices’ data will be ignored.
Importing Different Formats
You can also use the Load and transmit File… function to
import foreign file formats and Standard MIDI Files. The
contents of the loaded files are likewise sent to the appropriate
devices.
For details on importing SMF files, please refer to the section
Importing Standard MIDI Files on page 276.
What’s more, the Load and transmit File… function as usual limits its action to
the current device when it’s loading from a different format into the Device window.
Sending Entries from the Library
If you select an entry in the library and select Edit > Transmit,
the data will be sent to the memory location given under
memory location.
Changing the Location
If you want to copy a library entry to a memory location that
differs from the one stated in the location field, simply drag it
with the mouse to that position. By using this method you can
explicitly specify the new target location, so that the location
field in the library is ignored. If several entries are copied this
X
X
Saving a Sound Bank as a Library
291
User Manual
Version 3.0
way, the entries that come after it are copied to the subsequent
locations.
Deleting the Memory Location Assignment
Sometimes it is specifically not desirable for SoundDiver to
take into account an entry’s location field when using the
Transmit function. This, for instance, is the case when you
generate a universal, large library from many different sound
banks. In this case you can delete the location field:
❏select the library entries whose locations you wish to delete
❏click the Location parameter in the Parameter Box and de-
lete it with B. This deletes the location numbers of the se-
lected entries in the library.
If you finish by sending the entries from the library to the
devices, SoundDiver distributes the entries according to their
positions in the library.
Example: let’s assume that you want to send five sounds from
the library to a synthesizer, where they are to occupy locations
24 to 28.
Here, you have to select the entries in the library and select Edit
> Transmit. In the resulting dialog box select location “24” and
then click the All button. SoundDiver sends the five sounds
and places them one after the other in the device, starting with
location 24.
The Edit Buffers
Entries that have no location number are assigned an “E” in the
library and are transferred back to the appropriate Edit Buffer
in the device. This means you can make a complete backup of
the entire memory contents—including all the Edit Buffers—
in SoundDiver.
You have to manually insert the “E” in older libraries. To do
this it’s best to use the Find function:
X
292
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏Select More Options.
❏Enter the condition “The location”, “is” (keep empty)
❏Select the option Show all.
❏At this point all the entries without location numbers are se-
lected. Click the location parameter in the Parameter box
and enter “E”.
7.19 Practical Examples for
Libraries
Here are two examples designed to show you just how useful
libraries can be in your day-to-day work.
Instantly Saving Sounds for a Production
Let’s assume you are working on a production and want to save
the memory contents of all your devices for later reloading,
because you now have to start work on a different production:
❏in the Setup window select all the devices you are using,
❏select New > Save as… > Memory locations,
❏save the library that appears using the name of the produc-
tion,
❏you can now start your next production; in other words, you
are now free to alter the memory contents of your devices.
When you’re ready to continue working on the original produc-
tion,
❏send the library in the Setup window with New > Load and
transmit file….
❏After you have answered a safety question, you should be
back where you left off.
X
Practical Examples for Libraries
293
User Manual
Version 3.0
Archiving Layered Sounds
Let’s assume you have created a layered sound by combining
several devices and now you wish to save it:
❏Create a new library with File > New or open an existing li-
brary,
❏copy all of the entries from your various devices that make
up the layered sound into this library,
❏if necessary, zone-off this group of entries from the others us-
ing a title entry.
❏To store these entries back in the devices, select them —
this is accomplished very easily by A (: O)-clicking the ti-
tle entry above — then send them using Edit > Transmit. To
audition the sound without permanently storing the entries
in the devices, select the local menu’s Library > Audition.
❏You can also select entries from different models of the same
type of device.
X
X
X
294
Chapter 7
The Library
Emagic
SoundDiver
General
295
User Manual
Version 3.0
Editing with
SoundDiver
In SoundDiver, you can do more than just organize your
sounds—you can edit them directly on your computer’s screen.
8.1 General
Since SoundDiver contains modules and adaptations for more
than 500 devices, most of which have at least one editor, not all
of the special functions can be adequately described in a single
manual. This manual therefore describes SoundDiver’s general
editor functions, common to all of its editors.
The general form, operation and basic options are identical in
all SoundDiver editors. You therefore only need to learn how to
use a SoundDiver editor once, and you can then operate all of
them.
If you still have questions relating to the special functions of a
device or you want to get more precise details about the options
available in an editor, you can make use of the information
provided by the on-line Help.
The special functions, options and features of the different
editors are individually described in the relevant Help window.
This ensures that if there are any alterations, improvements or
expansions of the modules and adaptations, the instructions
remain relevant by way of updated Help text files.
Chapter 8
296
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Abb. Editor-Hilfe
For example, this is a page of the on-line Help for the Yamaha
EX5. As you can see, the on-line Help contains detailed infor-
mation on the specific devices.
8.2 Opening the Editor
To select an entry for editing either:
•double-click it in the Device or library window;
•select an entry in the Device or library window and select
Windows > Open Editor;
•select an entry in the Device window and select Entry > Edit
in the local menu;
•select an entry in a library and select Library > Edit in the
local menu.
X
X
X
Opening the Editor
297
User Manual
Version 3.0
If the contents of the entry to be
edited are not known yet, a dialog
box appears giving you some or all of
the following options, depending on
the situation:
•cancel the operation;
•initialize the entry. The initialization data is then sent to the
device, and the editor is opened with this data;
•request the entry from the device first.
Sometimes there will be no data available for an open Editor window. You will then
get a message saying “(Data unknown)”. You can receive the editor data by
selecting Edit > Request or initialize it with Edit > Initialize from the local menu.
The Overview
If an editor provides several views, SoundDiver opens a new
editor window in overview mode. The overview allows you to
see all of the function areas of your device at once. With synthe-
sizers, this gives you a very good indication of the sound-gener-
ating structure, such as the most important parameters of the
elements like volume or pan and so on. Since with many
devices it’s not possible to view all the parameters at once, the
overview gives you a very convenient way of selecting the area
you want to edit.
Say you want to edit the AWM parameters of the EX5 sound
shown in the diagram. Click the AWM box in the overview, and
a detailed display of the AWM appears.
298
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Abb. Editor Detail
To switch back to the overview:
•select View > Overview from the local menu;
•: click the relevant button in the Editor window.
The overview and the detailed display act like a two-level
zoom function. You can alternate between the overview and the
detailed display and so quickly target the desired parameters.
When you toggle between the two, your position in the over-
view map is retained.
If the entry you are editing only contains a few parameters, there will be no overview.
This is often the case with simple effects programs or multi patches. By contrast,
other editors are so complex that they are arranged in three levels (e.g. Roland D-70
drums).
8.3 The Easy Page
One part of the overview contains macro parameters for making
coarse alterations to the sound without having to go into too
much detail. These alterations, which are known as Easy Page,
always affect the entire sound. Say you want to use the Easy
Page to alter the filter frequency in a EMU Morpheus, all the
elements are available here. If you want to alter the filter
frequency of an individual sound component, you can do this in
the detailed display.
X
Navigating the Editor Window
299
User Manual
Version 3.0
When you alter a parameter in the detailed display, all the Easy
Page parameters are reset to 0.
Double-clicking a parameter takes you straight to the relevant
section of the detailed display.
In certain modules, more buttons are available to open addi-
tional Editor windows.
Example: At the detail view of the Roland VM-7100/7200,
there are little buttons in the EQ-section that open another
window.
8.4 Navigating the Editor
Window
You can picture the editor as a large street map, on which all the
parameters are laid out. The Editor window shows you one
section of this map, which you select using the various naviga-
tional functions.
Switching between the overview and the detailed display was
covered in the previous section.
You can access areas outside the editor window using the scroll
bars. The parameters of a program component—what makes
up a sound—are usually arranged horizontally.
300
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Using the lower scroll bars of the editor to move from left to
right, you can follow the signal path of the device or the struc-
ture of a combination, performance or multi-setup.
Abb. Tone horizontal
The diagrams show the parameters of an element of a Yamaha
EX5, and beneath the parameters of a performance in a Yamaha
SY99.
SoundDiver arranges other elements vertically. The x/y scroll
gadget in the bottom left corner of the window allows you to
move quickly in any direction around the map.
On Windows you can also ç-click with the middle mouse
button at any location of the window.
Selecting the Parameter to Edit
301
User Manual
Version 3.0
8.5 Selecting the Parameter to
Edit
If a parameter has the flashing cursor on it, this means it can be
edited.
You can either click the parameter directly with the mouse or
move the cursor in any direction using the arrow keys, in which
case the window section automatically moves as well.
Clicking an object moves the window view to allow the whole
object to be seen. The window view won’t be moved if the
object is already in full view or is too big for it, as happens with
very big objects like the vertical keyboard table in drum
editors.
The description of the parameter is seen:
•when holding the mouse pointer over an object without
moving it for a moment. A little window (ToolTips) shows
the parameter’s name, and the current parameter value. For
parameters which have names for the various values (such as
wave forms), also the value name is displayed.
This function may be disabled. Take a look at the section ToolTips on page 403.
•On the info line of the Editor window (Macintosh) and on
the status line (at the bottom of SoundDiver’s main window)
on Windows.
Parameter Help
If you want to know the precise function of an individual para-
meter, click it and select Windows > Help, and the Help window
will appear with a description of the parameter.
X
302
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Abb. Parameter-Erklärung
You can leave the Help window open and as you click the
different parameters, the Help message will automatically
change accordingly. It’s a good idea to open the Help window as
a floating window by:
•selecting the menu item Options > Help always in fore-
ground > in foreground in the help window on Windows or
•: by holding down O while opening the help window.
Cursor Position
SoundDiver always stores the cursor position, even if you move
the window into the background or recall a different screenset.
MIDI Thru Channel
Some modules automatically update the MIDI Thru channel
in certain editors when you select a parameter. This function is
available in most multi-editors to enable you to play the edited
part.
This function is currently not available in Adaptations. To audition the edited para-
meter, change the MIDI Thru channel manually.
8.6 Editing Parameters with the
Mouse
The editing of parameters was covered in the section General
Operation from page 128 onwards, but the editors contain some
Editing Parameters with the Mouse
303
User Manual
Version 3.0
additional functions. For example, you can edit parameters
using knobs. For the sake of the Overview, here is another
description of the various methods available for editing para-
meters.
Using the Mouse as a Slider
To set parameter values directly with the mouse, click-hold the
number. You can then alter the value in either direction by
moving the mouse vertically.
: This function is called mouse as slider and may be switched
off in the Preferences.
Using the Mouse to Decrement/Increment
If you have deactivated the Mouse-as-slider option in the Prefer-
ences, the mouse will function as a decrement/increment key
on a synthesizer.
Clicking increases the value, C-clicking decreases it. If you
simultaneously hold down S, SoundDiver alters the value in
units of ten.
Click-holding will continuously alter the value.
Flip-menus
You can select from a
collection of presets or
named values—such as
wave form names or
switch settings—with
the help of flip-menus.
Most flip-menu objects
are marked by a “bevelled” surface and (if space allows) by a
downward-pointing arrow on the right side.
304
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Mouse Operation
By clicking a flip-menu object, the flip-menu opens. There are
two options available:
•when opened with a short click, the menu is closed by
another click;
•when opened by click-holding the mouse button, the flip
menu closes when the mouse button is released again.
: if you hold down S after opening the flip-menu with this
option, the menu stays open after you release the mouse
button. The menu closes when you release both S and the
mouse button.
Important: don’t hold down S until after you have clicked (S-click selects the next
level up of parameter groups, see below).
By moving the mouse pointer on the menu, you select a value.
If the mouse pointer is located on a value when the menu
closes, this value is chosen for the flip-menu object.
Display
If the flip-menu contains more values than will fit in one
column, it is shown in multiple columns. If the screen is not
wide enough to show all necessary columns, a horizontal scroll
bar appears at the bottom edge. Otherwise, a number of lines is
chosen so that there are as few empty lines as possible in the
last column. As a side effect this often results in a number of
lines which corresponds to the numbering scheme, e.g. when
selecting an entry in a bank.
Windows: Keyboard Operation
On Windows, there are some additional options
•Instead of clicking in a flip-menu object, you can also move
the flashing cursor on it and press R.
•In opened flip menus, you can select the desired value with
the cursor keys. If necessary, the menu scrolls automatically.
Editing Parameters with the Mouse
305
User Manual
Version 3.0
•As soon as the desired value is selected, finish the selection
with R.
•If you click a flip menu by mistake, press ™ in order to close
it without changing a value.
Editing a Flip-menu Object without a Flip-menu
If you click a flip-menu object while holding down ç, it will
not be opened. Instead you can set the value using “Mouse as
slider”. With ç-double click, you can enter value with the
keyboard.
Editing with Graphic Objects
To alter a parameter
using its graphic display,
click-hold it. Depend-
ing on the type of
parameter…
•…you can set the value using a knob whose position may be
altered by vertically moving the mouse.
Holding down ç gives you a higher resolution: moving the mouse pointer two
pixels alters the value by 1. This is particularly useful for small knobs with a large
value range.
•The slider works in a
similar way to the
knob—you alter the
value by pushing the
mouse up and down.
•Horizontal sliders work exactly the same way, but you move
the mouse horizontally.
With sliders you can also make fine value adjustments by simultaneously holding
down ç.
The numerical value of a graphical object is operated just like a numerical value
object. : This applies particularly to “mouse-as-slider”.
306
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Envelopes
Envelopes may be graphically
edited by dragging the points in
the desired direction. Any alter-
ations will be reflected in the
numerical display.
Depending on the structure of the
envelope, the point may be moved
in one or both directions. With some envelopes there are
restrictions on where the point may be positioned. This is due
to the structure of the envelope (e.g. with the Yamaha EX5).
Points lying outside the rectangle of the envelope’s graphic
display are indicated by a small arrow. Such points may be
edited by clicking the arrow.
Keyboard Window
For many synthesizers, note ranges on the keyboard can be
defined. These are often displayed graphically next to the
numerical representation.
You can change the limits of the defined ranges simply by drag-
ging with the mouse. For some devices, only a portion of the
possible 128 keys is shown, in order to save space. In this case,
simply click the left or right border to define the respective
limit.
Editing Parameters with the Mouse
307
User Manual
Version 3.0
If the device does not allow the “high key” to be less than the
“low key”, the latter is automatically moved appropriately
when the high key is edited, and vice versa.
However, there are also devices which allow this situation, e.g.
Yamaha EX5. This often defines a “filter”, i.e. two ranges are
defined: from key C-2 to the “high key” and from the “low
key” to key G8. This is shown appropriately in SoundDiver.
Keyboard Velocity Windows
A variant of keyboard windows will show additional informa-
tion regarding velocity range. SoundDiver shows such
keyboard velocity windows as a keyboard with a rectangle
above it. The range displayed by the rectangle depicts the
defined keyboard range in the x axis and the defined velocity
range in the y axis. Horizontal and vertical guide lines make
orientation easier.
Besides the typical operation possible for keyboard windows,
you can drag all four corners of the rectangle with the mouse to
simultaneously change the keyboard and velocity limit.
As with keyboard ranges, some devices don’t allow the “high
velocity” to be lower than the “low velocity”. Again, Sound-
Diver moves the affected limit automatically. The above
mentioned comment regarding “keyboard range filters” also
applies to keyboard velocity windows.
308
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
8.7 Inputting Values via the
Keyboard
Number-input Mode
Parameter values may also be entered directly via the numeri-
cal keypad. The number keys 1 to 9 are normally used to
switch between SoundDiver’s different screensets, while =
starts the sequencer. You can bypass this by
•enabling the “Num Lock” key command; this is normally the
“ (: ~) key—this key is also labelled with “Num.”;
•activating “Num Lock” in the preferences.
This function is also known as “NumLock”.
If number-input mode is active this is shown in SoundDiver’s
info line on the Macintosh (Windows: status line):
: This message appears in all windows with an info line.
Please note that any pause between the individual digits
should be less than one second. Negative values should be
preceded by _. Here too, any pause should not exceed one
second.
Pressing “ (: ~) again will switch number-input mode back
off. The current setting of number-input mode is saved in the
Preferences.
Text Input Box
If you don’t want to use number-input mode—if, for example,
you often switch between screensets—just double-click the
parameter. A small window then appears in which you type the
desired value, and press R to confirm.
If the cursor is already placed on the object to be changed, the
input box can also be opened with R.
X
Inputting Values via the Keyboard
309
User Manual
Version 3.0
In the text input box there are many ways to enter a value.
If the parameter has only subsequent integer values or note
names, the possibilities are identical to those in Emagic’s Logic
Audio:
•decimal input: 0, 1, 2, 123
•hexadecimal input: $1, $2, $0A, $7F
•note values like “C3”, “C#3”, “Cb3”, “C##2” (corresponds
to D3), “Dbb2” (corresponds to C2)
•add a value to the previous one: “+5”, “+$10”
•subtract a value from the previous one: “−5”
To enter an absolute negative value −x, enter “0−x”
•add two numbers: “38+17”
•subtract two numbers: “38−17”
•multiply two numbers: “7∗8”
•divide two numbers: “80/5”
For all other parameters, you can enter any kind of text. Sound-
Diver will select the value which is most similar to the entered
text.
Example: the available parameter values are
Hall 1
Hall 2
Delay
Pan-Dly
Entering “2” will select Hall 2; “del” will select Delay, and “dl”
will select Pan-Dly.
Increasing or Decreasing Values
To increase or decrease a value in single steps, press or _.
Simultaneously holding down S makes SoundDiver alter the
value in units of ten.
To input a negative value, first press _ (initially, the value
decreases by 1) and then enter the amount.
310
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Names
In many data types, an editable name belongs to the para-
meters. It is often shown in the upper left corner of the editor
window. Click on one of the characters, and the cursor is shown
as a flashing rectangle (instead of a frame). Apart from the
cursor keys, the following makes input easier:
•entering a character advances the cursor to the next character
•™ deletes the entire name
•B deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves
the rest by one position to the left
•∂ (: L) deletes the “cursored” character and moves the
rest by one position to the left
•⁄ inserts a space on Windows.
The insert and delete commands work only in editors of modules, not of adapta-
tions.
8.8 Inputting Values via MIDI
Many parameters reflect specific MIDI values like notes, veloc-
ities, controller numbers etc. In many editors you can directly
input these values (not adaptations). This function is called
“Listen to MIDI”.
Place the cursor on the parameter, hold down S and play the
MIDI event on the keyboard. For example, in a multi-editor
you could directly define the key range of a part by hitting the
lowest and highest keys, or you could set the breath controller
as the modulation source by holding down S and blowing.
Parameters which allow such an input are marked with this
symbol:
AutoPlay
311
User Manual
Version 3.0
8.9 AutoPlay
If AutoPlay is active, the built-in sequencer automatically plays
the test sequence in Cycle mode with each value change, (no
matter whether by mouse, keyboard or MIDI input). With
AutoLink, the sequencer plays from the left locator for the
period set under AutoPlay duration.
With drum editors, the edited note is played instead for the
period set under Drum AutoPlay duration (this does not apply to
adaptations).
8.10 Edit Button
Certain flip-menus display the
names of other entries (cross-
reference). For example, flip-
menus in a parent entry will
display the sounds of the devices.
If the name of an entry is as yet unknown, only the storage loca-
tion number is displayed.
There will often be an edit switch next to it. If you click this,
the corresponding editor will open. This simultaneously deac-
tivates the Link function in the old and new windows. With
some parameter values the edit switch will be deactivated
(gray). In this case, first select a user RAM location.
8.11 Contextual Menu in
Windows
When you click a parameter group with the right mouse button,
it is selected (if not yet selected), and a contextual menu
appears. The following menu items are available:
•New window: see the section More than One Editor Window
on page 312.
312
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
•Cut: see the section Cutting a Parameter Group on page 317.
•Copy: see the section Copying a Parameter Group on page 317.
•Paste: see the section Pasting a Parameter Group on page 318.
•Initialize: see the section Initialize on page 326.
•Randomize: see the section Randomize on page 323.
•Link Window: see the section Link Window on page 324.
•Overview: see the section The Easy Page on page 298.
•Request: see the section Request on page 155
•Transmit: see the section Transmit on page 157.
•Hold Transmission: see the section Hold Transmission on
page 160.
•Compare: see the section The Compare Function on page 319
•Store: see the section Store on page 320.
•Store in…: see the section Store in… on page 320.
•Snapshot: see the section Snapshot on page 321.
•Parameters: see the section Parameter on page 324.
When you click an empty area with the mouse button however,
a shorter contextual menu appears which does not contain the
menu items which only apply to parameter groups.
8.12 More than One Editor
Window
You can open several editor windows for a single entry, one of
which could show the Overview, another, the filter envelope.
The Edit Buffer
313
User Manual
Version 3.0
Abb. Mehrere Editorfenster
If several windows are open for a single entry, all of the
windows will show the parameters for that entry, but in differ-
ent displays. Any alterations will always be shown in all
windows where the relevant parameter is visible.
Please note that displaying the alterations in several windows always increases the
time the program takes to react to any input.
8.13 The Edit Buffer
The SoundDiver editor needs to copy data into an Edit Buffer
which corresponds to the one in the device itself. You can there-
fore see the available Edit Buffer in the Device window. The
entry which you are currently listening to or editing is marked
with a small “E”. The E also determines the current mode (e.g.
performance, patch, multi, single mode) of the device.
314
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
This small E—which is assigned to only one entry per device—
tells you whether an entry is directly editable, i.e. it is an edit
buffer: only in this case will it appear when you click an entry.
Certain memory locations are also directly editable.
Multiple Edit Buffers
When you double-click an entry, SoundDiver searches for a
suitable Edit Buffer and copies the sound into it. For some
devices, there is more than one edit buffer for certain data
types, e.g the Roland JV-1080’s eight “Performance Temp.
Patches”. You can decide which edit buffer SoundDiver is
supposed to use in such cases, either by manually copying the
entry into the desired edit buffer and double-clicking this, or by
clicking the desired edit buffer before opening the edit buffer
by double-clicking the entry to be edited.
Also see the section Devices with Individual Edit Buffers on page
219 and the section Devices with Individual Edit Buffers on page
264.
MIDI Thru
Remember that the MIDI Thru function for the Edit Buffer
can be intelligently dealt with by modules (not by adaptations):
whenever you change Edit Buffers, it is automatically set to this
value so that you can listen to this buffer. This only works if the
relevant multi or global setup data of the device is available,
because this is where the required channel information stems
from.
8.14 Remote-control and
Monitors
Adaptations representing remote-controls or monitors for
MIDI devices or functions initialize the Editor window as soon
Undo Edit
315
User Manual
Version 3.0
as you open it (MIDI monitor, MIDI mixer). This is because
these editors cannot start from known settings in the device.
Abb. -Mixer
The same applies to devices with no Edit Buffer, or whose
contents cannot be sent via a MIDI dump, here too Sound-
Diver has no start points for parameters and so it is best to begin
with a neutral setting.
Remote control editors are very similar to Logic’s Environment
or Cubase’s Mixer Map.
SoundDiver 3.0 Controller Assignments are a very complete
way to remote-control all parameters. More on this can be
found in the section Controller Assignments on page 329
8.15 Undo Edit
Like anywhere else in SoundDiver, you can reverse the last
edits made in the editor (Undo function).
Select the menu item Edit > Undo Parameter Change. Select-
ing the item a second time undoes the previous parameter
change etc.
Of course, if you use the Undo function by accident you can
reinstate the edit by selecting Edit > Redo Parameter Change.
X
X
316
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
The “Undo” and “Redo” functions are nearly unlimited. The number is only limited
by the system memory (RAM). Depending on the last operation, this could take a lot
of memory. Therefore the earliest step is deleted when no more memory is available.
In this case—only the most recent steps in the chain can be reproduced.
: If there’s not enough memory for SoundDiver to perform an operation and other
measures did not work (e.g. deleting unneeded modules and adaptations), Sound-
Diver will erase steps until memory is available.
8.16 Clipboard Functions in the
Editor
If the editor was supplied by a module (not by an adaptation of
the Universal Module), you can select parameter groups within
the editor and then copy or initialize them, as well as many
other functions.
Selecting a Parameter Group
To select a parameter group, click the gray area within the para-
meter group or hold down S and click a parameter from this
group. Use the latter method if you can’t see the gray area
within the parameter group.
The parameter groups in SoundDiver are organized into a hier-
archy. For example, you can select an entire tone (element or
voice) or a single envelope, an LFO or an effect or any collec-
tive sound components as a group.
To select a parameter group from further up the hierarchy, click
a point that belongs to this higher parameter group but not to a
lower one. For example, in an oscillator or partial hierarchy,
click between the individual function groups (envelopes, filters
etc.).
Clipboard Functions in the Editor
317
User Manual
Version 3.0
There is usually a list of the parameter groups in the Help file.
The selected group will be inverted. The above diagram shows
a completely selected group of parameters for the “Pitch Enve-
lope Generator” on the left and on the right the selected
“Time” parameters for an EX5 synthesizer.
To deselect a parameter group, just click an individual parame-
ter or the background.
Clipboard Functions for Selected Groups
The following three operations apply to the clipboard. These
functions (cut, copy and paste) are also universally applicable to
different windows or entries. For example, you could copy the
filter envelope from the EX5 “Piano” sound onto the filter
envelope of the EX5 “Strings” sound.
Cutting a Parameter Group
Select a parameter group and select Edit > Cut.
The parameter group is copied into the clipboard and initial-
ized.
If you just want to initialize the parameters without copying
them into the clipboard, select Edit > Initialize.
Copying a Parameter Group
Select a parameter group and select Edit > Copy.
The values of the parameter group are copied into the clip-
board and may then be pasted somewhere else.
X
X
X
318
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Pasting a Parameter Group
Select a parameter group and select Edit > Paste.
The contents of the clipboard are pasted to the selected para-
meter group, providing they are compatible. For example, you
couldn’t copy the filter envelope from an Virus into the effects
settings of the EX5.
Drag-and-Drop
Rather than copying a parameter group using copy and paste,
it’s much quicker to use the Drag-and-Drop function. While
holding S, grab a selected parameter group with the mouse
and drag it to another position which could even be in a differ-
ent window. When you release the mouse button the values of
the parameter group are copied to the target position. If the
mouse pointer goes outside the edge of the window, the
window section automatically moves with it so you can even
drag the parameter group to a target position outside the visible
window section.
Deleting a Parameter Group
Selecting the Edit > Clear menu initializes the parameter group,
usually setting the parameters to zero or default settings.
8.17 Local Windows in the Editor
Menu
The editor window contains local menus with various options
for working with the editor.
The Edit Menu
Undo
see the section Undo Edit on page 315.
X
X
X
Local Windows in the Editor Menu
319
User Manual
Version 3.0
Redo
see the section Undo Edit on page 315.
Cut
see the section Cutting a Parameter Group on page 317.
Copy
see the section Copying a Parameter Group on page 317.
Paste
see the section Pasting a Parameter Group on page 318.
Clear
see the section Deleting a Parameter Group on page 318.
Request
see the section Request on page 155.
Transmit
see the section Transmit on page 157.
The Compare Function
Often when you are editing a sound, you can get to the stage
where you can’t tell if it’s any better than the original.
SoundDiver therefore contains a function which is similar to
the compare function on a synthesizer.
Select Edit > Compare from the local menu of the Editor
window. The message “Original version” appears in the info
line.
If the menu item has a check mark by it, you hear the original
version. By selecting Compare again, you call up the edited
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
320
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
version. The info line on the Macintosh (Windows: status line)
then reads “Edited version”.
An alert box appears if you try and edit the original version.
If you click OK, you discard the edited version and continue
working on the original. If you mistakenly try to edit the origi-
nal version, press Cancel to quit the function.
Store
Select this menu item when you want to save the result of your
editing. The edited version overwrites the original one, which
is thereby lost. This function corresponds to the “Write” or
“Store” function of a synthesizer.
The memory location of the source entry is shown at the end of the editor window’s
title bar. If the source entry comes from a Library, the title bar reads “←Library”.
This option is the quickest way of updating your work.
If you just want to keep a copy of the edited version, it is better
to use the Snapshot function (see below), because you can
create several versions and you don’t have to overwrite the orig-
inal entry.
Store in…
If you want to save the edited version in a different location
without closing the Editor window, select Store in…. This
function is the same as Store, except that a dialog box opens
where you can enter a different location.
To do this, open the flip-menu in the dialog box by click-hold-
ing it and select a different location.
X
X
Local Windows in the Editor Menu
321
User Manual
Version 3.0
If any entries are used by a parent entry (e.g. performance or
multi) you will be alerted by a check mark to the right.
Snapshot
SoundDiver allows you to save the current stage of your edits
whenever you like. When you create a snapshot, the contents of
the Edit Buffer which you are working on are added to the
library called Snapshots. If this is not available, SoundDiver
will
•automatically create it;
•if available on disk, load it.
The snapshot function is extremely useful in the following
situations:
•you like the result of your editing so far and you want to keep
it;
•you have several variations of an edited sound and you want
to find the best one;
•you are using the randomize function and want to save as
many versions as possible.
When you quit SoundDiver the snapshot library is automati-
cally saved in the Libraries folder. If this is not available, you
will find the snapshots in the “Libraries” folder.
Creating Snapshots Automatically
In the Preferences (Options > Settings > Global Preferences)
you will find the Automatic Snapshots every x s option. Here you
can define a number of seconds. At these regular intervals,
SoundDiver creates a snapshot and adds it to the Snapshot
Library. For details refer to the section Auto Snapshot Every x s
on page 398.
X
X
322
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Autostore Dialog
SoundDiver automatically tries to prevent you from acciden-
tally losing your edits. This is done with the aid of the
AutoStore dialog.
It appears whenever:
•you close an Editor after editing a sound;
•you are about to overwrite a memory location and the Over-
write memory Entries option is active (in Options > Settings >
Safety Messages);
•you are about to overwrite an Edit Buffer which has not yet
been saved and the Overwrite edited Entries option is active
(in Options > Settings > Safety Messages);
•the target position (when moving or copying) does not match
the type of the entry which you are about to add.
You have the following options:
Don’t store
closes the Editor window without storing the edits.
Cancel
takes you back to the Editor.
Store
stores the edit.
If the edited entry originally came from a Library there are
more options:
Entry in Library “library name”
replaces the original entry
Add to the Library “library name”
adds the edited entry to the end of the Library and leaves
the original intact.
X
X
Local Windows in the Editor Menu
323
User Manual
Version 3.0
If you have already closed the Library the first option is not
available. SoundDiver will then give you the option of adding
the edit to the active Library.
Initialize
This function initializes either a group of parameters or the
entire entry.
First you need to select the parameter group to be initialized.
For more details refer to the below section Clipboard Functions
in the Editor on page 316. If there is nothing selected in the
editor, the whole entry is initialized, which means that Sound-
Diver resets all the parameters to their original values.
Randomize
SoundDiver can create random values for selected parameter
groups, and so provide inspiration for new sounds or introduce
unforeseen variations.
This means that every parameter in the parameter group is
assigned a random value.
If nothing is selected—some editors allow you to select the
entire entry—all parameters of the entire entry are set to
random values. This produces results that are always original
although not always usable.
Remember the hierarchical structure of the parameter groups?
You can edit anything from the entire sound down to a single
envelope with the random function.
Find Controller Assignments
If a parameter is marked (i.e. the cursor is flashing around it),
this function opens the Controller Assignment window and
selects all Controller Assignments which use this parameter as
the destination. See the section Finding Controller Assignments
on page 338.
X
X
X
324
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Learn New Controller Assignment
This function defines a Controller Assignment to the active
parameter.
First click the parameter, then select Edit > Learn new Control-
ler Assignment.
If you use the key command for this function, and then keep on
holding down the modifier key(s), you will get a ToolTip,
which explains the subsequent steps.
See the section Learn Mode on page 345 for details.
The Local View Menu
Parameter
The parameter box is hidden when this option is active. Seethe
section The Device Parameter Box on page 197 for details.
Link Window
When this option is active, SoundDiver automatically changes
the contents of the Editor window whenever the active device
or the active edit buffer changes.
This way you can quickly switch between the different Edit
Buffers of a device, by simply clicking them in the Device
window.
If AutoAudition is switched on, a clicked entry is immediately
displayed in the Editor window and is simultaneously sent to
the device. This is particularly useful when you are searching
through a mixed library.
If you want to simultaneously display more than one editor, deactivate this option
before opening the next window.
This option is also available as a button if the parameters are
shown.
X
X
X
Local Windows in the Editor Menu
325
User Manual
Version 3.0
Overview
Use this to switch off the Overview display described above. Of
course, you can also switch back from the Overview to the
street map.
New Window
This is especially useful: select a parameter group and then
select View > New Window from the local Editor menu. A new
Editor window opens with the parameter group in the visible
section. For example, you could “lift out” the amplitude enve-
lope from the current editor, and continue editing it in its own
window. Of course you can then alter the size and sectional
position of the window.
The “Link Window” function is automatically deactivated in the old and new editor
windows.
By holding S (: O) while selecting New Window, the new
window will be opened as a floating window.
Other Local Menus
Some editors have other local menus.
Adaptation
This menu appears with adaptations. They are used to define
and alter editor objects. There is not enough space here for a
detailed description of the available functions, which are
covered in the SoundDiver Universal Module Programming
Manual. You can download this manual free of charge from our
web site http://www.emagic.de.
Of course there is nothing to stop you from experimenting to
your heart’s content, but you’ll have more success with the help
of this programming manual. Here’s a small tip: the “Layout
mode” plays a key role…
X
X
326
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
Range
Some editors have a local Range menu with sub-functions for
editing tuning or velocity tables. These are described below.
Full Range
In the editor there are two parameters which set an upper and
lower limit for the range which is to be edited. These could be
notes or velocities.
The Full range function sets this range to include all values in
the table.
Initialize
initializes the values within the range.
Mirror Vertically
The values within the range are inverted: the new value =
maximum − old value.
Mirror Horizontally
The values within the range are pivoted around the middle of
the range: the first value is exchanged with the last, the second
with the penultimate, etc.
Interpolate
There is a linear interpolation between the first and last values
in the range, producing a straight line.
This is useful for creating 1⁄4 or 1⁄8 tone tunings: for example, set
the range to two octaves (say C2 to C4). Set the value of C2 to
C2 and the value of C4 to C3. Now select “Interpolate” and you
have quarter-tone tuning.
Extrapolate
The values within the range are continued below and above the
range.
Closing the Editor Window
327
User Manual
Version 3.0
This means if you set the tuning for just one octave you can
instantly transfer it to all other octaves.
Other Menus
Other menu titles vary depending on the respective module.
To find out what they mean, consult the module’s Help file.
8.18 Closing the Editor Window
If you close the editor window without saving your work first, a
dialog box appears. Here you can select whether to save the
edit (and where) or whether to discard it.
The options are:
Don’t Store
the Editor window is closed without the changes being
saved first. The Edit Buffer remains intact, and you can
copy it manually in the Device window to a desired loca-
tion (remember to hold down S (: O), otherwise the
Edit Buffer will be exchanged with the storage location: see
the section Exchanging, Moving and Copying Entries with the
Mouse on page 228).
Cancel
the Editor window is not closed
Store
the Edit Buffer is stored in the given location, and the win-
dow is closed.
When an editor is closed that was originally opened from a
library, the options are:
•Entry in Library xxx replaces the original entry
•Append to Library xxx appends the entry to the end of the
designated library, while retaining the original entry.
328
Chapter 8
Editing with SoundDiver
Emagic
SoundDiver
If, in the meantime, the original library has been closed, the first option will not be
available.
The option “Append to library” always applies to the currently active library, even if
the edited entry comes from another library.
8.19 Recalling Editor Window
Contents in the Next Session
When you quit SoundDiver while an editor window is open, it
is shown empty at the next SoundDiver session, and the
message “No data” is displayed until you select an entry for
editing by requesting, initializing or copying an entry into the
editor.
If you want to let SoundDiver automatically re-establish the
contents of the window, select all in the preferences option
Save device entries in preferences file. Also see the section Save
Device Entries in Preferences File on page 397.
What’s a Controller Assignment?
329
User Manual
Version 3.0
Controller
Assignments
Using the Controller Assignments, SoundDiver can associate
incoming messages to any parameter object inside an Editor
window.
This allows you to completely remote-control parameters and
to design sounds very comfortably.
The connection between incoming MIDI messages and a
SoundDiver object is done in the Controller Assignments
window.
9.1 What’s a Controller
Assignment?
The flow of MIDI messages and internal processing is shown in
the following diagram.
Chapter 9
330
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
First Example of a Controller Assignment
Let’s say you have a Motor Mix connected to the computer, set
up SoundDiver accordingly and defined some Controller
Assignments, including one that controls the LFO Speed in the
EX5.
If you now move a slider at the Motor Mix, it sends a controller
message 1. SoundDiver then searches for the matching
Controller Assignment 2 and localizes the parameter
controlled by it. The controller message is converted into a
parameter change event 3 which changes the value of the LFO
Speed 4. The corresponding parameter change message is now
sent to the device (here an EX5) via MIDI parameter change
message 5. At the same time, the Motor Mix’s LCD will show
the name and current value of the controlled parameter which
is done by SysEx commands 6. Thus, you even don’t have to
watch the computer screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
What’s a Controller Assignment?
331
User Manual
Version 3.0
However if you change a parameter at the Editor window 1,
SoundDiver also searches for the matching Controller Assign-
ment 2 and transmits display update and motor fader feedback
messages to the Motor Mix 3 as well as the parameter change
message to the EX5 4.
As you see, there are always two parts fixed in the Controller
Assignment window:
•the incoming, controlling MIDI message and
•the Controller Assignment made to a device and its para-
meter.
Changes made at a device or inside the Editor window are sent
back to the fader box, so that the value and the fader box’s
motor fader are in sync. SoundDiver takes care of this on its
own.
1
2
3
4
332
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
Controller Assignment Features
A Controller Assignment is a connection between any incoming
MIDI message and an Editor object. So two actions are needed
to define a Controller Assignment:
•defining the incoming controller message on which Sound-
Diver should react and
•defining the controlled parameter.
SoundDiver gives a lot of flexibility in the assignment process,
because different Controller Assignment messages can be
assigned to a single parameter. As an example, a parameter with
many possible values may be controlled by a fader for coarse
control, by an encoder for fine control and by two buttons for
single increments and decrements.
On the other hand the same MIDI message can control multi-
ple parameters. For example, you may use a slider to control the
filter cutoff of all Tones or Partials.
There is no limit to the multitude of Controller Assignments.
Create them via drag and drop, manually or using the Learn
function (see the section Learn Mode on page 345). Controller
Assignments can be made for parameters of the Easy Page, as
well as of the detailed view in an Editor window.
Controller Assignment messages are even processed if the
device is not the active one or no Editor window is open which
contains the controlled parameter—except you have enabled
the option Requires Editor window (see the section Requires
Editor Window on page 344).
Fader Box Modules
For some fader boxes, there are dedicated SoundDiver
modules which offer advanced features with Controller Assign-
ments:
•automatic labelling of the active Controller Assignments in
the fader box’s LC display
What’s a Controller Assignment?
333
User Manual
Version 3.0
•Motorized fader feedback: Changes made inside the Editor
window (which may also originate from a received parameter
change message) are sent back to the fader box, so that the
parameter value is in sync with the position of the fader box’s
motorized fader.
This also works for encoders with LED ring, motorized
rotary knobs, backlit buttons etc.
•While remote-controlling a parameter, the fader box’s
display shows the current parameter name and/or value.
Therefore, you don’t have to watch the computer screen
when using the fader box.
•Easy definition of Controller Assignments with drag-and-
drop (see the example below).
•Easy searching for Controller Assignments which are
defined for a certain controller.
For more details, see section Fader Box Modules from page 348
onwards.
If you don’t have a fader box which is supported by a Sound-
Diver module, you still can use Controller Assignments. See
the section Learn Mode on page 345.
Example for Creating a Controller Assignment
This example will show you how to use Controller Assign-
ments, and especially the benefits of Drag-and-Drop creation
which is only possible with fader box modules. You don’t need
one of the supported fader boxes, however you need a device
with a controller (modulation wheel, fader, knob etc.) that is
sends MIDI messages.
❏Open the Editor window of your device with detailed view
(an EX5 in this example).
❏Install device “Motor Mix” manually in the Install window
(manufacturer “CM Automation”).
334
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏Open the Setup window. Now you have to set the MIDI in-
put and output ports manually (this has to be done manually,
as the Motor Mix does not support the Scan function). If you
don’t have a Motor Mix, set the MIDI ports of the above
mentioned device.
❏Open the Editor window of this device by double-clicking
on the “Motor Mix” icon in the Setup window.
❏Open the Controller Assignment window using Window >
Open Controller Assigns.
❏Place all three windows on the screen as depicted.
❏Now click and hold a fader of the Motor Mix (the mouse
changes to a plug) and drag it to a parameter of your choice
inside the Editor window of the device. You will see a con-
nection cable while the mouse button is held. Objects which
can be connected will be inverted when the cursor passes
X
Terminology
335
User Manual
Version 3.0
over them. Release the mouse button while the mouse
pointer is above an object.
❏In the Controller Assignments window you will see a first
entry, that shows the name of the fader to the left, with the
name of the assigned parameter in the middle, and with the
corresponding MIDI message displayed on the right.
If you have a Motor Mix, you get instant gratification: move the
fader, and the parameter changes. Change the parameter with
the mouse, and the fader moves.
Otherwise you have to change the (MIDI in) message, so that
the message of our device is accepted.
❏Click the button Learn Message beneath the parameter box
and when its color turns blue, move the controller of your
device.
❏Finish by clicking the button Learn Message again. The but-
ton returns to gray.
❏Now turn the knob or fader of your device and it will control
the chosen parameter.
9.2 Terminology
To make SoundDiver’s Controller Assignments easy to under-
stand, we use the following terms:
Controller Assignment
As already mentioned, this is a record which defines the re-
mote control of a parameter.
Fader box
A device which transmits MIDI messages and thus initiates
a Controller Assignment. A fader box may also be any type of
MIDI keyboard, as also the modulation wheel or even the
keyboard may be used for Controller Assignments.
Controller
A control on a fader box which generates a certain MIDI
336
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
message. This may be a slider, rotary knob, button, encod-
er, jog wheel, ribbon controller ect.
Controller message
The MIDI message generated by a controller. Often a con-
troller message contains one or more variable bytes. Sound-
Diver does not only support Control Change messages (Bx
xx xx), but any type of MIDI message, including SysEx. A
controller message may consist of multiple MIDI message
(e.g. subsequently MSB and LSB Control Change messag-
es).
Incoming value
The value which is transmitted within an incoming control-
ler message.
Resulting value
The value which is calculated from an incoming value using
various calculation, based on properties of the Controller As-
signment and the controlled parameter. The resulting value will
become the new value of the controlled parameter.
Controlled parameter
A parameter in a SoundDiver editor which can be con-
trolled by using a Controller Assignment.
9.3 The Controller Assignments
Window
The Controller Assignments window looks a little bit like the
Library window and consists of two parts:
•the data section with all the Controller Assignments and
•the parameter box.
The Controller Assignments Window
337
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Data Inside the Controller
Assignments Window
The Controller Assignments window opens with Windows >
Open Controller Assigns.
As there is only one table, there is only one Controller Assign-
ments window, too.
Handling of Controller Assignments
Controller Assignments are treated as all objects that can be
edited in SoundDiver are.
Controller Assignments are selected by the usual operations.
Take a look at the section Selecting Entries on page 141 if help is
needed.
Double-clicking a Controller Assignment opens the Editor
window and marks the parameter controlled by the Controller
Assignment.
All steps can be undone using the Undo function (see the
section Undo… on page 148) and you can cut, copy, paste and
clear all Controller Assignments at the usual way (see the
section The Edit Menu on page 148).
The Local Assignment Menu
The local Assignment menu has three items.
New
This submenu offers several options to create new Controller
Assignments.
•Empty Assignment
This allows you to insert a new blank Controller Assignment
above the first selected one.
•All other menu items are used to create Controller Assign-
ments for remote control of the Controller Assignment Set.
X
X
338
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
For details see section Predefined Controller Assignments from
page 353 onwards.
Show controlled parameter
SoundDiver opens the corresponding Editor window and
marks the parameter. Double-clicking will do the same.
Learn Message
This item is the same function as using the button inside the
Controller Assignments window (section Learn Mode in the
Controller Assignments Window from page 346 onwards).
Finding Controller Assignments
As you can create as many Controller Assignments as you like,
there will be a lot of them, so a means of locating them is
provided.
Controller Assignments can be searched from “both sides” and
within the Controller Assignments window.
•Double-clicking a controller in the Editor window of a fader
box opens the Controller Assignments window, and selects
all Controller Assignment(s) associated with the control
selected.
•In an Editor window, click a parameter which is controlled
by the desired Controller Assignment, and select Edit > Find
Controller Assignments. The Controller Assignments
window will open, and all Controller Assignments associated
with the parameter are selected.
•In the Controller Assignments window, click a Controller
Assignment, and you can view all parameters which make up
the Controller Assignment, including the controlled device
and parameter, as well as the Controller Assignment message
and the MIDI input where it must be received.
X
X
X
The Controller Assignments Window
339
User Manual
Version 3.0
Parameters of a Controller Assignment
The Parameter box can be hidden/shown with View > Param-
eters.
Name
The name at the top is the name of the controlled parameter. It
is for information only, and displayed in the list. When a new
Controller Assignment is created, SoundDiver enters the name
of the controlled parameter as a default.
The name can be edit as a text field by opening it with a double
click. All text editing functions are available (take a look at the
section Entering Text on page 132).
Adding text to more than one Controller Assignment can be
done by first entering an asterisk (*), then the text to be added
(see section Adding Text to Multiple Entries on page 259).
Input
The controller message has to arrive at this particular MIDI in
port, unless it is set to “any”.
SoundDiver assigns the port automatically, when the controller
message is defined by the Learn function.
To define the port manually, click the parameter and select the
desired port from the flip menu (see the section Out Port and
Input on page 198).
Message
This is a pattern of the MIDI controller message recognized by
the Controller Assignment. All values are displayed in hexadec-
imal.
Two special bytes may occur in the pattern: Hi7 (for “highest
significant 7 bits”) and Lo7 (for “lowest significant 7 bits”).
X
340
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
How the incoming value and its value range is calculated
depends on which of these special bytes occur in the message:
•If both Hi7 and Lo7 occur, the incoming value is Hi7 × 128 +
Lo7, and the value range is 14 bits (0 to 16383 or −8192 to
8191, depending on whether the format is unsigned or
signed).
•If only Lo7 occurs in the controller message pattern, the
incoming value equals Lo7, and the value range is 7 bits (0 to
255 or −128 to 127, depending on whether the format is
unsigned or signed).
•If the incoming message pattern does not contain Hi7 or Lo7,
the incoming value gets a default of 1, and the value range is
1 bit.
You can use this feature if the incoming message generated by a pressed button
does not send the value 1.
Using the Learn mode (see the section Learn Mode on page 345),
SoundDiver enters the incoming message pattern while it is
recorded.
You can copy the MIDI message between Controller Assignments using the clip-
board.
The format of the message uses the terms “Hi7” for MSB and
“Lo7” for LSB parts of the message. This prevents the mix up of
the Controller events MSB and LSB.
If a controller sends only the MSB portion of a control change message, you should
use the Lo7 byte, so that a 7-bit scaling can be done.
Lo7 min/Lo7 max
These two parameters limit the accepted value range of the Lo7
byte. Only if it is inside the range, the message is recognized for
this Controller Assignment. Use this feature if a fader box uses
the same message for two controllers, but with different para-
meter ranges.
The Controller Assignments Window
341
User Manual
Version 3.0
If the value of the incoming message is constant (e.g. for buttons), then you can
simply enter the value in the message instead of Lo7. In this case you don’t have to
adjust Lo7 min and Lo7 max.
Format
This parameter defines the method how the incoming value is
retrieved from the bytes of the incoming message represented
by Lo7 and Hi7:
Unsigned
the value is always treated as positive.
2’s complement
If the most significant bit is set (at Lo7 this is Bit 6; at Hi7/
Lo7 this is Bit 13), the value is handled as a negative value
with 2’s complement format.
1’s complement
If the most significant bit is set (at Lo7 this is Bit 6; at Hi7/
Lo7 this is Bit 13), the value is handled as a negative value
with 1’s complement format.
Sign Magnitude
If the most significant bit is set (at Lo7 this is Bit 6; at Hi7/
Lo7 this is Bit 13), the value is handled as a negative value.
The remaining bits contain the absolute value.
Factor
The factor defines a value that the incoming value is multiplied
with before it is computed to the resulting value, depending on
the mode (see below).
When direct mode is used, the factor may define a constant
resulting value. Using relative mode, the factor can modify the
scaling and polarity.
It is also possible to state a negative factor. Together with rela-
tive mode you can define Controller Assignments which decre-
ment a parameter by one, by entering −1.00 here.
342
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
The resolution is 1⁄100. This allows you to adjust the resolution
of encoders. If an encoder works too fast, simply set the factor
to 0.5.
Mode
The mode parameter defines how the incoming value is
converted to the resulting value.
Direct
the incoming value directly defines the resulting value.
Use this option if the message is generated by buttons (so the message does not
contain variables), and the controlled parameter has discrete, nonlinear values (e.g.
LFO wave forms). Which value is actually chosen can be determined by the Factor
parameter (see section Factor on page 341).
Scaled
the incoming value is scaled from its value range to the con-
trolled parameter’s value range.
By moving or turning the controller to its maximum position, the controlled para-
meter will also get its maximum value, and vice versa for the minimum.
Use this option only for controllers which have minimum and maximum value, e.g.
sliders and rotary knobs.
Relative
The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current
value (or subtracted from it, see the section Factor on page
341).
You should use this setting for rotary encoders, and for buttons which are meant to
increment or decrement the value by a certain amount.
Device
This field defines the device for which the Controller Assign-
ment is valid.
If the value is set to any, the Controller Assignment message is
always sent to the cursored parameter of the current device (if
an editor window is active and a cursor is flashing).
The Controller Assignments Window
343
User Manual
Version 3.0
The value Controller Assignment Set means that the Controller
Assignment does not control a parameter in a device, but the
current Controller Assignment Set. For details, see section
Remote Control of Current Controller Assignment Set from page 352
onwards.
Data Type
Selects the data type for which the Controller Assignment is
valid.
If Device is set to any, data type is always any, and can’t be
changed.
For Device set to Controller Assignment Set, this parameter does
not have a meaning.
Entry
This is the entry for which the Controller Assignment is valid.
You can set it to any to allow the Controller Assignment to
always apply to the currently edited entry. If Device or Data Type
is set to any, Entry is also set to any.
The value any allows you to define an Controller Assignment which depends on the
current edit buffer. This is useful for multi-timbral devices with separately addressable
edit buffers, like the Roland JV-2080: you can create a Controller Assignment which
alters the first Tone’s filter cutoff in a Patch. Which Patch of the 16 “Performance
Mode Temp Patches” is meant depends on the current edit buffer.
For Device set to Controller Assignment Set, this parameter does
not have a meaning.
Memory Offset/LS Bit
These two parameters define the controlled parameter within
an edit buffer. The numbers don’t tell much, as they depend on
the edit buffer’s internal data structure. As they are automati-
cally set by drag-and-drop and the Learn function, this should
not matter.
344
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
The reason why they are shown here is that you can set the
Memory Offset to any (change to the lowest possible value to
do so), to allow the Controller Assignment to always apply to
the current cursor parameter—as long as an editor window is
active and the cursor is flashing.
For Device set to Controller Assignment Set, these parameters not
have a completely different meaning. See section Remote Control
of Current Controller Assignment Set from page 352 onwards.
Controller name
This is the name of the fader or control, displayed in the list, to
make finding a Controller Assignment easier.
Short name
This is a short form of the parameter name, which is used by
Fader Box Modules to be displayed in the fader box’s display
(see the section Fader Box Modules on page 348).
When a Controller Assignment is created by using drag-and-
drop or the Learn function, the short name is automatically
generated from the parameter name, with a length which fits
into the available space in the fader box’s LCD.
Requires Editor Window
If this option is enabled, the Controller Assignment is only
active if the corresponding editor window is open and top-most.
This setting is useful to prevent unwanted changes in the back-
ground.
This also allows you to assign the same controller message to
parameters in different devices or edit buffers, which automat-
ically switch when you activate the appropriate editor window.
If the option is disabled, the Controller Assignment is always active, no matter
whether the editor window is active or even open. Even the device which contains
the controlled parameter doesn’t have to be active. However the edit buffer data
must have been received.
Learn Mode
345
User Manual
Version 3.0
Feedback
This determines whether changing the parameter controlled
by the Controller Assignment should generate a feedback
transmitted to the fader box.
This function is currently only supported for Controller Messages which originate
from a fader box which is supported by a fader box module (see section Fader Box
Modules from page 348 onwards).
Local Feedback
For Controller Assignments which transmit feedback (see
above) you can define by activating this option if the controller
does already display the current value by simply operating it.
This is usually the case for mechanical motor faders. Thus
transmission of feedback is only required when the parameter
is altered on the computer screen.
This function is currently only supported for Controller Messages which originate
from a fader box which is supported by a fader box module (see section Fader Box
Modules from page 348 onwards).
If this option is disabled by mistake, this often manifests itself
in mechanical resistance while operating the motor fader.
Controller Assignment Set
This parameter determines in which Controller Assignment
Set the Controller Assignment is active. For further details, see
section Controller Assignment Sets from page 351 onwards.
9.4 Learn Mode
With the learn mode, creating and modifying Controller
Assignments is greatly simplified. SoundDiver can enter the
controller message and some other parameters of a Controller
Assignment by analyzing the MIDI input data stream.
346
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
Learn Mode Features
The learn mode has following features:
•recognition of Lo7 and Hi7 bytes,
•recognition of encoders which send relative values (such
controls sometimes send the same value subsequently),
•recognition of encoders which use sign-magnitude format,
•automatic removal of unwanted messages (e.g. touch /
release messages for motorized faders).
“Lo7 Min” and “Lo7 Max” always get the default values 0 and 127. This might cause
problems in the rare case that two controls use the same message other than the
value range, but is more useful when assigning sliders or knobs, because you don’t
have to move the control over the entire range.
For the automatic recognition of the above parameters to work
correctly, you should operate the controller in both direction
and over the full value range if possible.
If no Controller Assignment is selected when the learn mode is
activated, a new one is automatically created. Otherwise the
incoming message replaces the previously one(s) in all selected
Controller Assignments without warning.
Learn Mode in the Controller Assignments
Window
Select the Controller Assignment(s) whose MIDI message you
want to alter.
Now enable the Learn Message button, operate a control (if
possible, slowly and in both directions), and disable the switch.
Don’t forget to disable the learn mode after you have sent the messages.
If no MIDI messages have been received by SoundDiver, the
Controller Assignment is deleted, as Controller Assignments
with empty messages are useless.
Learn Mode
347
User Manual
Version 3.0
Learn Mode in the Editor Windows
New Controller Assignments can be created from within an
Editor window, even without opening the Controller Assign-
ments window.
Learn Mode with Launch of the Controller
Assignments Window
Open an Editor window and click a parameter. Select Edit >
Learn New Controller Assignment. Now the Controller Assign-
ments window opens and the new Controller Assignment is
selected.
Don’t forget: Only one side of the Controller Assignment is defined at this point. The
Controller Assignment message has to be defined now.
The learn mode is now enabled. Operate the desired controller
(if possible in both directions), and switch off Learn Mode.
Learn Mode without Launch of the
Controller Assignments Window
To make the definition of new Controller Assignments even
easier, there is a shortcut:
As above, select Edit > Learn New Controller Assignment, but
hold down a modifier key. The easiest way is to use the key
command and keep holding down the modifier associated to
the key command.
While still holding the modifier key down, a ToolTip appears
(see the section The ToolTips on page 179), which explains the
next steps (generate the message by moving/turning the
control, then release the modifier).
When you release the modifier key, the new Controller Assign-
ment is created, and you can immediately operate the control to
remote-control the parameter.
X
X
348
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you release the modifier before a message is recorded, the
Controller Assignments window opens, and you get instruc-
tions in the ToolTip how to finish the learn procedure (disable
the Learn Message button in the Controller Assignments
window).
9.5 Fader Box Modules
SoundDiver includes advanced Controller Assignment features
with the help of special modules. Currently, there are two such
modules which support CM Automation Motor Mix and
Radikal Technologies SAC-2k.
Fader box modules simplify the definition of Controller Assign-
ments and their usage.
Fader Box Editor Window
Double click the icon of a fader box in the Setup window, and
the Editor window opens which shows the fader box’s surface.
If you enter some text in the display, it will be sent to the device
immediately.
That’s about all you can “edit” here. This window has actually
a different purpose than you are used to from Editor windows:
Defining Controller Assignments with Drag-and-
drop
In order to define a new Controller Assignment, click and hold
on a controller object in the fader box Editor window (fader,
knob, button etc.), and drag it to the parameter to be controlled
(located in another editor window). The mouse pointer is
shown as a plug.
As soon as the mouse pointer touches the parameter, it
becomes inverted. When the mouse button is released, a new
Fader Box Modules
349
User Manual
Version 3.0
Controller Assignment is generated in the Controller Assign-
ments window.
Finding Controller Assignments
A double click on an object in the fader box Editor window
opens the Controller Assignments window, and selects the
associated Controller Assignment(s).
Automatic Labelling
If you use a controller which is directly located next to the fader
box’s display in a Controller Assignment, its short name (see
section Short name on page 344) will be automatically shown in
the display.
Depending on the display’s resolution, this is done staggered in
two lines: odd-numbered controllers are labelled in the first
line, even-numbered in the second line.
You can change the label name by simply editing the text para-
meter Short Name.
When the assignment of a controller changes, e.g. by recalling a
Controller Assignment Set (see section Controller Assignment
Sets from page 351 onwards), the labelling is automatically
updated. Labels of currently unused controllers are wiped out.
If a controller controls multiple parameters of different name, only the name of that
Controller Assignment is display which is located most-bottom in the list.
Feedback
Fader box modules support two types of feedback to the fader
box: motor fader feedback and display feedback.
Motor Fader Feedback
Every time a parameter changes for which an Controller
Assignment which uses a motor fader (or other control which
350
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
displays the parameter value) exists, SoundDiver sends a MIDI
message which updates the motor fader to the current value.
This is also the case when the entire edit buffer changes (e.g.
by using AutoAudition) or the active Controller Assignments
are switched, e.g. by recalling a screenset.
Of course, multiple motorized faders (even of several fader
boxes) can be assigned to the same parameter. In this case, all
motorized faders are updated.
This is even the case when the parameter change is caused by
a Controller Assignment. To prevent mechanical resistance, no
feedback is sent to the operated motor fader (see also section
Local Feedback on page 345).
If a motor fader is assigned to multiple parameters, and these parameters get
different values, the motor fader always displays the most recently changed para-
meter’s value. If several of the parameters change simultaneously (e.g. by AutoAu-
dition), then the displayed value is undefined.
Display Feedback
When SoundDiver changes a parameter caused by an incoming
controller message (no matter if it originates from a motor fader
or a normal controller), the name of the parameter and its value
will be shown on the fader box’s display for two seconds.
For parameters which use text for the parameter value (e.g. waveform or sample
selection), even this text is displayed in the fader box, together wit the number.
After this period, the labels are shown again (see section Auto-
matic Labelling on page 349).
The display of the currently edited parameter name and value
can be muted in the settings of the fader box (Setup window,
special parameter section). This may be required if the trans-
mission of display feedback causes too much traffic on the
MIDI port, or if it is not desired when recording parameter
changes in AutoLink mode.
Controller Assignment Sets
351
User Manual
Version 3.0
9.6 Controller Assignment Sets
Controller Assignment Sets allow you to alternatively control
different parameters in an editor with the same controllers. For
example, with Controller Assignment Set 1, you control the
Filter parameters, and with Controller Assignment Set 2, the
effect parameters are controlled.
Similar to screensets, only one Controller Assignment Set is the
current one at any time. The current Controller Assignment Set
can be switched by key commands or MIDI commands. Alter-
natively, you can even control the current Controller Assign-
ment Set using Controller Assignments.
The Current Controller Assignment Set
At the upper left corner of the Controller Assignments window,
you see a parameter—the current Controller Assignment Set.
Possible values are 1 to 9999 and “All”. The current Controller
Assignment Set is stored in the preferences and recalled when
loading a preferences file.
Every Controller Assignment has a parameter “Controller
Assignment Set” which can be either “All” or any number
between 1 and 9999. If it is “All”, the Controller Assignment is
always active. Otherwise, it is only active if the current Control-
ler Assignment Set matches, except the current Controller
Assignment Set is “All”.
Only the currently active Controller Assignments are displayed
in the Controller Assignments window. This includes all
Controller Assignments which have the value “All” in the
Controller Assignment Set parameter.
Also the parameter box shows only the properties of the
selected, active Controller Assignments. Edit > Cut, Edit > Copy
and Edit > Clear always apply only to the selected, active
Controller Assignments.
X
352
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
You can change the current Controller Assignment Set by
following means:
•with the mouse: click-hold and move the mouse up and
down
•by entering a value: double-click the parameter and enter a
new value
•Key commands Next Controller Assignment Set and Previous
Controller Assignment Set
•Controller Assignments (see next section).
Display of current Controller Assignment
Set on Fader Box
If your fader box is supported by a module, the current Control-
ler Assignment Set will be displayed on the fader box’s front
panel.
At the SAC-2k, this is done in the upper right corner of the right LCD.
At the Motor Mix, this is done in the 2-digit 7 segment display.
Remote Control of Current Controller
Assignment Set
There are several ways to define Controller Assignments which
control the current Controller Assignment Set.
Defining by Drag-and-drop
SoundDiver’s fader box modules know the special meaning of
the buttons on your fader box which select a track or a group of
tracks, as far as they exist.
SoundDiver allows one special destination for drag-and-drop
assignment of Controller Assignments outside of Editor
windows: the current Controller Assignment Set in the
Controller Assignments window.
X
Controller Assignment Sets
353
User Manual
Version 3.0
So dragging such a button (see section Defining Controller Assign-
ments with Drag-and-drop on page 348) onto this parameter will
automatically define a Controller Assignment which does
exactly what you expect, including LED feedback on the fader
box.
For the SAC-2k, the Track Select buttons 1 to 8 and the buttons 1 to 8, 9 to 16, 17
to 24 and 25 to 32 have this special meaning.
For the Motor Mix, the Track Select buttons 1 to 8 and the buttons F1, F2, F3 and F4
have this special meaning.
Predefined Controller Assignments
In the local Assignment > New sub-menu, you find several
menu items which create a number of Controller Assignments
which control the current Controller Assignment Set.
Controller Assignment Set Control
creates a single Controller Assignment which controls the
current Controller Assignment Set
4+4 button Controller Assignment Set Control
Use this option if your fader box has four track select but-
tons. Four Controller Assignment Sets are created which
select one of the four tracks; and four Controller Assign-
ment Sets switch between the track groups 1—4, 5—8, 9—
12 and 13—16.
8+4 button Controller Assignment Set Control
Use this option if your fader box has eight track select but-
tons. Eight Controller Assignment Sets are created which
select one of the 8 tracks; and four Controller Assignment
Sets switch between the track groups 1—8, 9—16, 17—24
and 25—32.
16+4 button Controller Assignment Set Control
Use this option if your fader box has sixteen track select
buttons. Sixteen Controller Assignment Sets are created
which select one of the 16 tracks; and four Controller As-
signment Sets switch between the track groups 1—16, 17—
32, 33—48 and 49—64.
354
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
Now simply select the created Controller Assignments one
after another and use the “Learn” function to define the incom-
ing messages.
Defining Manually
In the “Device” parameter of a Controller Assignment, there is a
value “Controller Assignment Set”. When this value is chosen, the
Controller Assignment controls the current Controller Assign-
ment Set instead of a parameter in an Editor window.
In this mode, parameters “Data Type” and “Entry” have no
meaning. Parameter “Memory Offset” and “LS Bit” define the
bits of the current Controller Assignment Set which are modi-
fied. The normal settings are “Memory Offset” = 16 and “LS Bit”
= 0 which means that all 16 bits, beginning with bit 0 are modi-
fied.
You can use the modes Direct and Relative to modify the current
Controller Assignment Set. In direct mode, the parameter
Factor determines the selected Controller Assignment Set,
minus one. E.g. a factor 2.00 selects Controller Assignment Set
3. For further details, see section Mode from page 342 onwards.
If you have “Track select” and “Track Group” buttons on your
fader box, and the number of tracks are a power of 2, you can
use these buttons to select Controller Assignment Sets. Exam-
ples for a fader box which has 8 “Tracks”:
Button Mode Mem. Offs. LS Bit Factor results ina
a. Binary format. An “∗” means that this bit is unaffected.
Select 1 Direct 3 0 0.00 ∗∗∗∗∗000
Select 2 Direct 3 0 1.00 ∗∗∗∗∗001
Select 3 Direct 3 0 2.00 ∗∗∗∗∗010
1—8 Direct 13 3 0.00 00000∗∗∗
9—16 Direct 13 3 1.00 00001∗∗∗
17—24 Direct 13 3 2.00 00010∗∗∗
25—32 Direct 13 3 3.00 00011∗∗∗
Controller Assignment Sets
355
User Manual
Version 3.0
Note that Controller Assignment Set numbers are displayed
with 1 added, so e.g. Controller Assignment Set 10 is stored as
9, thus it is stored as binary 00001001. To select it, you use
buttons “9—16” (selecting a value 00001∗∗∗) and “Select 2/10/
18/26” (selecting a value ∗∗∗∗∗001).
356
Chapter 9
Controller Assignments
Emagic
SoundDiver
What Is Autolink?
357
User Manual
Version 3.0
AutoLink
If you use both, SoundDiver and Emagic’s “Logic” sequencer,
the AutoLink feature allows you to link these two programs. If
you don’t (yet) use Logic ignore this chapter (or read it to see
what you’re missing!).
When Logic is mentioned in this chapter, this automatically includes Logic Audio Plat-
inum, Gold and Silver, as those programs include the full AutoLink functionality.
However, MicroLogic does not support AutoLink.
10.1 What Is Autolink?
AutoLink provides—as the name suggests—an internal link
between SoundDiver and Logic. With both programs active,
you can control your sound management while Logic is
running.
The “Name Provider” transfers the names of the sounds being
used to Logic, so that the latter’s (Multi) Instruments reflect
the current sound names.
“MIDI Processing” allows Logic to record all your manipula-
tion of SoundDiver editors via AutoLink. SoundDiver creates
SysEx data when you edit parameters in the Editor window and
sends it to Logic, where it is recorded directly onto the current
track. This allows you to automate (i.e., record) any dynamic
sound edits you make in SoundDiver.
AutoLink requires no external system expansion as Sound-
Diver and Logic control all the communication between them.
Chapter 10
358
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
System Requirements
On Windows, AutoLink requires the following system configu-
ration:
•Any Pentium PC,
•Windows 95/98,
•SoundDiver 2.0.6 upwards.We recommend the current ver-
sion.
•Logic 4.0 upwards.We recommend the current Version.
On the Macintosh, AutoLink requires the following system
configuration:
•Any Power Macintosh,
•System 7.1 upwards,
•SoundDiver 1.505 upwards. We recommend the current Ver-
sion.
•Logic 2.02p upwards. We recommend the current Version.
10.2 How Do You Start Autolink?
Starting AutoLink
Starting SoundDiver in AutoLink mode is fairly easy:
•First start Logic
•Make sure that the option Use AutoLink with SoundDiver or
SoundSurfer if available in Logic’s Options > Settings > MIDI
Interface Communication page is enabled.
: If you are using a Logic version prior to 2.5, disable “Release Modem and Printer
Port in Background if Stopped” or Logic switches off all MIDI communication when
you toggle to SoundDiver, and AutoLink ceases to function.
•Now start SoundDiver. Please boot in this sequence (first
Logic, then SoundDiver), because SoundDiver needs to find
an active Logic program to be able to activate AutoLink.
On Windows, this sequence can be altered only if a multi-client MIDI driver is used.
MIDI Communication with AutoLink
359
User Manual
Version 3.0
When AutoLink is activated, you will hear a “plop” sound.
Starting AutoLink in OMS Mode
If you want to use AutoLink and OMS simultaneously, switch
on Use OMS if available in Logic’s preferences and set Use OMS
if available in SoundDiver’s preferences to always. Also see the
section Communication with Logic in OMS Mode on page 77.
10.3 MIDI Communication with
AutoLink
Whenever Autolink is enabled, SoundDiver uses Logic for the
MIDI input and output. You can check this in the “Prefer-
ences” window which no longer shows the two MIDI ports, but
now looks like this:
Abb. AutoLink-Voreinstellungen
Additionally the sequence window will change, so that the
active AutoLink mode will also be recognized:
When AutoLink is active, SoundDiver no longer uses the
MIDI ports set in the Preferences, but communicates inter-
nally with Logic. All the data sent from and received by Sound-
Diver is first passed through Logic which is now acting as the
MIDI interface. SoundDiver, then, only has access to the active
ports in Logic.
All the data that arrives at any of the computer’s MIDI inputs is
passed on to SoundDiver. Conversely, SoundDiver’s MIDI
output is included in that of Logic.
360
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you quit Logic, SoundDiver automatically takes over normal control of its MIDI
management.
The following scheme shows the MIDI communication
between SoundDiver and Logic.
MIDI Thru in AutoLink Mode
SoundDiver’s MIDI Thru function also works in conjunction
with AutoLink.When active, this option always sends the
incoming data to the current device.
SoundDiver automatically searches the Logic song for an
instrument which has the same MIDI channel and port settings
as the selected device. If no matching instrument can be found,
a dialog box appears asking whether you wish to create a new
instrument in Logic’s Environment with the appropriate
settings.
This dialog box gives you the following three options:
Cancel
You don’t want to create an instrument.
MIDI Communication with AutoLink
361
User Manual
Version 3.0
Create
You want to create an instrument on this occasion only.
Always Create
You always want SoundDiver to automatically create an in-
strument.
If MIDI Thru is switched off, Logic uses the “No Output”
instrument which exists in every song and cannot be deleted.
Whenever you switch back to Logic, the MIDI Thru instru-
ment is automatically changed to the track instrument, and vice
versa.
The new instrument appears in the 7th layer “Instruments” of the Logic Environ-
ment. For details refer to Logic’s Readme file.
The individual instruments of a multi instrument are also used as the Thru instrument
if they match the desired setting.
No instrument is required for sending data to the devices—the MIDI Thru is not used
since the MIDI outputs are addressed directly, without being diverted via Logic.
A change of the MIDI channel or output in the device parame-
ter box causes the creation of a suitable instrument only after
the mouse button has been released. This prevents the need-
less creation of instruments.
Create Logic Instruments
This option in the Preferences (Tab “Safety Messages”)
defines whether you want to be asked if SoundDiver needs to
create a new instrument in the Song in order to achieve the
desired MIDI Thru settings.
362
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
10.4 The Sound Names in Logic
Instruments
You normally have to manually enter the names of your sounds
into Logic, as Logic cannot access these patch names via Sysex
data dumps as SoundDiver can.
However, since all this information is available in SoundDiver’s
Device window, and SoundDiver knows which device is on
which channel, this data can easily be communicated to Logic
via AutoLink. Logic in turn inserts the appropriate sound
names to the Instrument column and names fresh recordings
accordingly. For example, instead of “Sequence recorded”, the
sequence name might be “E-Piano 1 recorded”.
AutoLink allows you to select the right sound for a track at the
right time without having to look in the device or rummage
around in SoundDiver.
Selecting a Sound in Logic
For Logic to know which sound you have given to an Instru-
ment, you have to enter its corresponding Program Change
command in the Instrument Parameter box.
To do this, activate the Program Change in the Instrument
Parameter box with a checkbox.
If you now click-hold the Program
number, a flip-menu opens with the
current sound names:
This is where you select a sound. The one
you select automatically appears from now on in the Arrange
window’s Instrument column:
You see at a glance which sound is being controlled by which
track.
Please bear in mind that these names are not saved as part of
the Song (on the other hand the content of multi instruments is
The Sound Names in Logic Instruments
363
User Manual
Version 3.0
stored in the song). They are displayed for only as long as
SoundDiver and Logic are actively AutoLinked.
If you alter an entry in SoundDiver, delete a device or alter its
MIDI configuration, this has an immediate effect on the
display in Logic.
Configuring the MIDI Channel for Program
Change Detection
SoundDiver modules automatically try to establish a device’s
MIDI channel. However, adaptations cannot do this. For
simpler devices with no multi mode this is not a problem,
because the MIDI channel and the device ID always match.
In the case of a device where the MIDI channel does not
always match the device I,D the “Program Change Channel”
appears amongst the device’s specialized parameters. Please set
this to the device’s current MIDI channel.
In multi-mode devices, program changes often switch to the
relevant sound on multiple MIDI channels. In this case a
switch matrix (resembling Logic’s multi instrument) appears in
the specialized parameters. Here you can whether program
changes should be processed on a channel by channel basis.
Depending on the device, you have to make this setting for a
multi or combi program.
If you see both the “Program Change Channel” and the matrix,
the “Program Change Channel” defines the channel which is
used to switch Performances, Multis etc. In Roland devices,
this channel is called “Control Channel”.
Sound Names in a Multi Instrument
You can use Logic’s Environment to create a multi instrument
for a multi-timbral device. Its sound names are displayed
together in the one window. Here, too, AutoLink is used to
acquire the correct names.
364
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
Abb. Multi-Instrument
To access Device window patch
names for a multi instrument,
simply select Update using
AutoLink from the multi instru-
ment window’s local flip-menu.
With multi instruments, sound names are
saved as part of a Logic Song, and are visible
even if SoundDiver is deactivated. However, changes made in SoundDiver are not
automatically reflected: you have to manually use “Update Using Autolink”.
If AutoLink Doesn’t Work…
If the “Name Provider” doesn’t appear to function as expected
on the first try, don’t panic. There are a few important condi-
tions that have to be fulfilled for Logic and SoundDiver to talk
freely together. It may require a little patience until it’s all up
and running. Please check to make sure that…
•… the MIDI Port of the device is set identically in both
Logic and SoundDiver. Check the conformity at the para-
meter box of SoundDiver and Logic.
The Sound Names in Logic Instruments
365
User Manual
Version 3.0
: If you are using “MTP Cable Mode”, you should not be using the “ALL” option—
either in SoundDiver or in Logic.
•… the MIDI channel at Logic matches the Thru Ch value of
the device at SoundDiver, if the device is not multitimbral
(only one MIDI channel in available).
If there is no such channel, the device ID has to match the
Logic instrument’s channel. With these devices, the device
ID is identical with the MIDI channel. SoundDiver then
only shows the device ID.
With multitimbral devices you have to distinguish modules
from adaptations (you can recognize adaptations by the
Adaptation menu in the Device window)
- With adaptations, the channel must be switched on in the
4x4 matrix in the “Special Parameters” area.
If the device has a control channel (e.g. for the selection
of performances), and you want Logic to show this infor-
mation, this channel must match the Program Change Ch
setting in the Adaptation.
- Modules are able to request this kind of data. Detailed
conditions are listed in the on-line help.
•… the correct Bank Select format is set (if the device
supports this MIDI command).
Although “normal” instruments
send both bank select control
changes, only bank select LSB
(controller 32) is variable, and
only in the range 0 to 62. If the
sound generator needs other
bank select values, use a multi
instrument and select one of the
bank select options in the multi
instrument editor.
Or you can use the function
Define Custom Bank
366
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
Messages …” in Logic 2.5 or newer (See “Defining Custom
Bank Select” Chapter 5 of Logic’s manual).
In Logic 2.0x and the first version of Logic 2.5, the Bank Select information in a multi
instrument was not passed on to SoundDiver. Make sure you use the latest update
of Logic 2.5 (or a later version).
Particularities of devices defining the Bank Select are found at the section “Autolink”
in the Help file.
•… SoundDiver knows the device’s receive MIDI chan-
nels—if a multi-timbral device is involved. To be sure of
this, SoundDiver normally needs the “Global Data” or
“System Settings”, the current Multi/Combi program and
any Program Change table the device may have. If Logic is
showing blank or incorrect sound names, request this data
again using SoundDiver. If this data is not available, the
SoundDiver module assumes that the device can receive on
the MIDI Thru channel set in SoundDiver’s device para-
meter box only. To be quite sure, request the entire Device
window contents into SoundDiver again. Check the
“AutoLink” section in the on-line Help of the corre-
sponding module. You can look this page up by selecting it in
the help index (see the section Index on page 175).
•… SoundDiver knows the device’s current mode. Many
devices have more than one mode (e.g. Program and Combi-
nation) in which incoming Program Changes are variously
processed. To tell SoundDiver what the desired mode is
(and to switch the device to that mode), you only need to
click the appropriate Edit Buffer in the Device window.
Some devices recognize certain Bank Select or Program
Change commands and change modes accordingly. If you
transmit these, SoundDiver delivers the desired names
without further action on your part.
•If several devices receive on the same channel, the program
names of just one of these devices will be shown, the device
that was first added to the Setup window. We therefore
recommend that you separate the devices by MIDI channel
unless there’s a good reason for not doing so (e.g. layering
The Sound Names in Logic Instruments
367
User Manual
Version 3.0
sounds—however these can still be realized with separate
channels by using alias sequences).
If none of this helps, it could be because the settings needed in
the SoundDiver adaptation have not yet been completed. You
can check whether this is the case in the “SoundDiver Model
List” file in the “AutoLink” column: a “y” means that the
adaptation supports AutoLink.
If the adaptation does not yet support AutoLink, you may be
able to fix this yourself.
❏Open the Adaptation Editor from the Device window using
Adaptation > Edit Adaptation … and open the desired
bank’s “Bank Driver”.
❏In the bank driver, find the parameters called Program
Change detection.
CHAN
This item selects the MIDI channel which the correspond-
ing Logic instrument must match in order for the Name
Provider to function. You can select a fixed value, or a vari-
able one, based on other criteria such as the Device ID or
MIDI Thru Channel.
BANK MSB or LSB
a Bank Select command, if required,
FIXED
a fixed Program Change that’s sent first, if required,
OFFSET
the Program Change number used to select the first entry
in the bank.
For more details, please consult in the SoundDiver Universal
Module Programming Manual, available on the Emagic web site.
If none of the mentioned steps will make it, just use Edit > Copy (in the Device
window) and Paste using the “Paste all names” item (at the multi instrument pull-
down menu near the “Update Using Autolink” item). Not very elegant—but this
method always works.
X
368
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
10.5 Remote-controlling Logic by
SoundDiver
AutoLink disables SoundDiver’s internal sequencer and lets
Logic take over. The window is called “AutoLink/Logic”. The
Transport functions in SoundDiver’s Sequencer window
remote-control Logic. This allows you, for instance, to prepare
a Cycle mode sequence in Logic and then seek out the appro-
priate sound in SoundDiver for that particular track.
The Record button can also be activated in AutoLink mode,
thus allowing you to remote-control Logic from SoundDiver.
This feature is very useful for recording parameter changes in a
SoundDiver editor in real-time (see the section Recording
Parameter Changes in Logic on page 371).
Key Commands for Logic
SoundDiver forwards all unassigned key commands to Logic.
In AutoLink mode, the key commands for SoundDiver’s trans-
port control are ignored, but forwarded to Logic. This way if
you swap the assignment of Play and Stop in Logic, this assign-
ment then also applies to SoundDiver.
10.6 Changing Logic’s Track
Instruments
A handy function of AutoLink is the ability to audition a
recorded track with various sounds from different tone genera-
tors—all with a single mouse click.
Set Logic Instrument
Activating this option in SoundDiver’s Options menu alters the
Instrument on the selected track in Logic, if you start audition-
X
Saving Song Data in a Library
369
User Manual
Version 3.0
ing sounds at SoundDiver. So it’s easy to try out different
sounds—even from different Instruments—on the same track.
For safety reasons, this option is always disabled when Sound-
Diver becomes active.
If you want to change the track’s instrument, select this menu
item. Now the currently auditioned entry will be played by
your Logic tracks.
The changed track instrument will be retained if you switch
back to Logic. If you don’t want this, disable Set Logic Instru-
ment before switching back to Logic. The original instrument
is reassigned to the track, and the song remains unchanged.
10.7 Saving Song Data in a
Library
Coming from Logic you can save the sounds used in a song in a
SoundDiver library (if AutoLink is active). Click the New >
Save Library for Logic Song > … menu to do this.
You can select from the same list of options as in Build Library…
and Save as… This allows you to build a library with entries
that aren’t used in the song.
370
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
Save Entries Used by Logic Instruments
In addition there is an other option located at the bottom of the
sub-menu named Entries used by Logic Instruments.
This includes all data called up by program changes selected in
the Instrument Parameter Boxes in the Logic song.
If you want to use this function you have to:
❏ensure that all the sounds and programs which you want to
save as library entries are called up using the program
change selection box in the Instrument Parameter boxes
within the song (program changes which were added as
events into sequences will not suffice);
❏execute the key command to save the library.
You can call up this function in Logic via a key command. This
can be assigned to any key combination or MIDI command in
the Key Commands window:
❏open the Key Commands window in Logic,
❏go to the “Global Commands” section and click the line that
says Save used Sound Programs using SoundSurfer/Diver,
❏define a key command or MIDI command.
During the exchange Logic and SoundDiver automatically alternate as the active
application.
You can also execute this function by selecting New >Save
Library for Logic Song > Entries used by Logic Song Instru-
ments in SoundDiver’s Setup window (also see section Save
Library for Logic Song on page 212).
Automatically Loading and Sending the
Library
The library which is created by one of the Save Library for
Logic Song sub menu items has the same name as the Logic
Recording Parameter Changes in Logic
371
User Manual
Version 3.0
song—except for the extension .LIB—and is stored in the same
path and folder as the song.
If you then open a Logic song while SoundDiver is running in
AutoLink mode, it will automatically load the library and (after
your confirmation) send its contents to the devices.
During the exchange Logic and SoundDiver automatically alternate as the active
application.
If you use Preferences files for project-oriented backups, you should think about
using libraries instead of using the option “Save Library for Logic Song > Known
Entries”.
Advantage: even after you have changed your MIDI setup (e.g. MIDI output assign-
ments), such a library will still work, thanks to SoundDiver’s “intelligent” destination
device finding algorithm (also see the section Device Selection Strategy when
Sending from a Library on page 214). If you want to load an old Preferences file after
your MIDI setup has changed, you would have to adjust MIDI output and Device ID
settings manually.
This function is not carried out automatically every time the song is saved in Logic.
We recommend that you save the library just before you close the song or quit Logic
to ensure it is up to date.
10.8 Recording Parameter
Changes in Logic
Now that we’ve covered the transfer of sound names, let’s
examine how AutoLink allows for the real-time recording of
parameter changes. This means that you are able to record all
the parameter editing you do in the SoundDiver editor directly
in Logic, allowing, say, filter sweeps over arpeggio runs, or real-
time pulse width changes during a solo. Exactly how a device
reacts to being manipulated via SysEx while it’s playing
depends on the device. More on this in the following two
sections.
To record SoundDiver parameter changes in Logic:
372
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏First confirm that the option which allows Sysex to be re-
corded is enabled. This option is found in the Options > Set-
tings > MIDI Options window in Logic.
❏You should now arrange a combination of SoundDiver and
Logic windows that allows for easy access to the relevant ar-
eas in each program. For example, you may wish to position
Logic’s transport panel next to a SoundDiver’s editor. (You
can, alternatively, open SoundDiver’s Sequencer window
and start the recording from there).
SoundDiver’s Easy Page provides a bird’s-eye view of the main
parameters. Here’s an example of how to lay out the Logic and
SoundDiver windows:
Abb. Transport + Editor
Beneath the SoundDiver EX5 editor, you can see Logic’s trans-
port panel in record-pause status.
Once you are ready to begin recording:
❏select the desired starting point in Logic,
❏click in SoundDiver’s editor,
❏start recording (by pressing the key command defined for
this in Logic, usually *),
❏adjust the parameter(s) in the SoundDiver editor,
Recording Parameter Changes in Logic
373
User Manual
Version 3.0
❏when you have finished, click the Stop button in the trans-
port panel.
All the Logic functions such as Cycle-Record and Autodrop are
freely available from within SoundDiver.
Create a screenset in both Logic and SoundDiver on the same number (e.g. 98)
which calls up the assignment shown above. You can then make an instant SysEx
recording since the screen configuration will be called up in both SoundDiver and
Logic (if AutoLink is active).
It is not yet possible to define SysEx sliders in Logic by sending parameter changes
from SoundDiver.
What to Look out for with Real-time SysEx
Editing
SysEx parameter changes are extremely data-intensive. Logic
has special priority routines that ensure that the timing of notes
and other MIDI events is not affected by even complex SysEx
editing. Despite this, problems can arise that may be unavoid-
able due to limitations of the device:
•The reaction time of many devices slows down when they
receive notes and SysEx at the same time. If you suspect
this, try allocating the offending parameter to a MIDI
Controller (e.g. Modulation). MIDI Controllers are more
efficiently processed by MIDI devices and don’t, as a rule,
affect the timing. This is because SysEx data has a subsidiary
timing priority and is treated by many devices as being of
secondary importance, unlike MIDI Controllers, where the
opposite is true. In any case, of course check to see whether
the desired function in your device can be reached via MIDI
Controller.
•Some devices deal with parameter changes only when notes
are being played. In other words: filter sweeps are not
possible when notes are being held, only when they are
played. If this is the case, try the MIDI Controller alternative
just described.
374
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
10.9 Displaying Recorded
Parameter Changes in
SoundDiver
Normally, Logic forwards only MIDI events received at the
MIDI inputs to SoundDiver, but not the ones transmitted by
Logic. Thus, parameter changes recorded in a sequence are not
displayed in SoundDiver when the song is played back (see the
section MIDI Communication with AutoLink on page 359).
To see these changes in the Editor window, the data has to be
sent to SoundDiver.
For this purpose the “AutoLink” object in Logic’s environ-
ment exists, which is like a virtual port to SoundDiver.
The recorded SysEx data (track) is played by an instrument (1)
and handed over by this instrument to a MIDI port (3). Using
the “AutoLink” object Logic delivers the same data addition-
ally to SoundDiver.
Displaying Recorded Parameter Changes in SoundDiver
375
User Manual
Version 3.0
As there is only one virtual port to SoundDiver, Logic generates
only one “AutoLink” object.
If display of parameter changes is desired, you can configure it
as follows with Logic:
❏Create a new internal instrument with the Environment
window’s local menu item New > Internal > AutoLink. (If
this menu item does not appear, instead create another inter-
nal instrument instead, i.e., QuickTime, SampleCell or
WaveMaker, and adjust the instrument’s type to “AutoLink
1” afterwards.) The parameter Which is unused.
❏Connect all instruments used by those tracks whose output
you want to monitor in SoundDiver to the newly created in-
strument. If this instrument is “hard-wired” with a physical
output, a warning message will appear asking whether this
assignment should be cancelled. Select “No”: otherwise the
tracks would be sent to SoundDiver only, and not to their
previously assigned instrument ports.
When you start playback in Logic now, SoundDiver will display
all parameter changes in the editor windows.
376
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
This function is not available for all SoundDiver modules, particularly those whose
supported devices don’t send out parameter changes themselves. Further notes can
be found in the “MIDI” page of the corresponding module’s on-line Help.
10.10 Recording Dumps in Logic
If you prefer to save the actual sound data in a Song rather than
rely on Program Changes, AutoLink makes it easy to record
Dumps from SoundDiver to Logic.
The procedure is the same as described above in section
Recording Parameter Changes in Logic on page 371.
Instead of editing in editor windows, select the entry in its
desired location and transmit it. AutoAudition allows this to be
done automatically, though you can also preselect the entry or
entries and transmit them at the desired Song location using
Edit > Transmit. Bear in mind that the sound immediately
becomes active with AutoAudition; when sending memory
locations, on the other hand, these have to be chosen in the
Song through the use of Program Changes.
There’s more information in the section SoundDiver and MIDI-
Tasking on page 73.
10.11 Synchronizing Screensets
If you recall a particular screenset in SoundDiver (see the
section Storing Screensets on page 164), the corresponding one
will open in Logic, and vice versa. Both programs act as one,
allowing you to truly integrate your work.
Bear in mind, however, that the window hierarchy (i.e. which
one is below and which above) is managed separately in both
programs. By the same token, copying a screenset is possible
only within its host program.
If all this automation starts to get to you, you can disable it in
SoundDiver’s preferences (“Communication” page).
X
Open SoundDiver for Instrument
377
User Manual
Version 3.0
10.12 Open SoundDiver for
Instrument
This function allows you to open the Device window of a
device used by a Logic instrument very quickly.
❏Select the desired track in Logic
❏Select Functions > Track > Open SoundDiver for Instrument.
It can also be found in the Key Commands window, in the
Arrange window section. It is advisable to assign a key com-
mand to this function.
SoundDiver will now become active and open the Device
window of the corresponding device. The SoundDiver device
assigned to the Logic instrument is determined as follows:
•Only devices are taken into account whose MIDI output on
the computer is equal to the instrument’s assigned output.
For the following name comparisons, the case is ignored.
❏If there is a device which returns a name for program change
0 on the MIDI channel used by the instrument and the de-
vice’s name is identical to the instrument’s, then the Device
window of this device is opened.
❏Otherwise, if there is a device which returns a name for pro-
gram change 0 on the MIDI channel used by the instrument
and the device’s name is contained in the instrument’s, then
the Device window of this device is opened.
378
Chapter 10
AutoLink
Emagic
SoundDiver
❏Otherwise, if there is a device whose name is identical to the
instrument’s, then the Device window of this device is
opened.
❏Otherwise, if there is a device which returns a name for pro-
gram change 0 on the MIDI channel used by the instrument,
then the Device window of this device is opened.
❏Otherwise, if there is a device whose name is contained in the
instrument’s, then the Device window of this device is
opened.
The above facts are summarized in the following table.
Table 8 Assignment Logic instrument to SoundDiver device
Pass Output
matches returns name for
program change Name
matches Name is
similar
1√ √ √
2√ √ √
3√ √
4√ √
5√ √
Open SoundDiver for Instrument
379
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Universal
Module
SoundDiver’s support for MIDI devices comes in two forms:
the module and the adaptation. Modules are created by Emagic
developers and are the more advanced of the two forms. A
module precisely reflects and makes full use of a device’s
specific characteristics. They function as a comprehensive,
independent system and have capabilities rivaling model
specific editor/librarian programs.
Unfortunately, it is hardly feasible to create a module for every
MIDI device in existence. The level of sales for many MIDI
devices simply does not justify the amount of time and energy
it takes to produce a module. Fortunately, this does not mean
that other devices can’t be supported, because SoundDiver
provides a quick and easy way of supporting those MIDI
devices not covered by modules.
This support is made possible via a special module called the
Universal Module. This module can be made to work with
virtually all MIDI devices, thanks to editable driver-files called
“adaptations”. These “adaptations” are user-editable, so if you
know a little about SysEx data, you can create your own adapta-
tions or edit the existing ones.
Your SoundDiver package comes with modules and adaptations
that cover more than 500 MIDI devices, so it is likely that your
entire MIDI system will be compatible with SoundDiver from
the word “go”. The number of provided adaptations will
increase every time there’s an update to the program, so the
need for you to create your own adaptations will decrease corre-
spondingly over time. However, the option is always there if
you wish to take advantage of it.
Chapter 11
380
Chapter 11
The Universal Module
Emagic
SoundDiver
11.1 The Differences between
Modules and Adaptations
Here are the main differences between the modules and adap-
tations.
Differences in MIDI Communication
•Adaptations can be created and edited by the user; modules
cannot.
•Adaptations cannot import non-SoundDiver data files,
except Standard MIDI and SYX/MidiEx files.
•Adaptations’ scan functions cannot recognize cards, expan-
sion boards or MIDI channels.
•The version number of a device’s firmware is recognized by
adaptations only if the device supports the “Universal
Device Reply” message. Even then, the adaptation cannot
take differences between the firmware versions into account.
•Modules often support several models of one type of device,
even if there are minor differences between the models. It
also is ideally suited to supporting a device’s different soft-
ware versions, even to the extent where new features are
introduced. This is not possible with adaptations.
•Modules are able to convert files from related devices (e.g.
DX7 → SY99); adaptations can do this only to a limited
extent.
•Modules are able to support all kinds of SysEx communica-
tion. Adaptations have a few limitations in this respect (e.g.
handshaking, Sample Dump Standard, exotic name and
checksum formats).
Differences in Editors
•Overview and easy page are not possible in adaptations.
The Differences between Modules and Adaptations
381
User Manual
Version 3.0
•In adaptations there are no parameter groups. Thus, you
cannot select, cut, copy, paste, initialize or randomize para-
meter groups. The function New Editor is also not available.
•Adaptation editors have a fixed object layout. All objects are
always visible. In modules however, objects and parameter
groups can be hidden, depending on the value of a para-
meter. This often occurs in editors for effects devices or the
effect section of synthesizers: an “algorithm” parameter
often defines the meaning of all other effect parameters.
•Editors for data types which have a dynamic data structure
are not, or only partially possible in adaptations.
•Custom objects like “Free Algorithm Edit” in the SY77
modules or the 3-D display of the K5000’s additive synthesis
are not possible in adaptations.
•Range functions (see section Range on page 326) are not
possible in adaptations.
Other Differences
•Adaptations can’t automatically change the MIDI Thru
channel when the active edit buffer or current parameter
changes.
•The entry dependency management does not work flaw-
lessly in all adaptations. This is because the definition of a
dependency is done with a special editor object. Due to the
above mentioned limitations in editors, too many dependen-
cies are generated in some cases.
•AutoLink name providing works in adaptations for multi-
timbral devices only with limitations, as there is no way to
find out from the entry data what MIDI channels are used.
Instead, the user has to define these channels manually (see
the section Configuring the MIDI Channel for Program Change
Detection on page 363).
For selecting banks, only the two bank select controller
382
Chapter 11
The Universal Module
Emagic
SoundDiver
messages and a preceding program change message are
supported. Other formats are not possible.
11.2 Editing Adaptations
Most of the adaptations that come with the package have
already been optimally adapted to their respective devices and
do not need further editing. However, you may find that you
want to alter the default parameters, in which case light editing
becomes necessary.
The Adaptation Menu
In Device windows that are created by an adaptation, you will
find a third local menu heading called Adaptation next to Entry
and View. This new menu accesses the adaptation editor, and
allows the altered adaptation to be saved to disk.
Edit…
Select this to open the adaptation editor.
You are able to alter the default
parameters in the upper portion
of the adaptation editor.
Save
Selecting this menu item saves
the adaptation file in the Diver
folder.
You can get the former version back by
reloading it from the original program CD
or download it from Emagic’s web site
(see below).
Editing Adaptations
383
User Manual
Version 3.0
Altering Default Parameters
To find out how to create your own adaptations, please read the
section Creating Your Own Adaptations on page 384.
You are, however, able to make simple changes without special-
ized knowledge. We are deliberately limiting ourselves to para-
meters which do not alter the SysEx communication between
SoundDiver and the device, such as those that simply alter the
appearance of objects or change the defaults to those you want.
Icon
Click-hold the icon to select a different icon for the adaptation.
As of SoundDiver 3.0 there is a new option to import icons from
the flip menu.
Select Import… from the Icon flip menu, a file selection box
will appear. After importing, the PNG file’s data becomes part
of the Adaptation file, and is cross-platform compatible.
The file has to meet the following conditions:
•The file chosen must be a PNG file (Mac: file type “PNGf”,
Windows: extension .png).
•The icon should have an alpha channel and should be 128
pixels wide plus an optional shadow of up to 5 pixels.
•The alpha channel should have reduced opacity in the
shadow.
Here are two of the web sites where you can find more informa-
tion about this file format and it’s particulars:
•http://www.whatis.com/png.htm
•http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/
Defaults for Timeout, Send Pause, Play Delay
If you have been having problems with these parameters—
maybe due to a change in the device’s software version—and
384
Chapter 11
The Universal Module
Emagic
SoundDiver
have found better values, you can enter them here. From then
on, they will become the valid default values. You will find
more on these parameters in the section The Device Parameter
Box from page 197 onwards.
11.3 Creating Your Own
Adaptations
Creating your own adaptations in SoundDiver requires special-
ized SysEx knowledge, and so is not for everyone. Because of
the large number of functions and information needed to create
an adaptation, we have compiled a programmer’s manual, the
SoundDiver Universal Module Programming Manual (PDF file for
Acrobat Reader, english only), which can be downloaded from
our web site:
http://www.emagic.de—navigate to Support > Updates >
SoundDiver
email: info@emagic.de
This manual also defines the conventions required for any
adaptations to be accepted into the pool of SoundDiver adapta-
tions distributed by Emagic.
Communication
385
User Manual
Version 3.0
The Preferences
The Preferences are divided into five sections and can be
reached from the Options > Settings menu.
12.1 Communication
This page controls the MIDI communication between Sound-
Diver and the interface(s), and can be opened with Options >
Settings > MIDI Interface Communication….
This page looks different if AutoLink is active. See the section
MIDI Communication with AutoLink on page 359 for details.
Chapter 12
X
X
386
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
Particular Issues on Windows
The following parameters are only available in the Windows
version, as they configure the communication of SoundDiver
with the MME MIDI drivers.
The parameters are hidden in AutoLink mode, as in this case
Logic handles communication with the MIDI drivers.
MIDI Input Buffers per Port
This parameter determines how many input buffers are at the
disposal of each MIDI input, in order to receive SysEx
messages in a cyclic manner. Higher values can be necessary for
slower computers, so that incoming data is not lost while
SoundDiver is busy processing the data already received. A
smaller value saves memory. However, it should not be set
below 2.
KB per MIDI Input Buffer
Increase this value if you experience communication problems
when receiving large SysEx dumps. Symptoms are that Sound-
Diver reports that the device did not answer (although part of
the dump has already been received) or that a check sum error
has occurred.
To be able to receive SysEx messages, SoundDiver passes
memory blocks (so-called buffers) to the MIDI drivers, which
are then written with the incoming messages and finally
returned to SoundDiver when the message has been
completely received. Unfortunately, Microsoft did not define
precisely how a driver should behave if an incoming message is
larger than the buffer. The “ideal” behavior is that the driver
passes the message in several parts (each the size of one buffer).
This is done by all interfaces from Emagic, Midiman and EES.
You will get problems if the driver simply passes the beginning
of the message (of the size of one buffer), but “swallows” the
rest. In this case, the buffers should be enlarged accordingly, so
that this unwanted behavior never occurs.
Communication
387
User Manual
Version 3.0
You should therefore set the buffer size to a value large enough
to accommodate the longest dump message which can occur in
your MIDI setup. The devices which we currently know use
very long dump messages include: Ensoniq’s VFX/VFX-SD,
SD-1 (internal Programs—about 60 KB) and Ensoniq TS-10/12
(internal Programs—about 80 KB). However, note that the
overall memory requirement results in the buffer size multi-
plied by the number of MIDI input buffers (see above) and the
number of MIDI inputs. So if you have a MotU MIDI Express
XT and a sound card, this would result in a memory require-
ment of 3 MB if you set 10 input buffers and 30 KB per input
buffer.
For this reason, SoundDiver ignores the above parameters for
Emagic interfaces and instead allocates two buffers of 1 KB
each per port. Another advantage of this special behavior is that
the progress bar in the status line works more smoothly when
SoundDiver receives large dumps.
If required, you can bypass this special behavior by holding down S while editing
one of the above parameters.
Ignore MIDI In Errors
In general SoundDiver will alert you if the transmission of
MIDI data breaks the rules of the MIDI protocol (e.g. data
bytes are sent without accompanying status bytes).
Some drivers show this alert, even if there is no communication
error. To suppress these unnecessary messages the alert
“MIDI-In Errors” can be suppressed.
USB Plug-and-play
SoundDiver is plug-and-play compatible with USB MIDI
interfaces, i.e. when an interface is added or removed, Sound-
Diver automatically updates the MIDI ports in the setup.
388
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
Particular Issues on the Macintosh
The following options are only available in the Macintosh
version, as they cover the direct MIDI interface support.
If you use AppleTalk in LocalTalk mode, you should disable AppleTalk in the Chooser
while using SoundDiver, or you may suffer from communications problems.
The options are hidden in AutoLink mode, as in this case Logic
handles communication with the MIDI interface(s).
Modem Port/Printer Port
Enable the port(s) you want SoundDiver to use for MIDI
communication.
If only a “n/a” (for “not available”) appears for a port, this
means the Mac OS told SoundDiver that this port does not
exist. If you have a G3 or G4 with a GeeThree “Stealth Port” or
Griffin “gPort” installed, you need to install the system exten-
sion which came with this hardware. This extension tells the
Mac OS that the internal modem has turned into an external
Modem port.
Make sure that you use the latest version of this extension, e.g. for Mac OS 9.0.4
and Stealth, you need “Stealth Serial Port 1.0.3” or higher.
If you are not using one of the ports for SoundDiver, disable it
to allow another program to use it.
If SoundDiver doesn’t find a MIDI interface at the enabled
port(s), a dialog box appears drawing your attention to this, and
giving you the opportunity to alter the preferences.
If this happens, check whether the MIDI interface is
❏connected at all
❏connected to the correct port
❏switched on.
This warning message applies only to the communication between the MIDI inter-
face and SoundDiver, not to any MIDI devices that may be connected.
Communication
389
User Manual
Version 3.0
To stop the message from repeatedly appearing—such as when you are experi-
menting with something, simply disable both ports in the preferences.
USB
SoundDiver supports Emagic USB MIDI interfaces directly—
without the need for OMS. You only have to drop the file “USB
Unitor Family Driver” (which comes with the interface) into
the System folder.
Use driver version 1.1 or higher. Older versions do not support the MT4, and cause
problems when an Emagic USB dongle is connected.
If your Macintosh has no USB port, or SoundDiver has
detected no Emagic USB interface, the text n/a (for “not avail-
able”) is displayed below the label USB. Otherwise ok is
displayed, and the recognized interfaces are displayed (see
below).
Using Non-Emagic USB MIDI Interfaces
If you want to use a non-Emagic USB MIDI interface, you have
to use SoundDiver in OMS mode. See the section OMS from
page 74 onwards.
Hot-swapping
If an Emagic MIDI interface connected to USB is switched off
or unplugged, an alert is shown, and the interface’s MIDI ports
are no longer available. If the USB interface is switched on
again, the MIDI ports will be available again.
Display of Recognized Interfaces
If an MTP, Unitor8 or AMT8 has been detected, you will find
a display to the right of the Modem or Printer port icon or
“USB”. The display text may be:
MTP
One or two MIDI Time Pieces or one MIDI Express have
been detected. Below, you see two squares for the devices
390
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
which can be connected. For the ones which have been de-
tected, the squares are filled in green.
MTP II
As above, however one or two MTP II or MTP AV, or one
MIDI Express XT have been detected.
Unitor8
One or more Emagic Unitor8/AMT8 have been detected;
the first unit is a Unitor8 or Unitor8 MkII whose version
number is shown in brackets. Below, there are eight
squares for the devices which can be connected. For the
ones which have been detected, the squares are filled in
green.
AMT8
One or more Emagic Unitor8/AMT8 have been detected;
the first unit is an AMT8 whose version number is shown
in brackets. Below, there are eight squares for the devices
which can be connected. For the ones which have been de-
tected, the squares are filled in green.
MT4
An Emagic MT4 has been detected; its version number is
shown in brackets. Below, there is one green square.
Options for Modem and Printer Port
The following options apply only to the Modem and Printer
ports and to MIDI interfaces which are compatible with the
“MIDI Time Piece” (MTP) de-facto standard. If you have a
different interface, these settings are irrelevant.
Check for MTP
If this is active, SoundDiver scans for any MTP compatible
interfaces that might be connected and automatically activates
MTP Cable Mode when it finds one. Two MTPs can be
connected to one port (one set to “1—8” and the other to “9—
16”), and SoundDiver will recognize this.
Communication
391
User Manual
Version 3.0
If there is one or several Unitor8 or AMT8 are connected, they
are detected if Check for MTP is active.
Warning: if you are using an older Opcode Studio 4 or a Studio
5 this function is not possible. Manually disable Check for MTP
and enable MTP Cable Mode. The program then assumes you
have a Studio 5 and activates cables 1 to 16.
MTP Cable Mode
If this is enabled, SoundDiver can address all the MTP outputs
separately. As before, “M0” allows all modem port outputs and
“P0” all printer port outputs to be addressed simultaneously,
though this does not usually make much sense.
Fast Speed
This switches the MTP to its Fast Speed mode, where the
communication between Macintosh and MTP is about five
times faster than MIDI. Bear in mind, though, that it doesn’t
accelerate communication between the MTP and the MIDI
devices connected to it. Fast Speed allows for faster throughput
only while simultaneous output on multiple MIDI outputs
occurs, which is seldom the case in SoundDiver.
Check MTP Configuration
Before SoundDiver can communicate with devices that are
connected via an MTP, the MTP should be set up correctly.
•The MIDI channels should not be readdressed in the MTP
•Program changes and control changes should not be filtered
out on any channel of the inputs and outputs
•System Exclusive should not be filtered out of the inputs or
outputs
•All inputs and outputs should be connected to the Macin-
tosh port.
When you activate Check MTP Configuration these parameters
are checked every time you start the program, and whenever
392
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
you activate a MIDI port. If only one of the parameters is set
incorrectly a message appears:
No further warnings
Deactivates Check MTP Configuration.
Don’t configure
The settings for the MTP are unaltered.
Configure
Our recommendation. The MTP is configured so that the
above-mentioned conditions are fulfilled. All other settings
are unaltered.
Warning: the newer Opcode Studio 4 emulates an MTP, but not completely. The
result is that SoundDiver thinks it has recognized an MTP but the “Configure” option
does not work and every time you start the program SoundDiver complains that the
presumed MTP is incorrectly configured. In this case you should deactivate Check
MTP Configuration.
Use MIDI Manager if Available
Here you can define how SoundDiver will proceed while
initializing the MIDI connections if Apple MIDI Manager is
installed:
Never
The MIDI Manager is always ignored.
Ask
A dialog box will appear where you can decide each time
how to proceed:
Never
The option “Use MIDI Manager if available” is
changed to “Never”, and the MIDI Manager is ig-
nored.
Don’t use now
The MIDI Manager is not used this time. When the
MIDI connections are initialized the next time, the di-
Communication
393
User Manual
Version 3.0
alog will reappear, so that you can decide differently
then.
Use now
The MIDI Manager is used this time. When the MIDI
connections are initialized the next time, the dialog
will reappear, so that you can decide differently then.
Always
The option “Use MIDI Manager if available” is
changed to “Always”, and the MIDI Manager is used.
Always
The MIDI Manager is always used (without asking).
Use OMS if Available
Here you can define how SoundDiver will proceed while
initializing the MIDI connections if OMS is installed:
Never
OMS is always ignored.
Ask
A dialog box will appear where you can decide every time
who to proceed:
Never
The option “Use OMS if available” is changed to
“Never”, and OMS is ignored.
Don’t use now
OMS is not used this time. When the MIDI connec-
tions are initialized the next time, the dialog will reap-
pear, so that you can decide differently then.
Use now
OMS is used this time. When the MIDI connections
are initialized the next time, the dialog will reappear, so
that you can decide differently then.
394
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
Always
The option “Use OMS if available” is changed to “Al-
ways”, and OMS is used.
Always
OMS is always used (without asking).
OMS Settings
The following buttons appear only in OMS mode.
OMS Studio Setup …
This button only appears in OMS mode. Clicking it opens the
current OMS Studio Setup using the “OMS Setup” applica-
tion.
OMS MIDI Setup …
This button only appears in OMS mode. Clicking it opens the
current OMS MIDI settings using the “OMS Setup” applica-
tion.
Particular Issues in AutoLink Mode
Synchronize Screensets
This option only appears in AutoLink mode. For details refer to
the section Synchronizing Screensets on page 376.
Process Incoming MIDI only for Active
Device
Here, you can opt to process the MIDI input only for the
currently active device. When disabled, SoundDiver processes
and updates the data of other devices, even if they are not
currently active. If data is received which matches a device
whose Module is currently not yet loaded, SoundDiver auto-
Communication
395
User Manual
Version 3.0
matically loads this Module. If you don’t wish for this to
happen, enable the option.
SoundDiver is quite smart about how it decides which inactive virtual device has to
be “tried out”; only SysEx messages are processed for inactive devices, and only
when the Manufacturer ID matches.
Check Device Connections at Startup
With this option active, SoundDiver scans all devices when
staring and waits for a reply message.
If a device does not answer a alert pops up:
Abort
cancels the entire check. This is useful if the computer is
currently not connected to a MIDI interface, but SD is
started for demo purposes only.
Skip
skips the device, continues with next device in the setup.
This is useful if the device is temporarily unavailable
Delete
deletes the device from the set. This is useful if the device
has been removed from the setup.
Retry
retries finding the device. This is useful if you have forgot-
ten to switch on the device or a MIDI interface
Re-scan
deletes the device from the setup and selects the model for
scanning
396
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
After all devices have been checked, all devices selected by
“Re-scan” are scanned, as if selected in the Install window (see
the section Scanning on page 67).
Additional Timeout
This value adds an additional global amount of waiting-time to
incoming MIDI messages. It is of use when you have a MIDI
device inserted between the interface and end device (Patch-
bay, Thru-Box, other MIDI processor) that delays the MIDI
communication.
You may have to raise this value in the event that devices
cannot be found via scanning.
Request Retries
This determines how often SoundDiver tries to request entries
until a failure message appears. With some devices, it’s worth
trying more than once, if they are slow to react. The waiting-
time, however, becomes unnecessarily long if the device
refuses to answer at all (e.g. if it’s switched off). You should
therefore set this value to match the limit of your patience.
Global Settings
397
User Manual
Version 3.0
12.2 Global Settings
Save Device Entries in Preferences File
If this option is activated, certain entries of all the devices
installed in the Setup window are saved in the Preferences file
when you quit SoundDiver or save the Preferences:
None
nothing is saved;
I
only the internal memory is saved (no cards, no ROM);
I+C
only the internal memory and any available RAM cards are
saved;
I+C+R
everything is saved except the contents of the edit buffers;
All
everything is saved.
The entries you enable are available as soon as you start Sound-
Diver, and you don’t need to use AutoRequest or manual
Request to obtain them.
398
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
If you would rather be completely safe, don’t use this function (set it to “None”);
activate the AutoRequest function in all devices instead. You will then arrive at the
same result, but it will always be up-to-date. Of course, this means you will have to
wait for each of your devices to perform a complete Sysex dump every time you load
SoundDiver.
Also see the section Auto Request from page 206 onwards.
Auto Snapshot Every x s
This parameter is available for SoundDiver only. If you enter a
value (x) greater than zero, Edit Buffers that are being edited
are regularly saved in the Snapshots library every x seconds (see
Snapshot on page 321 in Chapter 8 Editing with SoundDiver).
It’s often the case that when experimenting with various parameters you are too busy
to remember to invoke the manual Snapshot routine, so you may lose some of your
ideas. This function ensures you lose nothing.
Because the library also stores the time of each snapshot, you can see when the
snapshot was made.
This function affects all edited entries, whether or not the
corresponding editor window is open. This means you’re free
to open and close windows, change Edit Buffers or edit differ-
ent devices.
To disable this function, enter a zero (displayed as a blank
field).
It is very important that you note the following: if you
use this option, you should never alter the memory
contents in the device itself or with other programs.
Otherwise you run the risk of creating severe inconsis-
tencies between SoundDiver and the memory contents
of your device. This could lead to valuable, new sounds
being accidentally overwritten because SoundDiver is
operating in accordance with an old version of the
memory contents.
Global Settings
399
User Manual
Version 3.0
Dependency Management
When this option is disabled, no dependencies (links) are taken
into account at all, neither in Device windows nor Libraries.
For further details on dependency management, refer to the
section Entry Dependency Management on page 218. Default: acti-
vated.
Mouse as Slider
This option determines the way numerical values are altered
with the mouse:
•when activated (default setting): click-hold the value and
alter it by moving the mouse forwards/backwards. If you
double-click the value, a field opens where you can enter a
value manually via the computer keypad.
•when deactivated: one click on the value increases it by one
step and a C-click decreases it.
Fader Tracking
This parameter controls the behaviour of the mouse pointer by
interpolating between short mouse movements and exact edit-
ing. If the distance between minimum and maximum is too
long, or the number of steps is to small, use this feature to
change the sensitivity of the mouse. If you increase the value
for Fader Tracking, a longer mouse-movement will be fulfilled
in order to change a parameter. This especially is useful with
small objects.
The default value is 3.0, which means that the mouse pointer
has to move 300 pixels at least.
If an object is larger or wider than this value—the larger value
of the object is used.
The behaviour of former SoundDiver versions is simulated at a
value of 1.0.
400
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
This parameter does not affect the performance of the wheel of a wheel mouse.
Num Lock
When this is switched on, you can enter numbers via the
number keys on the computer keyboard, instead of switching
screensets.
You can also switch number lock off and on with the Num Lock
key command.
For details see the section Inputting Values via the Keyboard on
page 308.
Don’t mix up Num Lock with Caps Lock. See the section Selecting Entries Using
Names from page 227 onwards.
Deauthorize
This button allows you to remove the SoundDiver authoriza-
tion from the hard disk. The SoundDiver CD is not required
for this task. SoundDiver will continue to run. However, the
next time you launch it you will either have to re-authorize the
drive or keep the SoundDiver CD inserted. Also see the section
Removing an Authorization (Deauthorizing) on page 62.
X
Display Settings
401
User Manual
Version 3.0
12.3 Display Settings
Different Appearance
This option changes the look back to the former layout (Version
2.0). Key command: Toggle look.
Hide Value in Linear Parameters
This option hides the numerical values in the Editor window,
to make this window smoother, as many numbers and separa-
tion lines are hidden. Key command: Toggle Parameter Value
Display.
If this option is active, sliders and knob graphics are displayed
larger, as the numerical values are not shown. Numerical values
are displayed as a knob instead, but only if they are not
accessed as a flip menu, and if they have at least 3 possible
values and are not note number values.
The picture below shows a part of the Editor window of an
EX5—left with active option, right disabled.
X
X
402
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
3D Look
SoundDiver is easier on the eye when this is activated, as
described above. In this case the background, all faders and
knob graphics are displayed with a 3D look, if 256 (or more)
colors are possible.
SoundDiver will operate more quickly with the neutral gray
background and black on white objects.
Sound Effects
SoundDiver has a range of audible signals that announce e.g.
start-up, the appearance of warnings or the completion of a
process. These are enabled here.
Show Progress
When active, SoundDiver shows how a calculation or an input/
output operation is progressing via a progress bar. On Windows
it appears in the status line. This slows the program down a
little, but lets you now know how long you have to wait.
Flicker-free Display
With this option switched on, screen updates are first prepared
in the background and then copied to the screen as a whole.
This results in a smoother appearance, especially while scroll-
ing and operating envelopes and 3D sliders.
Display Settings
403
User Manual
Version 3.0
Flicker free display temporarily needs some memory, depend-
ing on the size of the window and number of colors. If there is
insufficient memory available, the display goes directly to the
screen. At the first occurrence of this problem, you get a warn-
ing message. In this case, you should either switch off flicker-
free display, or (on the Macintosh) give SoundDiver more
memory.
ToolTips
Holding the mouse pointer over an object without moving it for
1 second shows a tool tip window next to the object (normally
below it) which shows the exact name of the object. After 10
seconds (or if the mouse is moved to another object or a key is
pressed), it is closed again. Also see the section The ToolTips on
page 179.
: If Help > Show Balloons is enabled, the tool tip windows open immediately
and are closed only if the mouse pointer is moved to a place where there is no object
which can show a tool tip.
When Pointing on Objects
If this option is enabled, SoundDiver shows ToolTips when the
mouse pointer moves over an object.
While Editing
If this option is enabled, ToolTips are shown in Editor windows
while a parameter is edited.
This option is especially useful when you also disable display of parameter values (see
the section Hide Value in Linear Parameters on page 401.
Language
Using this flip menu, the language can be changed. The
changes take place after a reboot of SoundDiver.
404
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
The setting of the language is loaded from the default “SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences”
file. Staring SoundDiver from another preferences file does not overrule these
settings.
More specific details can be found in the section Language on
page 412.
12.4 Safety Messages
You should only disable the safety messages once you feel
comfortable about operating SoundDiver and you wish to
speed up your work.
Loading Device Entries from Preferences
After the preferences that contain device entries have been
loaded (see the section Save Device Entries in Preferences File on
page 397), the following message appears:
Safety Messages
405
User Manual
Version 3.0
Click OK to overwrite the
memory contents of your
devices. This ensures that
SoundDiver and your devices
are using matching data.
If you don’t need to see it, click
the button No further warnings or disable after loading Device
Entries from Preferences in the preferences.
Saving Preferences
When activated, you will be asked if you want to save prefer-
ences files. Otherwise, preferences files are automatically saved
without notice. This options defaults to being deactivated.
As this switch is saved in the preferences file itself, you have to set it for each pref-
erences file separately if you use several preferences files.
You can still quit SoundDiver without saving the preferences (and without the safety
message) by holding S (: O) or using the key command Quit without saving Pref-
erences.
Overwriting Memory Entries
When activated (default setting), you get a safety message
whenever you do a paste into the Device window or use the
mouse to copy into it,
When deactivated, the safety question appears only when you
use Edit > Paste, and not when you move something with the
mouse.
Deleting Doubles
This option is only relevant if the function Check doubles (on the
Library tab) is active. When active, a safety question appears
whenever an identical entry is found. This allows you to select
whether or not the duplicate entry should be deleted.
When deactivated, the duplicates are deleted without warning.
X
406
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
Editing Unknown Entries
This option determines whether SoundDiver should ask you
whether to create an initialized entry, or request it from the
device when you double-click an empty (unknown) entry.
If this message is disabled, the entry is automatically requested
from the device. If the device cannot be addressed, the entry is
initialized.
Closing Altered Editor Windows
If you have edited an entry in the editor and wish to close the
last Editor window, SoundDiver normally automatically saves
the changes.
If this safety message is active, a dialog appears in which you
can
•OK saving the entry
•select a different target entry for saving
•close the window without saving
•decide not to close the window after all.
When inactive, SoundDiver saves the changes in the source
entry, if it’s available. This can also be a library entry if you
opened the editor from a library.
Overwriting Edited Entries
If you have edited an entry in the editor, but haven’t yet saved
it, it might get overwritten at some stage. This can happen
during an AutoAudition operation, or where you want to open
the Editor window of another entry which is using the same
Edit Buffer. At this point you can decide what SoundDiver
should do.
If Overwriting edited entries is active, a dialog box appears.
Confirm with OK if you want to overwrite the entry. You would
Library
407
User Manual
Version 3.0
then lose all your edits. If you select Cancel, overwriting is
aborted, and you can save your edits at a later time.
When inactive, the edited entry is overwritten without warn-
ing.
Create Logic Instruments
See the section Create Logic Instruments from page 361 onwards.
12.5 Library
Auto-save Libraries Every x min
If you enter a value (x) greater than zero, libraries that have
been edited are regularly saved every x minutes. To disable this
function, enter a zero (displayed as a blank field). If new librar-
ies are involved, you will be asked for a file name. This function
makes your data that much safer.
Several seconds before the auto-save takes place, you will see a
countdown bar. You can continue to work while this bar is
shown.
408
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
This function works on all libraries that contain edits (even the
Snapshot library), even if their windows are closed.
To be quite sure about the safety of your data, set it to 1 min.
Bear in mind though, that the File menu item “Revert” is no longer of much use,
since you can only load the last saved file, whether it was saved automatically or
manually.
Reopen Libraries
On quitting, SoundDiver makes a note of the open libraries in
the Preferences, and automatically opens them when the
program is restarted (or when the Preferences file is reloaded).
If you don’t want this to happen, disable this option.
Check Doubles
If this option is activated, every time you paste into a library,
the program searches to see whether an identical entry is
already present in the target window. If it is, the new duplicate
will be automatically deleted.
Prefer Selected Devices as Target
When activated, devices selected in the Setup window are
preferred, even if there is another device which would be more
suitable for the entries to transmit. This applies to AutoAudi-
tion, Audition and Transmit from within a library window.
Default: deactivated.
Also see the section Device Selection Strategy when Sending from a
Library on page 214.
12.6 Preferences File
SoundDiver allows you to set up the program the way you want
it, and then recall these settings the next time you start the
Preferences File
409
User Manual
Version 3.0
program. To do this, SoundDiver saves all the default settings
in a file.
This option is handy in the case that you need SoundDiver to
adapt to different situations. Let’s assume, for example, that
you use SoundDiver equally between home and the studio
with different MIDI systems in each, or you wish use Sound-
Diver sometimes with one module, sometimes using all your
MIDI devices at the same time.
SoundDiver’s configuration is loaded from the file which you
use to start SoundDiver. You can adapt the program to a differ-
ent system by starting SoundDiver with a suitable Preferences
file. If you start SoundDiver directly, the standard Preferences
will be used (see below).
Contents of the Preferences File
Here is a list of the parameters which are saved in this file and
are recalled at the start of the program:
•all the global settings of the installed devices (i.e. all para-
meters in the device parameter box, as well as special
internal data for each device which is not displayed);
•depending the option Save device entries in Preferences, certain
device entries;
•the icon positions in the Setup window;
•all settings in the sequencer window (tempo of the internal
sequencer, AutoPlay duration);
•the number of the currently selected screensets;
•all settings in the Preferences window;
On WIndows, the currently selected language is saved separately in the Registry. See
the section Language on page 412.
•all settings in the Options menu (AutoPlay, AutoAudition,
MIDI Thru);
410
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
•all settings in the Find window;
•all settings in the Page setup dialog box;
•the model names and data-type names of all modules
(except the universal module);
•the file names (including path) of all the loaded libraries;
•all screensets (without the screensets of libraries, which are
stored within the library file);
•all key commands;
•all settings in the Controller Assignment window;
•all other data that enables the program to run more smoothly.
Creating the Preferences File
When you quit SoundDiver, its current state is saved to disk:
on Windows in the file DIVER\SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences.PRF
and
: in the “Preferences” folder of the Macintosh’s System
Folder as SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences.
To create a new preferences file, use the function File > Save
Preferences as… (see the section Save Preferences as… on page
145) and enter a different file name.
If you now open this file, SoundDiver starts from here and also
saves alterations to its settings in this file (except language as
previously described).
On Windows, SoundDiver launches only when clicking on this
file, if you first have either dragged the file onto the program
icon or assigned the file type PRF to SoundDiver in Windows
Explorer (see the Windows 95/98 manual).
: The selected language is always stored in the default preferences file, even if
SoundDiver is launched with a different preferences file.
Preferences File
411
User Manual
Version 3.0
On WIndows, the currently selected language is saved separately in the Registry. See
the section Language on page 412.
In previous SoundDiver versions, the default preferences file name was “SoundDiver
Preferences”. As this name has changed with version 3.0, it’s possible to start Sound-
Diver 2.X and 3.0 with different settings without changing the other version’s
settings.
If SoundDiver does not find the file “SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences”, the file “Sound-
Diver Preferences” is loaded and saved as “SoundDiver 3.0 Preferences”.
Saving Preferences Automatically
The preferences are automatically saved to disk whenever you
quit SoundDiver. You just need to select File > Quit.
Saving Preferences Manually
Saving Preferences in the Current File
You can save the preferences any time by selecting File > Save
Preferences (see the section Save Preferences on page 145).
Save Preferences under a Different File Name
To create a new Preferences file, invoke File > Save Prefs as….
Don’t forget that during an automatic or manual save (see
above) this file will be overwritten.
Spending a quarter of an hour or so setting up SoundDiver to suit your taste with
the help of the above list is a very good idea. Make your default settings, lay out the
Setup window and the other windows, create an Autoload library and a few
screensets and then save all these preferences.
Loading Preferences
Even in the middle of working, you can load other prefer-
ences—for example those of a colleague—by selecting File >
Open, and SoundDiver is immediately reconfigured.
X
X
X
412
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
: New preferences can also be loaded by a simple double-
click on their icon.
A message will ask you whether you want to save the existing
preferences first.
Rebuild the Content of the Install Window
SoundDiver saves the contents of the Install window in a cache
file within the preferences file. If this cache is incomplete or
corrupt, SoundDiver can be forced to reload the content.
When loading a preference file with S held down, SoundDiver
will ignore the cached model and data type names and reload all
Modules when opening the Install window.
Reload Icons
When loading preferences and while holding ç (: C), the
cached icon images are ignored.
This is useful if a module holds new graphics which you want to
update. Also see the section Import New Icons on page 195.
Reset Preferences
To reset all preference settings, select Options > Initialize > All
Preferences except Commands. Also see the section Initializ-
ing Key or MIDI Event Assignments on page 93.
Language
SoundDiver can select the language (currently only English or
German) independent of the keyboard layout.
At the first start, you are asked which language to use. Auto
assigns the language to match that of the keyboard layout.
Later, the language can be changed in the Preferences menu
under Global settings. This however requires a restart of
SoundDiver.
Preferences File
413
User Manual
Version 3.0
Windows: The language selection is stored in the Registry
under:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE:Software:Emagic:SoundDiver:Locale
414
Chapter 12
The Preferences
Emagic
SoundDiver
Differences of Key Commands
415
User Manual
Version 3.0
Key Commands
The following tables list SoundDiver’s Windows, Macintosh
and Atari key commands. To help you find a key command
speedily, the tables are arranged by window, and, within the
window, alphabetically by key command.
A.1 Differences of Key Commands
If you might operate SoundDiver on a different platform, here
you find a list of the differences of the key commands.
These differences apply to most of the default key commands. As they are user-
definable, your settings may be different.
çS on Windows corresponds to CO on the Macintosh. This corresponds to the
Macintosh convention where O, not S is used to modify another key. However,
Windows do not recommend the use of çA so as to avoid combinations such as
çA∂ that would reset the computer.
The “NumLock function” (~ on the Macintosh) switches the
mode of the numeric keypad. If it’s on, you can enter values via
the numeric keypad. If it’s off, you can use these keys for choos-
ing the screen sets and for controlling the sequencer.
If you are operating SoundDiver under M•ROS, commands
çS-@…¯ are not valid as they are reserved for M•ROS
partition-switching.
Operation Windows Macintosh
key command ç-character C-character
modified key command çS-character CO-character
scroll by page PageU, PageN U, N
upper left resp. lower right corner Û, ˙ ª, ¬
Appendix A
416
Appendix A
Key Commands
Emagic
SoundDiver
A.2 Key Commands
Here you get an overview of the fixed key commands.
You find the list of the user-definable key commands in the Key
Commands window (see section Key Commands Window from
page 88).
Windows Macintosh Operation
All windows
™ ™, C… Abort MIDI communication
@— Open relevant On-line Help window for
context-sensitive assistance
B B Clear
“ ~ NumLock on/off
1…9 1…øRecall screensets 1…9
A1…
A9
ç1…
çø
(twice) Recall screensets 11…99
S1…
S9
S1…
Sø
Store current screenset as screenset 1…9
SA1…
SA9
Sç1…
Sçø
(twice) Store current screenset as
screenset 11…99
!…) !…)Recall screenset 1…9 (NumLock on)
A!…
A)
ç!…
ç)
(twice) Recall screenset 11…99 (Num-
Lock on)
S!…
S)
S!…
S)
Store current screenset as screenset 1…9
(NumLock on)
SA!…
SA)
Sç!…
Sç)
(twice) Store current screenset as screen
set 11…99 (NumLock on)
Library, Setup, Install, Device
a…z a…zSelect object that begins with the typed
character(s) (Caps Lock enabled)
T T Select next object in the alphabetical
order
ST ST Select previous object in the alphabetical
order
Key Commands
417
User Manual
Version 3.0
SI SI Extend selection by object above
SM SM Extend selection by object below
Library window
I I Select previous entry
M M Select next entry
SI and
SM
SI and
SM
Extend selection by previous/next entry
SU and
SN
SU and
SN
Extend selection by one page
SÛ and
S˙
Sª and
S˙
Extend selection to beginning/end
Install
I/M I /MCursor up/down
SI and
SM
SI and
SM
Extend selection by previous/next model
SU and
SN
SU and
SN
Extend selection by one page
SÛ and
S˙
Sª and
S˙
Extend selection to beginning/end
@—Open Help window for installing selected
device
™ ™ Close window
Setup window
çSs COs Store all edits
R R Open Device window for selected
devices
IMJK IMJK Select device in given direction
SI and
SM
SI and
SM
Extend selection by previous/next device
SJ and
SK
SJ and
SK
Extend selection by left/right device (icon
view only)
Windows Macintosh Operation
418
Appendix A
Key Commands
Emagic
SoundDiver
Device window
IMJK IMJK Select next entry in given direction
SI and
SM
SI and
SM
Extend selection by entry above/below
SJ and
SK
SJ and
SK
Extend selection by entry to the left
Find window
™ ™ Close window
R R Start Find
Help window
IM IM One line up/down
Dialog boxes
™ ™, Cz,
SR, SE
“Cancel” or “Abort” button
R, E R, Ebutton with enlarged borders
@ H Help button
a…z a…zthe button that begins with that letter
Editor
IMJK IMJK Select next parameter
=…) =…)Input value (NumLock on)
Windows Macintosh Operation
Key Commands
419
User Manual
Version 3.0
Using the Mouse
Windows Macintosh Operation
Click on object if object already selected: no change
otherwise: selects object, deselects all others
ç-click S-click Toggles selection of objects
S-click ç-click selects block (block end; previous click defines block
start)
—C-click in Library/Device window: as click, but with toggled
AutoAudition (e.g. without AutoAudition if it had
been enabled)
Double click Setup: opens or activates Device window
Install window: scans device
Device/Library: opens editor
Editor: opens “enter value” window
Click + drag Moves or copies selected objects.
Library: Within the library, moves objects Dragging
to another library or to a device copies the entries
Device window: Within the device: swaps the entries
Dragging to another device or library copies the
entries
S-Click + drag Editor: copy parameter group
A-click + drag O-click + drag Within a Device window: duplicates selected entries
Click on background + drag rubber band: selects objects within or touched by it,
deselects others
S-click on background + drag rubber band: toggles selection of objects within or
touched by it
Appendix B
420
Appendix B
Using the Mouse
Emagic
SoundDiver
General
421
User Manual
Version 3.0
Troubleshooting
This chapter gives the answers to the most frequent queries
that arise through working with SoundDiver.
Please don’t forget the “SoundDiver Readme” file on the pro-
gram CD, containing answers to the latest queries.
C.1 General
What SoundDiver version do I have?
•Start SoundDiver: at startup, the SoundDiver info window
(“splash screen”) is shown. At the right bottom the exact ver-
sion number and date when this version was created is
shown. You can open the info window also while Sound-
Diver is running.
•: Click the SoundDiver program icon once in the Finder
and choose menu item “Get Info” in the File menu.
•Windows: Click the file “SoundDiver.EXE” in Windows
Explorer with the right mouse button and choose “Proper-
ties” in the appearing context menu. Click the tab “Ver-
sion”.
What version does a specific SoundDiver module have?
Activate a corresponding device in the Setup window and click
the module’s name right to “Module” in the device parameter
box. A dialog appears which shows the module name, version
number, release number, creation date and a copyright note.
Appendix C
422
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
Please note that the release number is not incremented at every
small improvement. It is advisable to simply look up the file
modification date.
What version does a specific SoundDiver adaptation
have?
Adaptation don’t have version numbers. Simply check the file
date.
How do I get hold of the latest versions of SoundDiver?
•If you have Internet access, go fish on our WWW site:
http://www.emagic.de
•Please contact Emagic or your countries Emagic distributor.
How do I get hold of new adaptations?
You can get these and new libraries in the Internet as well.
I have created an Adaptation on my own. How can I
share it with other SoundDiver users?
Please send an email to info@emagic.de.
I get a message “Text not found. Check Text Resource for
ID 'xx'”
This means that a text resource is missing in SoundDiver or one
of its modules. Please inform us about this (send an email an
support@emagic.de). This problem is not serious, only the text
to be displayed is shown as “Text not found”.
General
423
User Manual
Version 3.0
: I get a message “SoundDiver is about to terminate un-
expectedly. Try to save your files. It’s better to not over-
write the existing files. Please report how this occurred.
Email: support@emagic.de—Don’t save—Save”. What
am I supposed to do?
SoundDiver has crashed due to a software bug. This ought not
happen of course but—nobody’s perfect. To prevent you from
data loss, you can save the opened and edited libraries, adapta-
tions and preferences in new files after clicking “Save”. For
each of these files, you get a file selection box.
You should not overwrite the existing files—it is likely that the
opened files cannot be saved properly because of the crash.
Thus choose a file name like “My Library—crash recovery”.
Please send a bug report to support@emagic.de. Please don’t
forget to state:
•SoundDiver version (and, if AutoLink is used, Logic ver-
sion)
•computer model, operating system version
•MIDI interface model, driver version (if a driver is used)
•a precise description of the operations you did immediately
before the crash occurred. Try to reproduce the crash. Some-
times a crash cannot be provoked a second time—in this case
it’s hard to track down the bug.
: I get a message “Memory is tight for flicker-free draw-
ing. Please increase partition size, use lower screen color
resolution, or switch off “flicker-free redraws” in the
Preferences.”
Flicker-free drawing temporarily needs a lot of memory. The
amount depends on the window’s size and how many colors the
screen is currently able to show. If you want flicker-free draw-
ing, you should allocate more memory to SoundDiver (select its
424
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
icon in the Finder, open the Info window with Ci and change
“Preferred size”).
C.2 Installation
Windows: After installing a MIDI driver in Windows 95,
there is a crash in MMSYSTEM.DLL.
This is a known problem in Windows 95 and occurs when you
try to install more than 11 MIDI ports which may happen when
you want to use two networked MIDI Time Pieces.
This is not a bug in the MIDI drivers or SoundDiver, but in
Windows 95. This bug has been fixed in Windows 98. Please
use Windows 98 or newer.
How do I install new versions of module or adaptation
files which I have downloaded from the Internet?
1. Quit SoundDiver
2. Make sure that the file is unpacked.
: The files are packed in StuffIt 5.0 format. Older StuffIt versions can’t handle this
format. We recommend to use the free StuffIt Expander 5.5 or newer.
Windows: Make sure that the used unpacking tool is aware of long file names.
WinZip version 6.0 or higher, VisualZIP and Aladdin Expander are suitable; unsuitable
are PKZIP and StuffIt Expander 1.0.
3. Move the file into the folder “Diver” which is located in
the same folder as the SoundDiver application file.
4. Run SoundDiver. The new version is automatically used.
5. If the Module offers new supported models, they might not
yet be shown in the Install window. In this case, simply
install another device supported by the module (causing
the module to be loaded), and the list will be updated.
Startup
425
User Manual
Version 3.0
C.3 Startup
Windows: At startup, I get an error “MMSYSTEM020”.
A faulty MIDI driver is installed. The name of the affected
MIDI port is shown in the title bar of the error message. Please
contact the manufacturer of the MIDI interface.
You can configure SoundDiver to ignore the offending driver.
See section How to Block MIDI Ports (Windows:) from page 82.
Windows: At startup, SoundDiver crashes or hangs.
Again, a faulty MIDI driver is probably the cause of the prob-
lem. See above.
I get an error message “File not found.”
Probably SoundDiver tried to open a library file which has
moved. Don’t worry. Simply reopen the desired library, and the
next startup will work flawlessly.
I get a message “Entries for device “x” have been saved
using a different version of SoundDiver Module “y”.
Loading them with the current Module might lead to
wrong data. Load them nevertheless?—Cancel—Skip—
Load
During the development and enhancement of SoundDiver
modules, it is sometimes necessary to change the internal order
of entries. To speed up loading, a device entry is saved in the
preferences file with an internal counter, not the full memory
location statement. The message gives a hint that the internal
order might have changed. After clicking “Load”, you should
first check if all data is loaded to the correct memory locations.
426
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
If not (or if the names are not shown correctly), you should re-
request the data from the device, just to go sure.
C.4 Scanning
Scanning doesn’t find some devices.
•Is the device switched on and correctly connected in both
directions?
•Does the device process SysEx messages?
•Some devices react incorrectly when their device ID is set to
“omni” or “all”. Change the device ID to a different value.
•Check that compatible devices are set to different IDs. This
also applies to devices that are quite different, but support
the Universal Device Inquiry.
•Patchbays that are not supported by a special module cannot
be fully scanned by SoundDiver. Only the current setting of
the patchbay is scanned. Program your patchbay such that as
many outputs as possible (except those to the computer) are
patched to the input from the computer, and that as many in-
puts as possible (except those from the computer) are pat-
ched to the input to the computer. Now do a Scan and insert,
for the found device, the current Program number of the
patchbay in the “Patchbay Prg” parameter, together with the
other relevant parameters (see section Patchbay Program on
page 204).
•You may be using a patchbay or Thru box that is delaying the
MIDI data. If this is the case, increase the value of the “Ad-
ditional Timeout” parameter in the Preferences.
MIDI Communication
427
User Manual
Version 3.0
When I scan a patchbay, I get the message “No patchbay
connection found”.
Follow the advice in the Help file (key words “Installation” and
“Scan”) on which of the patchbay’s ports the computer should
be connected, and how the patchbay should be configured.
Some patchbays (e.g. the MIDITEMP PMM-44/88) don’t re-
act to SysEx on the “Control Input” but on every input for
which a connection to an output has been defined. However, as
soon as SoundDiver starts scanning and sends a SysEx message
that reprograms the patchbay, the connection could be broken
and the patchbay remains mute. If the “Control Inputs” have
been incorrectly set, you may have a situation where the patch-
bay begins to react, but SoundDiver can no longer determine to
which inputs and outputs the computer is connected.
C.5 MIDI Communication
: I get the message “The Modem/Printer Port is used by
another program, LocalTalk or ARA”
Check whether another program is using the port in question. It
might be a modem terminal program, or fax software. The mo-
dem or printer ports must be free before SoundDiver is started.
Tip: if you use FaxSTF you can very quickly free-up the port
using the program “Fax State” that comes with the program.
If AppleTalk is active and is running over LocalTalk (this will
always be the case so long as you don’t have EtherNet), the
printer port is reserved. You may find it wise to disable Apple-
Talk before starting SoundDiver.
428
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
: I get the message “MIDI data could not be sent…”
SoundDiver could not find a MIDI interface on this port. Fol-
low the advice in section Modem Port/Printer Port on page 388.
I sometimes get transmission or checksum errors.
•: AppleTalk must be disabled. AppleTalk interferes with
MIDI, and this becomes apparent with SysEx communicati-
ons.
•: The Printer Port of PowerBook models (especially of the
1xx series) is not reliable. Use the Modem Port instead.
•If the device sometimes fails to react to requests, increase
the “Timeout” parameter.
•If the device sometimes fails to receive a Dump, increase the
“Send Pause” parameter.
•: It is just conceivable that unmounted SCSI drives (e.g.
CD-ROM, removable hard disk or MO) might interfere with
MIDI as the drive is continually looking to see whether a
media is present. Insert the media. Or switch off the drive
and restart the Macintosh.
•: The PowerBook models of the 1xx series (except the Po-
werBook 190) have a common problem when receiving large
amounts of data at the serial ports. This can currently only be
fixed with OMS 2.2 or newer. You should use SoundDiver in
OMS mode (see section OMS on page 74).
When I send dumps to a device, it does not receive them
(possibly a message “memory protected” appears in the
display).
Some devices (above all Yamaha devices) switch on memory
protection by default at power-up. For those devices, Sound-
Diver has a function “Auto Bulk Protect Off” which you can
MIDI Communication
429
User Manual
Version 3.0
find in the “special parameters”. This function however has an
effect only if SoundDiver is started after all devices have been
switched on. So always first switch on the devices, then start
SoundDiver.
I get the message “SysEx communication error”
This can have various causes.
Here’s how to identify the problem.
•First click “Abort” to put SoundDiver in “normal operation”
again.
Note: each time you found a potential error source, and the
data transfer still doesn’t work, you should restart trouble shoot-
ing at step 1 again.
1. Does the device transmit data?
Try to find out if the device transmits the desired data at all.
Some devices signal this in the display. If you can’t see any ac-
tivity there, watch the MIDI In LED of the MIDI interface, if
any.
Very useful is a MIDI analyzer. Recommended: Studiomaster
MA-36
•Yes: continue with item 8 on page 431.
•No:
2. Is the device in the correct mode?
Some devices (e.g. Roland JD-800) can transmit data of a cer-
tain type only if they are in the appropriate mode (e.g. the JD-
880 can transmit Performances only in Performance mode). All
Modules and Adaptations try—if possible—to change the de-
vice mode automatically. However, some devices don’t allow to
change the mode via MIDI. In this case, you will find a note in
the help file. Or the device did not receive the mode change
message for another reason.
430
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
•No: put the device in the appropriate mode.
•Yes:
3. Does the device have the requested data at all?
Card entries of course can only requested if a card is inserted.
•No: then the data cannot be requested.
Solution: insert a card, or switch off the card in the “Special Pa-
rameters”.
•Yes:
4. Does the device recognize SysEx messages?
Some devices don’t have SysEx recognition activated by de-
fault. However, in this case the scan function should have failed
before.
•No: the device must be able to recognize SysEx messages.
Solution: consult the SoundDiver help file, page “Installa-
tion” as well as the devices’ user manual. The desired parame-
ter can be found in the “System” or “Global” data in most
cases.
Some devices (e.g. Ensoniq ESQ-1) deactivate SysEx at each
power-up. Then you must activate SysEx each time.
•Yes:
5. Does the Device ID match?
When the device has been scanned by SoundDiver, the Device
ID should be correct. But maybe it has been changed in the de-
vice by a reset or a crash.
•No: reconcile the Device ID with the one in SoundDiver.
Solution: find out the device’s ID and set the same value in
SoundDiver’s Device Parameter box.
Most devices count the Device ID from 1, however others from
0 or 17. This is taken into account by SoundDiver.
MIDI Communication
431
User Manual
Version 3.0
Tip: avoid settings like “all” or “omni” in the device.
•Yes:
6. Is the Output and cable number correct?
Probably you have changed the MIDI cabling and forgot to tell
this SoundDiver. Or you have installed the device manually
and not with the Scan function and forgot to adjust these set-
tings.
•No: set the correct output and/or cable.
•Yes:
7. Is the MIDI cabling from the computer output to the
device’s input correct?
Check the MIDI cabling. Have you really plugged the cable
into the device’s In and not the Out jack? Is the connector
tight? Maybe the cable is defect or has a loose connection.
•No: Correct the cabling. Try out a different, short MIDI ca-
ble.
•Yes: Either the device has an old software version which is
not compatible with the SoundDiver Module resp. Adapta-
tion (e.g. Ensoniq TS-10 V1.x), or there is a software bug in
the Module or Adaptation.
Solution: please contact the device’s distributor and/or
Emagic. It is useful if you have done a test run with the MIDI
Monitor window opened, so that we can check the transmitted
request message.
8. Does the computer receive MIDI?
You can check this in two ways:
Open the Sequencer window. If data is arriving, a bar is appear-
ing instead of “NO IN”, with an X to the left (if SysEx data is
arriving).
Open the MIDI In window. Incoming data is shown as hexa-
decimal numbers.
432
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
•Yes: continue with item 12 on page 433.
•No:
9. Is there a MIDI patchbay or an “intelligent” MIDI
interface between the device and the computer?
(the latter includes devices like Motu MIDI Time Piece or Op-
code Studio 4/5)
•Yes: then the patchbay is setup incorrectly.
Solution: first try to find out if the dump is arriving in the
patchbay. You will notice by an input LED, or you can activate
a monitor or EYE mode. If data is arriving at the patchbay, it is
setup incorrectly. Adjust the patchbay so that there is a connec-
tion from the device to the computer, with nothing (especially
not SysEx) filtered out.
SoundDiver does this automatically with supported patchbays
(at this time Miditemp PMM-44/88, Roland A-880, Waldorf
Midibay, J.L.Cooper Synapse, and Ensoniq KMX-8/16). If it
still doesn’t work, a program error exists. Please contact
Emagic.
•No:
10. : Is the corresponding computer port setup
correctly?
Open the Preferences, page “Communication”. Is the corre-
sponding port activated? Does “Fast Mode” match with the in-
terface’s setting? Is “Cable Mode” activated, as far as you use
an MTP compatible MIDI interface?
•No: configure the port correctly. Possibly the interface has
crashed. To make sure, switch the interface off and back on,
and set Fast Mode and Cable Mode accordingly.
To be able to transmit and receive MIDI data, the computer’s
port must be activated. Normally, SoundDiver complains im-
mediately if it is not able to send data, or at startup if no ports
are activated.
MIDI Communication
433
User Manual
Version 3.0
•Yes:
11. There is no MIDI connection from the device’s
output to the computer.
Solution: check the MIDI cabling. Have you really plugged
the cable into the device’s In and not the Out jack? Is the con-
nector tight? Maybe the cable is defect or has a loose connec-
tion.
Some devices like Lexicon LXP-1 or LXP-5 have a combined
Out/Thru jack which must be switched to Out mode with a
switch in the device’s inside or at the back panel. You will find
an appropriate note in the help file.
12. Does data sometimes arrive incorrectly?
This means that names are shifted by one or two characters, or
strange characters appear.
•Yes:
Windows: the MIDI driver does probably not work correctly.
Solution: Try to get an updated driver from the manufacturer,
or use a different MIDI interface.
: AppleTalk is probably enabled.
Solution: switch off AppleTalk in the “Chooser” window.
LocalTalk-based AppleTalk does not go with the reception of
large data amounts at a serial port, as it sometimes prevents that
incoming bytes are read so that it is “overrun”. If you really
need network functions, you should consider to upgrade from
LocalTalk to EtherTalk. Please ask you Apple dealer for de-
tails.
•No:
13. Does an active dump work?
Try to transmit the desired data manually from the device.
Does SoundDiver show the transmitted data now?
434
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
•Yes: continue with item 15 on page 434.
•No:
14. Is the device’s ID set to “all” or “omni”?
•Yes: this setting cannot be used with SoundDiver. Most
SoundDiver Modules give you a note in this case.
Solution: set a different Device ID at the device. Don’t forget
to provide the same setting in SoundDiver.
The setting “all” means that the device answers to all requests
(no matter which Device ID they used), however sends its own
dumps with device ID 1 or 128. This can lead to conflicts.
•No: then the MIDI cable from the device’s output to the
computer’s input is broken.
15. Do you have several devices which are SysEx
compatible?
This can even be several devices of the same model row, like
TX802 and DX7 or SD-1 and VFX.
•Yes: then several devices are reacting simultaneously what
SoundDiver cannot recognize, since SysEx incoming simul-
taneously is not merged correctly.
Solution: Make sure that all compatible devices use different
device IDs (don’t forget to make the same changes in Sound-
Diver). If this is not possible, you must connect the devices to
different computer outputs.
Some older devices (e.g. Yamaha DX7, TX816) always transmit
on ID 1 although they are set to a different channel. The DX7
Module is aware of this fact. For further details, see the DX7
help file.
•No: then the Timeout is too short.
Solution: increase the parameter “Timeout” in the Device Pa-
rameter box. It’s ok to increase it by 1000 ms; in this case you’re
only “punished” by a longer pause if the device doesn’t answer.
Library
435
User Manual
Version 3.0
This case can occur if patchbays or MIDI interfaces are in-
serted which cause a significant delay of the MIDI data, or if
the software of your device reacts slowlier than that with which
the Module or Adaptation was developed. In the first case, you
should increase the parameter “Additional timeout” in the
Preferences instead, since this delay applies to all devices.
Every time I activate a certain device, a program is re-
called in this or another device unnecessarily.
You have defined a “Patchbay PRG” for this device, but did not
adjust the MIDI channel accordingly. This MIDI channel may
only be used by the patchbay to be switched. If the device is
connected to the computer, using “Patchbay PRG” is not nec-
essary and only produces unwanted delays.
C.6 Library
I have several presets from two similar devices (e.g. E-
mu Proteus 1 and Proteus 2) and with different device
IDs in one library. When I click them with AutoAudition
activated, they are always sent to the same device.
If you don’t want that, make sure that no device is selected in
the Setup window before you click an entry. Alternatively you
can switch off “Prefer selected devices as target” in the prefer-
ences (see section Prefer Selected Devices as Target on page 408).
436
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
C.7 Device Window
I can’t find a certain Card or ROM bank.
Open the “Special parameters”. Possibly you have to activate
the desired bank manually first. This is the case for all adapta-
tions, as adaptations (in contrary to modules) cannot find out
automatically which banks exist in the device.
If there is no switch for the desired bank, the bank is not sup-
ported by SoundDiver because the device does not know the
necessary SysEx commands. A possible workaround is to select
the bank’s sounds at the device’s front panel one by one and af-
terwards request the edit buffer in SoundDiver. You can easily
create a library of this bank by using the function “Append to
Library” (see section Append to Library on page 234).
When “AutoAudition” is activated, the clicked entries
are transmitted to the device’s edit buffer, but nothing
or a different sound is heard.
In adaptations for multi-timbral devices, the MIDI thru chan-
nel is not switched to the corresponding channel automatically.
You have to do that manually in the device parameter box. See
section Thru Channel on page 202.
This problem can also occur when it’s possible to adjust the
MIDI channels of a Multi’s (Combi’s, Performance’s) parts in-
dividually, but SoundDiver does currently not know this Multi.
Then SoundDiver cannot know which Thru channel has to be
set. Solution: request the Edit Multi (Edit Combi, Temporary
Performance).
Editor
437
User Manual
Version 3.0
C.8 Editor
What does a particular parameter do, and how do I use
it?
Click the parameter and choose Window > Help to make a Help
window appear giving information on that parameter.
And what does “No help available” mean in the Help
window?
It means that there’s no Help file yet for this adaptation. Please
contact Emagic or the adaptation’s author.
I cannot grab an envelope point (it lies outside the
frame).
In this situation a little arrow appears that points to it. Click the
arrow.
I can’t see an envelope point, although the envelope is
completely visible.
This can happen if two points coincide. Possible reasons:
•the time duration between two point is zero
•for some devices (e.g. Roland D-50), a segment of the enve-
lope is omitted if two points have the same level value.
Simply drag away the visible point, then the other hidden one
will appear.
X
438
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
When I use the knobs or sliders I can’t get a particular
value because the mouse movement is too coarse.
Hold down ç while moving the mouse. Or click the parameter
so it flashes and enter the value via the numeric keypad and/or
and _.
Opening a flip-menu takes too long.
Press ç when clicking and move the mouse up or down.
I cannot enter any numbers.
Activate “Num Lock” (see section Inputting Values via the Key-
board from page 308), and enter the number with the numeric
keypad.
With some parameters I get incorrect or too few values;
some parameters aren’t even visible.
•Has the correct model been installed/scanned?
•Does the module support that particular model?
I cannot hear what I’m editing.
•Has the device been set to a different mode by mistake?
•Possibly the entry being edited must first be activated in a
different editor (e.g. for Pans, Tuning Tables, Wavetables,
Waves etc.). Some modules however have a specific “Moni-
toring” mode for this purpose.
•If the device is connected to a patchbay, and for the patchbay
a “Standard PRG” is defined, this program must include a
connection from the computer to the device being edited.
•Some devices crash if they receive rapid successions of para-
meter change messages. However, the modules and adapta-
Editor
439
User Manual
Version 3.0
tions have been suited to this behavior. You may find it use-
ful to increase the “Send Pause” parameter.
•The MIDI thru channel may not be correct. Modules can ad-
just it automatically, however it may be necessary that the
edit buffers for Multis or Combis and/or the Global Data or
System Settings have been received. Further information
can be found in the on-line help.
“Paste” is not possible
The types of source and destination parameter group do not
agree. They sometimes look similar, but can contain small dif-
ferences.
When changing Edit Buffers I get a message about press-
ing a key.
Either this is a particularity of the device, or SoundDiver does
not know which version your device is and thus assumes it’s the
oldest version.
Later versions of some devices have new SysEx features that
can be used by the module only if the module knows that the
device is of this later version. This device must be installed
through scanning (not manually).
I cannot find a particular parameter.
Some parameters appear only if SoundDiver knows for sure
that the device also knows them. SoundDiver can tell this by
looking at the device’s software version number. For Sound-
Diver to know the version number, the device must be in-
stalled via “Scan” (not manually). Look in the Device Parame-
ter box to see if that particular version is supported.
440
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
When I edit a single parameter, all the Easy Page para-
meters are set to 0.
This is a requirement of the program for technical reasons, and
is quite normal.
C.9 AutoLink
: When started, Logic announces “The Modem/Printer
Port is used by another Program”.
Logic tries to access the serial ports before SoundDiver gets to
know that Logic has been started and therefore releases the
ports. This is why it is advisable to always start Logic first, then
SoundDiver. If you happen to start the programs in the oppo-
site order, click “Cancel” in the appearing error message, wait
for the AutoLink signal tone (“plop!”) and reactivate the ports
in Logic’s preferences.
A device’s sound names are shown blank or incorrect.
See the advice given in section If AutoLink Doesn’t Work… on
page 364.
Logic sends everything out of the same output, regard-
less of what I set in SoundDiver.
You are probably using Logic in OMS mode. If you want to use
AutoLink and OMS simultaneously, you must activate OMS in
SoundDiver as well. See section Communication with Logic in
OMS Mode on page 77 and section Use OMS if Available on
page 393.
AutoLink
441
User Manual
Version 3.0
MIDI Thru cannot be switched on or off; the MIDI Thru
channel and port are not set correctly.
You need SoundDiver Version 1.505 upwards and Logic Version
2.5 upwards.
When I record SysEx from SoundDiver into Logic, the de-
vice doesn’t recognize it.
SoundDiver is normally able to tell Logic exactly which port
and cable are to be used to send a MIDI message. This is not
possible during recording. Instead, during Record mode, all
data is sent via the Instrument of the current track. It therefore
has to be set correctly.
442
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
Emagic
SoundDiver
AutoLink
443
User Manual
Version 3.0
Glossary
This glossary explains the most common SoundDiver terms.
3D look A three-dimensional-look of background patterns,
sliders and knobs to SoundDiver’s displays.
Active device The device whose parameters are currently
shown in the Setup window’s device parameter box. MIDI thru
is always set to the ~ (except there is a →Patchbay Standard
Program or “Preserve Thru port/ch” is enabled). When activat-
ing a Device or editor window, the appropriate device is auto-
matically activated.
Adaptation A file within SoundDiver that allows the data of
a device to be managed. Adaptations run within the Universal
Module and are user-creatable and editable.
All Notes Off A MIDI command that switches off droning
notes on all channels.
Audition To send one or more entries to a device’s →edit
buffer, so that it can be auditioned.
Authorization The installation of SoundDiver’s copy-pro-
tection onto hard disk; also, the name for the copy-protection
file itself.
AutoAudition Automatically sends a selected entry to the
device’s appropriate →edit buffer (see also →Audition).
AutoLink The internal connection between →Logic and
SoundDiver. AutoLink is used in the direct exchange of sound
names and MIDI data between the two programs.
Autoload library The library file called “Autoload.lib” (:
“Autoload”) and which has to be in the “Libraries” folder for it
to be auto-loaded when the program is started.
Appendix D
444
Appendix D
Glossary
Emagic
SoundDiver
AutoPlay The function that sends a test note to the MIDI
device whenever an entry is selected.
Auto Request The function that automatically requests the
memory contents from the connected devices when Sound-
Diver is first started.
AutoSort The library function that auto-sorts the library af-
ter every alteration to the contents.
AutoSurf Previously used term for →AutoAudition
Bank A certain number of →entries of the same →data type
Card Memory card used by synthesizers, etc. to store →entry
data
Child Entry →Entry to which other entries (→parent en-
tries) have a dependency
Clipboard The part of the computer memory that’s used dur-
ing Cut, Copy and Paste operations.
Compare A comparison function: by swapping between the
original and edited versions you are able to check the progress
of your editing.
Controlled parameter A parameter in a SoundDiver editor
which can be controlled by using a →Controller Assignment.
Controller A control on a →fader box which generates a cer-
tain MIDI message
Controller Assignment A record which defines the remote
control of a parameter.
Controller Assignment Set A set of →Controller Assign-
ments which can be activated
Controller message The MIDI message generated by a
→controller
Conversion The transformation of sounds from one device
into the format of a different, yet related, device. For instance,
AutoLink
445
User Manual
Version 3.0
SoundDiver modules automatically and intelligently convert
DX7 sounds into those for a SY77.
Copy protection A necessary evil that is there to protect the
authors’ intellectual property by preventing the cloning and
duplication of a computer program by unscrupulous thieves.
SoundDiver’s copy-protection is programmed into the original
CD and can be transferred to a hard disk (→Authorization).
Cursor The high-lighting that marks an on-screen object as
ready for editing—takes the form of an arrow, block or color-in-
version; the blinking border around a parameter.
Data consistence in SoundDiver: the similarity between a
Device window and the memory contents of its corresponding
device (automatically controlled by SoundDiver).
Data type Class or kind of an →entry. Depeding on manu-
facturer and device, data types may be called “Multi”,
“Combi”, “Performance”, “Program”, “Performance”, “Global
Settings” etc.
Default The preset or first settings that appear in the pro-
gram—can normally be changed by the user.
Dependency list A display in →Library and →Device win-
dows showing the various dependencies of an entry to →child
entries (“uses…”) and from →parent entries (“is used by…”).
Detailed display A viewing mode in the → Editor in which
parameters are shown in detail. → Overview.
Device A MIDI synthesizer or sampler or other MIDI hard-
ware (patchbay, effect unit) that is supported by a SoundDiver
module or adaptation.
Dialog box An input box that requires a decision by the user
(yes, no, choice of options). The default choice (normally the
safest or most logical one) has an enlarged border and can be se-
lected using R. Not a true window.
Dive ! Previously used term for →Edit.
446
Appendix D
Glossary
Emagic
SoundDiver
Dump Request The MIDI command sent by the receiving
device, requesting a transmission of System Exclusive data.
This allows a device to be “milked” of its data by an outside de-
vice or program such as SoundDiver.
Duplication The copying of an object—such as a Device en-
try—within a window.
Easy Page Forms part of the → Overview in the → Editor.
The ~ contains a selection of the main sound parameters that
provide “instant gratification” in sound editing.
Edit In Library and Device window: to open an editor win-
dow of one or several editor windows. Every ~ contains an
→Audition.
Edit Buffer A temporary memory in a device, used for edit-
able data such as sounds or multis.
Editor A SoundDiver window showing the sound and pro-
gram parameters of a device in graphic and alphanumeric de-
tail, where entries can be edited.
Entry The name given to a packet of data from a device (e.g.
sound, multi, system-related data, drum kit).
Entry Dependency Management Used to be called “Item
Link Management”; a SoundDiver function that controls the
inter-dependency or cross-referencing of entries. The ~ modi-
fies e.g. a Multi-Program when its sounds are moved to differ-
ent locations within the Devices.
Fader box A device which transmits MIDI messages and
thus initiates a →Controller Assignment.
Patchbay module The module for a →Fader box; it con-
tains special functions for →Controller Assignments.
Flip-menu A list of choices that appears when the appropri-
ate field is click-held—moving the mouse highlights the vari-
ous choices, and releasing the mouse button activates the last
choice to be selected and makes the list disappear.
AutoLink
447
User Manual
Version 3.0
Grab To click-hold an object—e.g. prior to dragging it.
Help →On-line Help
Icon A graphical on-screen symbol that represents an object
(e.g. a device).
Identity number (also called Device ID, Device Number,
Unit Number, Basic Channel): a device’s unique registration
number that allows its SysEx data to be distinguished from that
of the other devices in the system. Depending on the device,
the ID can be set separately from the basic MIDI channel.
Import To load the files from other programs directly into a
SoundDiver library.
Incoming value The value which is transmitted within an
incoming →controller message.
Initialize To reset (to zero or other default values) an entry’s
(sound, program) parameters.
Initializing The process whereby an entry’s parameters are
set to neutral or zero values. Many MIDI devices include an
initialization function.
Installation The operation whereby SoundDiver and its files
(modules, adaptations) are copied to a disk other than the orig-
inal CD using the Installer program. The installation should be
carried out using the Installer program, as this ensures that the
data is correctly placed.
Install window The ~ is where SoundDiver manages the
devices that are required for the Setup. This is where Sound-
Diver modules and adaptations are installed onto hard disk and
models of device added or removed.
Key commands The combination of a normal computer
key and one or more →modifier keys to carry out a particular
function. They are used as an alternative to mouse operations.
Library A SoundDiver file that can contain all kinds of data
(sounds, setups, edit buffers) from all kinds of device. The size
448
Appendix D
Glossary
Emagic
SoundDiver
of the file is limited only by the capacity of the computer’s
RAM. The contents of a library can be sorted using certain cri-
teria, and specific entries can be specified and searched for us-
ing the Find function.
Link function The function that automatically keeps a win-
dow’s contents up-to-date with what has been selected in an-
other window.
Listen to MIDI A function in the → Editor, while pressing S
incoming MIDI events directly alter the value of the current
parameter.
Local menus Menus that belong to a specific window and
not to the program as a whole.
Location A library parameter that contains an entry’s mem-
ory location address. This is one of the factors taken into ac-
count when an entry is sent. This parameter ensures that the
entries’ locations within the device are safe-guarded, even
when you are editing the library.
Logic Emagic’s flagship sequencer and notation program,
able to communicate via → AutoLink with SoundDiver.
Memory Manager The function within SoundDiver that
represents a MIDI device’s memory contents. It allows sounds
and other data to be copied, moved and deleted, etc.
Menu A list of functions or options that can be selected using
the mouse.
MIDI patchbay A hardware device that allows MIDI signals
to be routed to various destinations. Some patchbays can be re-
mote-controlled using SoundDiver’s →Patchbay modules.
MIDI Thru a) The SoundDiver function that routes all in-
coming MIDI data directly to the active MIDI device. It also
allows the MIDI channel to be changed. b) Most MIDI devices
have a MIDI Thru port that allows further MIDI devices to be
connected to the system.
AutoLink
449
User Manual
Version 3.0
MIDItasking system An expansion of the computer’s oper-
ating system that manages the multitasking MIDI communica-
tion between different programs that co-habit the computer’s
RAM at the same time.
Mini-sequencer →Sequencer
Mixed library A library that contains the data from more
than one device.
Model Manufacturers of MIDI devices usually offer various
models within a family of devices, and these are all capable of
being addressed by SoundDiver. Often, a module is compatible
with several models (e.g. DX7II, TX802).
Modifier keys These are the keys on the computer that are
used in combination with other keys to make up a variety of
→key commands (C, ç, S, ‚, O, A).
Module These control the communication between Sound-
Diver and the various devices, and give SoundDiver the func-
tions necessary to do this. A module is much more comprehen-
sive and powerful than an →Adaptation, but it cannot be ed-
ited.
Name Provider A component of → AutoLink. The ~ pro-
vides the names of entries to an Instrument in →Logic.
On-line Help The part of the program that contains user-as-
sistance in the form of text information displayed on-screen.
SoundDiver offers interactive context-sensitive functions that
produce on-screen help-text in certain situations.
Overview A viewing mode in the → Editor: it gives a bird’s-
eye view of the groupings of editing parameters, facilitating
your navigation around the Editor. Additionally, clicking a pa-
rameter group acts as an entry to that group’s →detailed dis-
play.
Parent Entry →Entry which contains dependencies to other
entries (→child entries)
Patchbay →MIDI patchbay
450
Appendix D
Glossary
Emagic
SoundDiver
Patchbay module The module for a →MIDI patchbay; it
contains special functions for →scanning and for switching the
MIDI routing.
Path Gives the coordinates of a file’s location on a disk, i.e.
the partition (if a hard disk) and the folder(s).
Resulting value The value which is calculated from an →in-
coming value using various calculation, based on properties of
the →Controller Assignment and the →controlled parameter.
The resulting value will become the new value of the con-
trolled parameter.
Scan in SoundDiver: the program automatically looks for any
devices it can recognize that are hooked up to the MIDI sys-
tem. If it finds any, they will be installed and displayed in the
→Setup window.
Screen set A storable configuration of windows, instantly re-
callable using a key command.
Sequencer A MIDI recorder for recording and playing back
notes and other MIDI data. SoundDiver has a mini-sequencer
so you can create sequences for auditioning sounds.
Setup The representation, in SoundDiver, of your MIDI sys-
tem. Devices can be automatically scanned in or manually
added to the Setup.
Snapshot A temporary buffer containing the entry currently
being worked on in the Editor. The ~ is copied into a library of
the same name. The ~ function allows many interim stages of
your editing to be stored for later retrieval.
Surf! Previously used term form →Audition.
SysEx, System Exclusive data MIDI messages that de-
scribe sounds and other complex data. This is the language that
SoundDiver speaks, though you don’t need to know that!
Universal Device Inquiry A standard →SysEx message
that serves to recognize devices hooked up to the MIDI sys-
tem.
AutoLink
451
User Manual
Version 3.0
Universal Module The SoundDiver →module that man-
ages the editable adaptations for all kinds of MIDI devices.
Update To install a new version.
User interface All the elements and functions seen in the
program’s display used to control the program, e.g. mouse, win-
dow or menu operations.
Used entries Entries that are used by other entries within a
Device or library, such as programs in a synth’s combination or
voices within a multi-program.
x/y scroll gadget The little box in the bottom left-hand cor-
ner of a SoundDiver window that can be dragged to make the
contents of the window move horizontally and vertically at the
same time.
452
Appendix D
Glossary
Emagic
SoundDiver
Index
453
User Manual
Version 3.0
Numerics
3D Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
A
Activating a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Active Device
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
~ menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 382
Altering default parameters . . . . 383
Compared with module . . . . . . . . 380
Edit… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Editing an ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Adaptations
new ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Adaption
Autor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Add to selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Additional Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Aktiver Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Alien formats
Importing ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
All Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
All entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
All Notes Off
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Apple Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 388, 427
Archiving layered sounds . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Assignment
Find ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Assignments
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Audition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 233, 263
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Auditioning the selected entries . . . . . 106
Authorization
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Starting without ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Authorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Authorizing
~ the hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Auto Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 239
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
AutoAudition . . . . . . . . . 111, 157, 159, 324
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 265, 357
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
~ and OMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
~ and OMS simultaneously . . . . . . 77
~ troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 364, 440
key commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Save Library for Logic Song . . . . 212
Autolink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Autoload library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Automatic scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
AutoPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 159, 183, 311
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Auto-Save Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Autoscroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
AutoSort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
AutoSurf
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
B
Bank
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Bar display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Blocks
Selecting ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
C
Capture MIDI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Channel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Check for MTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Child Entry
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
child entry 102, 150, 153, 154, 219, 220, 224,
. . . . . . . . 228, 231, 249, 264, 285, 287
child patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 219
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
454
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 150
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Clipboard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
~ for selected groups . . . . . . . . . . 317
Close
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Close Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Columns
~ moving and altering widths . . . 109
Altering width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 263
Communication error
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Compare
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Computer
~ keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configuring Library window . . . . . . . . 108
Connected to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Connected to… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Connecting
~ a MIDI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
~ the MIDI system . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Control Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Controlled parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Controller Assignment . . . . . . . . . 332, 335
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Controller Assignment Set
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Controller message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Conversion
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Converting
~ files between Macintosh and Atari
83
~ sounds of related devices . . . . . 286
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
key commands to clipboard . . . . . 92
Copy protection
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Copying
~ a parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 317
~ a screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Copy-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cubase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Simultaneous operation with ~ . . . 74
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 301
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
~ moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cutting
~ a parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 317
D
Data consistence
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Data consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Data format for the import . . . . . . . . . . 282
Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 261
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Datazoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 262
Deauthorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Default
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Deinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Deinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Delete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Deleting
~ a parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Deleting Doubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Deletion of duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Dependency list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 263
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Detailed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Device
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
~ ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 201, 261
~ parameter box . . . . . . 101, 197, 230
~ scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
~’s software version . . . . . . . . . . . 207
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
active ~ (Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Addressing from Setup window . 214
Deinstalling a ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Manual installation . . . . . . . . 99, 191
Index
455
User Manual
Version 3.0
Requesting its memory contents 104
Saving a ~’s memory contents . . . 104
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Device Parameter box
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Device window . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 102, 217
Opening the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Requesting contents on power-up . .
239
Saving contents as library . . . . . . 240
Zooming the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Dialog box
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Digital Music MX-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disable
MIDI Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DiskExpress II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dive! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
DMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Doubles
Checking ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 318
Dump
active ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recording ~ in Logic . . . . . . . . . . 376
Dump Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 408
deleting ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Duplication
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
E
Easy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Edit
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Edit Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 313
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
individual ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Multiple ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Edit button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Find again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Redo… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Select all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Toggle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Undo… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Editable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Editing adaptations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Editor
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
~ menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Clipboard functions . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Easy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Flip-menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
mouse operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Street map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Value-inputting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Values via MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Editor window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Closing the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
more than one ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Emagic
distributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Entering numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
~ auditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
~ moving and copying . . . . . . . . . 106
~ selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
~ sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Exchanging, copying, moving an ~ . .
228
Find an ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Requesting an ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
save ~ in Preferences file . . . . . . . 397
Selecting
~ an entry in the Device
window . . . . . . . . . . . 226
~ an entry in the library . . . 248
~ child entries . . . . . . . . . . . 249
~ entry using names . . . . . . 227
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Transmitting an ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Transmitting an ~ from a library . 267
456
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Use of Edit menu commands . . . 229
Entry Dependency Management 41, 154,
218
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Entry menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Audition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Build Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Dive! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Examples
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Extrapolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
F
Fader box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Fader box module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Fast Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
File
Insert ~ in library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
load and transmit . . . . . 211, 232, 288
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Close Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Delete file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Import… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Print… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Revert to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save as… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Filter sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 158, 275
Find again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 270
Find function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 268
Start Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Find window
Add to selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Comparison criteria . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Find value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Keep first, delete rest . . . . . . . . . . 274
Less options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
More options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Opening the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Search in all documents . . . . . . . . 275
Select all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Select in selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Select one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Selecting entries found . . . . . . . . 273
Simple search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
What . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Flicker-free display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Flip-menu
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Flip-menus
~ in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cross-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Mouse as slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Floating window . . . . . . 138, 168, 185, 302
Formatting
~ the hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
full duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Full Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
G
GeeThree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Generic SysEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Global settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
gPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Grab
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Graphic display of setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Griffin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
H
Hard disk
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 120, 231, 295
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
~ control bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
~ for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
~ index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
as a Floating window . . . . . . 172, 302
Cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Operating the ~ system . . . . . . . . 175
Index
457
User Manual
Version 3.0
zooming the ~ window . . . . . . . . 175
Hide Unused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Hide Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92, 93
high key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
high velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
I
Icon
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
ID number
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Identity number
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Import
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
~ several files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Data format for ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Polyframe library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Standard MIDI Files . . . . . . . . . . 276
Import… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Incoming value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Info Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 297, 326
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Initializing
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200
Insert title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Install
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Install window
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Install… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Manual ~ of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
modules and adaptations . . . . . . . . 72
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Installer program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IntelliMouse . . . . . . . . . . 130, 136, 221, 254
IntelliPoint 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Interactive On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Interface see MIDI-Interface
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Introductory tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Is equal in pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Is equal to selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Is similar in pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Is similar to selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
J
J. L. Cooper Synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
K
Keep first, delete rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
~ in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
concealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
importing assignments . . . . . . . . . . 93
initializing assignments . . . . . . . . . 93
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
printing a list of assignments . . . . . 92
special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Key commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
~ in AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
key commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Computer ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Keyboard velocity windows . . . . . . . . . 307
Keyboard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
KMX-8, KMX-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Known entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Larger view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Layered sounds
archiving ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Learn Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
458
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Learn MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Learn Separate Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Less options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 245
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
~ find functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
~ list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
~ sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Altering column width . . . . . . . . . 253
Auto-loading on start-up . . . . . . . 252
Automatic creation . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Build ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 234
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Dependency list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Dividing a ~ into zones . . . . . . . . 110
Examples of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Find functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Import… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Insert file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Insert title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Mixed ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 246
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Mouse operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Moving columns and altering widths
109
Opening, closing a ~ file . . . . . . . 247
Save ~ for Logic Song . . . . . . . . . 212
Selecting a ~ entries in ~ . . . . . . . 248
Show menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Size of a ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Sort menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Store sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Zoom box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Library entries
Requesting ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Library menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Audition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Store sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Library window
Configuring the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Link button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Link function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 311, 318
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Listen to MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Load
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 232, 288
Local menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 134
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
~ in Library window . . . . . . . . . . 263
~s in Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . 211
~s in the Device window . . . . . . . 232
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 262
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Changing the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Deleting the assignment . . . . . . . 291
Locations (memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 315, 357
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
remote controlling ~ by SoundDiver
368
Logic Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Logic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
low key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
low velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
M
Manual
Generally on the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Master keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 209
Maximum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Memory
free ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Requesting contents of device . . 104
Memory Manager
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Menu
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Generally on ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Local ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Local ~ bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Main ~ bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Menu functions
~ in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MicroLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
MIDI
~ communication troubleshooting . .
427
Index
459
User Manual
Version 3.0
~ Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
~ functions of Device window . . 237
~ Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
~ patchbay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
~ Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
~ system connection . . . . . . . . . . . 52
~ Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
~ Thru channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
~tasking
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Listen to ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Process incoming ~ only for active
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
MIDI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MIDI Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
MIDI interface
~ connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MIDI Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Use ~ if available . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
MIDI menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AutoAudition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AutoPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Maximum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
MIDI Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Reset controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MIDI Monitor
menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MIDI patchbay
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Control a ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
MIDI Remote Control
switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
MIDI Thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
~ for multiple edit buffers . . . . . . 314
~ in OMS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
~ Master keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
MIDI Time Piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
MIDItasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MIDITEMP PMM-44/PMM-88 . . . . . . 57
Mini-sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 182
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Mirror
~ Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
~ Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Mixed library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 110, 246
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Mixer Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 261
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Modem Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Modifier keys
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Atari/Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 260
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
~s compared with adaptations . . . 380
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Universal ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Universal ~ (Definition) . . . . . . . 451
More options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Motor Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
~ as slider . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 303, 399
~ in flip-menus . . . . . . . . . . 305
~ operations in the library . . . . . . 249
using the ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Moving
~ icons with the mouse . . . . . . . . 194
~ window contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
MQX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
MTP
~ Cable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
~ Konfiguration überprüfen . . . . 391
MTP AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
MTP II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Multiple Document Interface . . . . . . . 133
Multitasking see MIDItasking
N
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 256, 260
Name Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Navigating
~ in the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
New menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Build library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Scan all models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Next window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Note Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
460
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Note On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Number-input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Numerals, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NumLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
O
OMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
~ and AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
~ and AutoLink simultaneously . . 77
MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Name Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Studio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Time Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Use ~ if available . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
see Help
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opcode Galaxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Open Device
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Open Key Commands… . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Open Library
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Open Setup
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Optimization programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Options menu
Device window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 235
Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Out Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Overwriting memory entries . . . . . . . . . 405
P
Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Page setup… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
~ Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Recording ~ changes in Logic . . 371
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Parameter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
~ for entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Auto Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Connected to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 261
Device’s software version . . . . . . 207
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200
Master keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 261
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 260
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
On and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Out Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 200
Play Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Preserve Thru-Port/Channel . . . 202
Return to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Send Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Thru Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Parameter group
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Parameterbox
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Parent Entry
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
parent entry . 102, 150, 153, 154, 218, 219,
220, 224, 231, 249, 264, 285, 286, 287,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 321
parent patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 219
Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 264
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Pasting
~ a parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Patchbay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 199
~ Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Special parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Index
461
User Manual
Version 3.0
Patchbay module
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Patchbay Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Patchbay see MIDI ~
Path
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Play Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 383
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Plop sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Poly Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Polyframe library
import ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PowerBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
~ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
~ in AutoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Check doubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Mouse as slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Save ~ as… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
saving ~ automatically . . . . . . . . . 411
saving ~ manually . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Use GEM Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . 404
Preferences… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Preserve Thru-Port/Channel . . . . . . . . 202
Print… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Program Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Program start
Use MIDI Manager . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Use OMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Programmierhandbuch . . . . . . . . . 325, 384
Q
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
R
Randomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Range
~ menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remote Control Adaptations . . . . . . . . 242
Remote Control via MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Remote-control adaptation . . . . . . . . . . 314
Remote-controlling Logic by SoundDiver
368
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 297
Requesting
~ device’s memory contents . . . . 104
~ entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Reset controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Resulting value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Return to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Revert to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Roland A-880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Rubber band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 142
S
SAC-2k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
~ device’s memory contents . . . . 104
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Save as… . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 211, 234, 288
Save device entries in Preferences file 397
Save Prefs as… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Saving preferences automatically . . . . . 411
Saving preferences manually . . . . . . . . 411
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
~ in OMS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Scan all models
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Screen set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Synchronizing ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
copying ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Copying a ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Occupying and recalling ~s . . . . . 139
protecting ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
reverting to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
sequencer-controlled switching . 165
storing ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
switching ~s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
462
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Search in all documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Select
~ all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 274
~ in selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
~ one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Selected entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
~ a parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 316
~ a single entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
~ blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
~ entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
~ entries found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
~ in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Toggling selection . . . . . . . . 142, 155
Send Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 383
Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 182
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
~ in OMS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Setup
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Manually adding devices . . . . . . . . 69
Moving icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Opening Device window from the
Setup w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Show menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Show progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 262
Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Smaller view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Softlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Sort
~ functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Sort menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
~ a zoned library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Automatic ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Sound bank
Saving a ~ as a library . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sound cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sound Diver
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sound Diver EOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Sound Diver K5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Sound effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Sound names
~ in a multi instrument . . . . . . . . 363
~ in Logic Instrument . . . . . . . . . 362
SoundDiver
~ as a background program . . . . . . 83
~ in OMS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
~’s user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Deinstalling ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Introduction in ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Quitting ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Removing ~ from the hard disk . . 64
Updating ~ installation . . . . . . . . . 61
SoundDiver OEM
Differences to SoundDiver . . . . . . 45
no hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Sounds
instantly saving ~ for a production . .
292
Special device parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Special menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Special parameters
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Stack windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Standard MIDI Files
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Standard Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Stealth Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Store all edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Store In… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Store sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 265
Street map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Studio 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Index
463
User Manual
Version 3.0
Operation without OMS . . . . . . . . 75
Studio 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Studio 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Surf!
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Switching Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SysEx
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
~ introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
SysEx communication error
online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
System Exclusive data see SysEx
System messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SYX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
T
Tempo field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Text input box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Thru Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tile windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 383
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Toggle
MIDI remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 238
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 232, 288
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
U
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
~ edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
~ function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Unitor8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 391
Universal Device Inquiry
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Universal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Programming Manual . 325, 367, 384
Universal-Modul
Programmierhandbuch . . . . . . . . 384
Update
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
SoundDiver installation . . . . . . . . . 61
Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Use GEM Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
used by… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Used entries
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
uses… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
V
Value
incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
resulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Values
Increasing or decreasing ~s . . . . . 309
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
velocity range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Version
new ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
View
larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
smaller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Vision
Simultaneous operation with ~ . . . 74
W
Waldorf Midibay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
wheel button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Window
~ layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
~ management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
~ moving contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
~ operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
~ technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Column layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Floating ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
larger view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Moving a ~ in background . . . . . . 137
Sequencer ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
smaller view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Standard commands . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Window list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Windows
Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Windows “number” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Windows menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Close window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
464
Index
Emagic
SoundDiver
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
MIDI Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Open Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Open Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Open Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Stack windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tile windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Window list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Zoom window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
X
x/y scroll gadget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 300
(Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Z
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Zoom
~ box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
~ window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Navigation menu